Din Rail Mounted FBM Subsystem Users Guide

B0400FA
REV D
I/A Series
DIN Rail Mounted FBM Subsystem
Users Guide
October 4, 2002
Baseplate
Operational Status
Operational Status
Fieldbus
Tx
Rx
Fieldbus
Tx
Rx
Ethernet
Tx
Rx
Ethernet
Tx
Rx
FCM10E
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
Operational Status
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
ON ON
OFF ON
ON OFF
OFF OFF
Operational Status
FBM201
Channel Isolated
Baseplate I. D.
8 input, 0-20mA
No.
2
1
0
1
2
3
Operational Status
FBM201
P0914SQ
Fieldbus Communications
Modules
P0914SQ
FCM10E
Communication
10 Mbps Coaxial Ethernet to
2 Mbps Fieldbus
P0914YM
Communication
2 Mbps Fieldbus
P0914YM
FCM Identification
Left Module
P0914ZM
User Defined
Right Module
al Status
01
02
03
04
06
08
07
N
P
U
T
05
i- i+
i-
iP
i+ iP
i- i+ iP
i- i+ iP
i- i+ iP
i- i+ iP
i- i+ iP
i- i+ iP
20
1,
0-
20
Operation
C
C 08
C 7
C 06 0
C
C 04 05
C
C 02 03
01
A
A 08
A 07
A 06
A 05
A 04
A 03
A 02
01
Termination
Assembly
Fieldbus
Module
B
B 08
B 07
B 06
B 05
B 04
B 03
B 02
01
BM201
ed
l Isolat
Channe0-20mA
8 input,
Q
P0914S
To/From Field
Sensors/Actuators
Foxboro, FoxCAE, FoxCom and I/A Series are registered trademarks of Invensys Systems, Inc.
Invensys is a trademark of Invensys plc.
FOUNDATION is a trademark of The Fieldbus Foundation.
HART is a trademarks of Hart Communications Foundation.
Modbus is a trademark of AEG Schneider Automation, Inc.
Profibus-DP are trademarks of PROFIBUS Users Organization (PNO).
Solaris is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
All other brand names may be trademarks of their respective companies.
Copyright 1999-2002 Invensys Systems, Inc.
All rights reserved
Contents
Figures.................................................................................................................................... ix
Tables.................................................................................................................................... xv
Preface................................................................................................................................. xvii
Revision Information ............................................................................................................ xvii
Compliance with European Directives ................................................................................. xviii
Safety Considerations ........................................................................................................... xviii
Reference Documents ............................................................................................................ xix
1. Overview ........................................................................................................................... 1
Baseplate Implementation ......................................................................................................... 3
Ethernet Trunk Fieldbus Implementation ................................................................................. 6
Fieldbus Communications Modules ..........................................................................................
FCM10E Fieldbus Communications Module ......................................................................
FCM10Ef Fieldbus Communications Module .....................................................................
FCM2F2/FCM2F4/FCM2F10 Fieldbus Communications Module ....................................
7
7
8
9
Fieldbus Modules ...................................................................................................................... 9

FBM201 Channel Isolated, 0 to 20 mA Input Interface Module ..................................... 10
FBM202 Channel Isolated, Thermocouple/mV Input Interface Module ......................... 10
FBM203 Channel Isolated, Platinum and Nickel RTD Input Interface Module ............. 11
FBM204 Channel Isolated, 0 to 20 mA I/O Interface Module ........................................ 11
FBM205 Channel Isolated, Redundant 0 to 20 mA I/O Interface Module ..................... 11
FBM206 Channel Isolated Pulse Input Interface Module ................................................ 13
FBM207/FBM207b/FBM207c Channel Isolated Voltage Monitor/Contact
Sense Input Interface Module ............................................................................................. 13
FBM211 Differential 0 to 20 mA Input Interface Module .............................................. 13
FBM212 Differential Thermocouple/mV Input Interface Module .................................. 14
FBM213 Differential Platinum and Nickel RTD Input Interface Module ...................... 14
FBM214 HART Communication Input Interface Module ............................................. 14
FBM215 HART Communication Output Interface Module .......................................... 14
FBM216 HART Communication Redundant Input Interface Module ........................... 15
FBM217 Group Isolated Discrete Input Interface Module .............................................. 15
FBM218 HART Communication Redundant Output Interface Module ........................ 15
FBM219 Group Isolated Discrete I/O Interface Module ................................................. 15
FBM220/221 FOUNDATION fieldbus H1 Communications Interface Module ........... 16
FBM223 PROFIBUS-DP Communication Interface Modules ....................................... 16
FBM224 Modbus Communication Interface Module ..................................................... 16
FBM237 Channel Isolated Redundant Ready 0 to 20 mA Output Interface Module ...... 16
FBM241/FBM241b/c/d Channel Isolated Discrete I/O Interface Module ...................... 18
iii
B0400FA Rev D
Contents
FBM242 Channel Isolated Externally Sourced Discrete Output Interface Module .......... 18
FBM243 Channel Isolated FoxCom Dual Baud Rate Intelligent
Device Interface Module .................................................................................................... 19
FBM246 Channel Isolated FoxCom Redundant Dual Baud Rate
Intelligent Device Interface Module ................................................................................... 19
Enclosures ............................................................................................................................... 21
B03 and B04 Enclosures ..................................................................................................... 22
B05 Enclosure .................................................................................................................... 23
Termination Assemblies .......................................................................................................... 25
Product Sizing Constraints ......................................................................................................
Cable Lengths Ethernet Trunk Fieldbus, 10Base2 ...........................................................
Cable Lengths Module Fieldbus ......................................................................................
Cable Lengths Combined ................................................................................................
Equipment Quantities ........................................................................................................
26
26
26
26
26
2. Enclosure Installation ...................................................................................................... 29

Preinstallation Procedures .......................................................................................................
Unloading ..........................................................................................................................
Unpacking ..........................................................................................................................
Subsystem Power Checks ...................................................................................................
29
30
30
30
Thermal Loading .................................................................................................................... 31

Enclosure Power and Earth (Ground) Networks ..................................................................... 34
B03/B04 Enclosure Installation ...............................................................................................
B03/B04 Enclosure Dimensions and Clearance Requirements ...........................................
B03/B04 Enclosure Footprint and Recommended Floor Cutouts ......................................
B03/B04 Enclosure Cable Entry .........................................................................................
B03/B04 Enclosure Equipment Configurations and Mass ..................................................
B03/B04 Enclosure Mounting ...........................................................................................
Adjoining B04 Enclosures ..................................................................................................
B03/B04 Enclosure Over-Temperature Sensing .................................................................
B03/B04 Enclosure Earth (Ground) Connections ..............................................................
B03/B04 Enclosure Main Power Connections ....................................................................
34
35
35
36
37
37
38
38
39
40
B05 Enclosure Installation ......................................................................................................

B05 Enclosure Dimensions and Clearance Requirements ...................................................
B05 Enclosure Cable Entry ................................................................................................
NEMA 4 Version ..........................................................................................................
NEMA 4X Version ........................................................................................................
B05 Enclosure Equipment Configuration and Mass ...........................................................
B05 Enclosure Mounting ...................................................................................................
B05 Enclosure Over-Temperature Sensing .........................................................................
B05 Enclosure Earth (Ground) Connections ......................................................................
B05 Enclosure Main Power Connections ...........................................................................
43
43
44
44
45
45
45
46
47
49
3. Equipment Installation.................................................................................................... 51
Power Supply Mounting and Installation ................................................................................ 51
iv
Contents
B0400FA Rev D
Foxboro Power Supply (FPS400-24) ..................................................................................

Factory Mains Power Connections to the Power Supply ....................................................
Lambda Power Supplies .....................................................................................................
Factory Mains Power Connections to the Lambda Power Supplies .....................................
51
54
56
58
Baseplate Installation ...............................................................................................................

DIN Rail Mounting of the Horizontal Baseplate ................................................................
DIN Rail Mounting of the Vertical Baseplate .....................................................................
Installing the Horizontal Baseplate in a 19-Inch Rack ........................................................
Baseplate Power Supply Cabling .........................................................................................
Foxboro Power Supply FPS400-24 ................................................................................
Lambda Power Supplies .................................................................................................
Baseplate Power Cable Connections ..............................................................................
Baseplate ID Switch Setting ...............................................................................................
60
60
62
63
64
64
66
67
68
Module Installation .................................................................................................................

FBM Installation (Placement) ............................................................................................
FCM10E or FCM10Ef Installation (Placement) ................................................................
FCM2F2/4/10 Installation (Placement) .............................................................................
69
70
70
71
FCM Identification Assembly Installation ............................................................................... 71

Letterbug Set Installation ........................................................................................................ 71
Module Addressing ................................................................................................................. 71
Redundant Adapter Installation .............................................................................................. 73
Termination Assembly Installation .......................................................................................... 74
4. Equipment Signal Cabling............................................................................................... 77
Ethernet Trunk Fieldbus Cable Connections ..........................................................................
Ethernet Trunk Fieldbus Connections at the I/A Series Control Station ............................
Fiber Optic Extension of Ethernet Trunk Fieldbus ............................................................
Ethernet Trunk Fieldbus Connections at the FCM10E ......................................................
Active Star Network Connections ......................................................................................
Connections from the Media Converters to the Multiport Fiber Optic Converters .......
Connections from the Hub to the FCM10Ef Modules ..................................................
77
78
79
81
81
82
83
Signal Cable Connections Baseplate Level ............................................................................

Shielded Twisted-Pair Cable Connections .....................................................................
Combined Shielded Twisted-Pair and Fiber Optic Cabling Connections ......................
Fiber Optic Cabling (Only) Connections ......................................................................
84
84
86
87
Fiber Optic Cable Specifications ............................................................................................. 88

5. Field Signal Connections ................................................................................................. 91
Field Wiring to Termination Assembly Connections .............................................................. 91
Field (Signal) Wires .................................................................................................................
Signal Wire Classification ...................................................................................................
Number of Wires ...............................................................................................................
Wire Size ............................................................................................................................
Shield Terminations ...........................................................................................................
95
95
97
98
98
v
B0400FA Rev D
Contents
Enclosure Termination Assembly Complement .................................................................. 98

Fieldbus Modules with Nonincendive Field Circuits ............................................................... 98
North American vs. CENELEC Terminology .................................................................... 98
Requirements ..................................................................................................................... 99
Type S ........................................................................................................................... 99
Type R ........................................................................................................................ 100
Termination Assembly Properties .......................................................................................... 103
Ethernet, Fiber Optic, and Module Bus Cable Runs in Hazardous Areas .............................. 109
FBM201 Field Connections .................................................................................................. 109
FBM220/221 Field Connections .......................................................................................... 160
Using the Cable Balun Module with Intelligent Transmitters ............................................... 198
Installing the Cable Balun Module ................................................................................... 199
Termination Assembly Relays ...............................................................................................
Contact Data ....................................................................................................................
Characteristic Data ...........................................................................................................
Maximum Switching Capacity ....................................................................................
vi
200
200
201
201
Contents
B0400FA Rev D
Electrical Service Life ................................................................................................... 202

6. Configuration Information............................................................................................ 203
System Definition ................................................................................................................. 203
Letterbug (Module Identifier) Assignments ..................................................................... 204
System Definition Procedure ............................................................................................ 204
Integrated Control Configuration .........................................................................................
Off-Line Control Configuration using FoxCAE ...............................................................
Example of Off-Line Configuration using FoxCAE .....................................................
Off-Line Control Configuration using the ICC ................................................................
On-Line Control Configuration using the ICC ................................................................
206
209
210
213
218
Fail-Safe Operation ...............................................................................................................

Fail-Safe Functionality .....................................................................................................
Fail-Safe for Type 1 Failures - FBM FAIL ...................................................................
Fail-Safe for Type 2 Failures - COMM FAIL ..............................................................
Fail-Safe Examples .......................................................................................................
FBM205/FBM237 Fail-Safe Parameter Configuration .....................................................
Troubleshooting ...............................................................................................................
219
219
219
220
220
220
221
7. Process Operator Displays............................................................................................. 223

8. Maintenance.................................................................................................................. 225
System Management Displays ...............................................................................................
Fieldbus Level and Module Fieldbus Level Displays Examples ......................................
FBM Equipment Information Display Example ............................................................
POWER 1 and POWER 2 ..........................................................................................
PRIM CMD STAT Field ............................................................................................
FBM STATUS Field ...................................................................................................
FCM Equipment Information Display Example ...........................................................
225
226
227
228
228
229
229
FBM205 Redundant Power Supply Test (Internally Powered Transmitter) .......................... 232
LED Indicators ..................................................................................................................... 233
FBM LED Indicators ....................................................................................................... 233
FCM LED Indicators ....................................................................................................... 234
Module Removal/Replacement ............................................................................................. 237
Technical Support ................................................................................................................. 238
Module Return Procedure ..................................................................................................... 238
Appendix A. Module Specifications ................................................................................... 239
Module Physical Characteristics ............................................................................................ 239
Module Temperature, Relative Humidity, and Contamination ............................................. 239
Module Electromagnetic Interference .................................................................................... 240
Module Vibration ................................................................................................................. 240
Module Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption .............................................................. 240
vii
B0400FA Rev D
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) .................................................................................

European EMC Directive 89/336/EEC ............................................................................
IEC 61000-4-2 ESD Immunity .......................................................................................
IEC 61000-4-3 Radiated Field Immunity ........................................................................
IEC 61000-4-4 Electrical Fast Transient/Burst Immunity ................................................
IEC 61000-4-5 Surge Immunity ......................................................................................
IEC 61000-4-6 Immunity to Conducted Disturbances ....................................................
IEC 61000-4-8 Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity ............................................
IEC 61000-4-11 Voltage Dips, Short Interruptions and Voltage Variations Immunity ....
Contents
241
241
241
241
241
241
241
241
241
Appendix B. Ethernet/Fiber Optic Equipment Specifications............................................ 243

Multiport Fiber Optic Converter (Hub) (P0916JM) .............................................................
General Functional Specifications .....................................................................................
Packet Transmission Characteristics .................................................................................
Delay Times ................................................................................................................
Preamble .....................................................................................................................
Jam Output .................................................................................................................
Auto Partitioning/Reconnection ..................................................................................
Jabber Lock-Up Protection ..........................................................................................
Standard Software ............................................................................................................
SNMP Agent ...............................................................................................................
Local ASCII Terminal Agent (Omega Local) ...............................................................
Telnet (Omega Remote) ..............................................................................................
Inter-Repeater Bus ............................................................................................................
Software Downloading .....................................................................................................
Fiber Optic Interface ........................................................................................................
Transmitter .................................................................................................................
Temperature ................................................................................................................
Relative Humidity .......................................................................................................
Electrical/Mechanical Approvals ..................................................................................
243
243
243
243
243
243
244
244
244
244
244
244
244
244
244
245
245
245
245
10Base2 Coaxial Transceiver Module (P0916JN) .................................................................. 245

BNC to Fiber-ST Media Converter ......................................................................................
Performance .....................................................................................................................
Network Standards ...........................................................................................................
Maximum Standard Ethernet Segment Lengths ...............................................................
Operating Environment ...................................................................................................
Power Supply (External) ...................................................................................................
Connectors .......................................................................................................................
Agency Approvals .............................................................................................................
245
245
245
246
246
246
246
246
Appendix C. DIN Rail Mounted FBM Control Schemes .................................................. 247

Index .................................................................................................................................. 265
viii
Figures
1-1.
1-2.
1-3.
1-4.
1-5.
1-6.
1-7.
1-8.
1-9.
1-10.
1-11.
1-12.
1-13.
1-14.
1-15.
1-16.
1-17.
1-18.
1-19.
2-1.
2-2.
2-3.
2-4.
2-5.
2-6.
2-7.
2-8.
3-1.
3-2.
3-3.
3-4.
3-5.
3-6.
3-7.
3-8.
3-9.
3-10.
3-11.
3-12.
3-13.
3-14.
3-15.
3-16.
3-17.
DIN Rail Mounted FBM Subsystem Elements ............................................................. 2

DIN Rail Mounted Fieldbus Module Baseplate ............................................................ 3
FCM Identification Assemblies ..................................................................................... 4
Baseplate Interconnection Using Shielded Twisted-Pair Cable ...................................... 4
Baseplate Interconnection Using Shielded Twisted-Pair and Fiber Optic Cable ............ 5
Baseplate Interconnection Using Fiber Optic Cable Only ............................................. 5
Typical Direct Network Configuration ......................................................................... 6
Typical Active Star Network Configuration .................................................................. 7
FCM10E Fieldbus Communications Module ............................................................... 8
FCM10Ef Fieldbus Communications Module .............................................................. 8
FCM2F Fieldbus Communications Module ................................................................. 9
DIN Rail Mounted Fieldbus Module (Typical) .......................................................... 10
Termination Assembly Connections to FBM205 ........................................................ 12
Termination Assembly Connections to Redundant FBM237 ...................................... 17
Termination Assembly Connections to Redundant FBM246 ...................................... 20
DIN Rail Mounted FBM Enclosures .......................................................................... 22
B03/B04 Enclosure, Typical Equipment Configuration .............................................. 23
B05 Enclosure, Typical Equipment Configuration ...................................................... 24
Termination Assemblies (Typical) ............................................................................... 25
B03/B04 Enclosure Dimensions and Clearance Requirements .................................... 35
Enclosure B03/B04 Plinth/Cable Base Footprint ........................................................ 36
Enclosure B03/B04 Recommended Floor Cut-outs ..................................................... 36
B03/B04 Enclosure, Earth Connection Points ............................................................ 39
B03/B04 Enclosure With FPS400-24 Power Supply ................................................... 40
ac Main Power Connections (Redundant Power) ........................................................ 42
16-Position FBM Enclosure B05 Dimensions and Clearance Requirements ................ 44
B05 Enclosure, Earth Connection Points .................................................................... 48
Foxboro DIN Rail Mounted FBM Subsystem Equipment Power Supply .................... 51
Foxboro Power Supply FPS400-24 Clearance Requirements ....................................... 52
Foxboro Power Supply FPS400-24 Wall Mount Bracket Screw Hole Dimensions ...... 53
FPS400-24 Power Supply Wiring ............................................................................... 55
Factory Mains Input Power Connector to FPS400-24 ................................................ 56
Lambda DIN Rail Mounted FBM Subsystem Equipment Power Supplies .................. 57
Lambda Power Supply Screw Hole Dimensions .......................................................... 58
Factory Mains Power Connections to the Lambda 250 W Power Supply .................... 59
Factory Mains Power Connections to the Lambda 500 W Power Supply .................... 59
Required Support for Baseplate with Horizontal DIN Rail Mounting ........................ 60
Mounting of Baseplate on DIN Rail ........................................................................... 61
Required Support for Baseplate with Vertical DIN Rail Mounting ............................. 62
Installation of Horizontal Baseplate into a 19-Inch Rack ............................................. 64
Output Power Connector from FPS400-24 to Baseplate Connector ........................... 65
Baseplate Power Cable Connections to Lambda 250 W and 500 W Power Supplies ... 67
Power Supply Cable Connections at the Baseplate ...................................................... 68
Baseplate ID Switches ................................................................................................. 68
ix
B0400FA Rev D
3-18.
3-19.
3-20.
3-21.
4-1.
4-2.
4-3.
4-4.
4-5.
4-6.
4-7.
4-8.
4-9.
4-10.
4-11.
5-1.
5-2.
5-3.
5-4.
5-5.
5-6.
5-7.
5-8.
5-9.
5-10.
5-11.
5-12.
5-13.
5-14.
5-15.
5-16.
5-17.
5-18.
5-19.
5-20.
5-21.
5-22.
5-23.
5-24.
5-25.
5-26.
5-27.
5-28.
5-29.
5-30.
5-31.
Figures
Baseplate Module and Letterbug Installation ............................................................... 70

Examples of Baseplate Letterbug Assignments ............................................................. 73
Redundant Adapter Installation (Typical) ................................................................... 74
Installing or Removing Termination Assemblies (TAs) ............................................... 75
Assembling the Media Converter Mounting Bracket ................................................... 79
RG-58 (Coaxial) to Fiber Optic Cabling Connections via Media Converters .............. 80
Coaxial Ethernet Trunk Fieldbus Connections at the FCM10E .................................. 81
Replacing Transceiver Module in Multiport Fiber Optic Converter (Hub) ................. 82
Ethernet Trunk Fieldbus Cabling to Multiport Fiber Optic Converter (Hub) ............ 83
Fiber Optic Ethernet Trunk Fieldbus Connections at the FCM10Ef .......................... 84
Baseplate Interconnections (Example) Using Shielded Twisted-Pair Cabling .............. 85
Baseplate Interconnections (Example) Using Shielded Twisted-Pair and
Fiber Optic Cabling .................................................................................................... 87
Baseplate Interconnections (Example) Using Fiber Optic Cabling .............................. 88
Fiber Optic Cable Indoor Type ................................................................................ 89
Fiber Optic Cable Outdoor Type ............................................................................. 89
Field Wiring to FBM Connections ............................................................................. 91
Parts of the Termination Assembly (Typical) .............................................................. 93
Field Wiring Connections to Termination Assemblies ................................................ 95
Wiring Separation, Example ........................................................................................ 97
FBM201 Input Connections ..................................................................................... 110
Use of In-Line Resistor Assembly with FBM201, FBM204, FBM205, or FBM211 .. 111
FBM201 Termination Assembly (TA) Labeling ........................................................ 111
FBM201 0 to 20 mA Input Circuit ........................................................................... 112
FBM202 Input Connections (when used with Compression
Termination Assembly Block) ................................................................................... 113
FBM202 Thermocouple/Millivolt Input Circuit ....................................................... 114
FBM203 RTD Input/Output Circuit ....................................................................... 116
FBM204 Output Connections .................................................................................. 119
FBM204 Input/Output Circuit ................................................................................ 120
FBM205 with Redundant Adapter Input Connections ............................................. 122
FBM205 with Redundant Adapter Output Connections .......................................... 123
FBM205 0 to 20 mA Input/Output Circuits ............................................................ 124
FBM206 Pulse Input Circuit .................................................................................... 126
FBM207 Input Connections (Part 1) ........................................................................ 128
FBM207 Input Connections (Continued, Part 2) ..................................................... 129
FBM207 Input Connections (Continued, Part 3) ..................................................... 130
FBM207b, FBM207c Input Connections ................................................................. 131
FBM207 Termination Assembly Labeling for Voltage Monitoring ........................... 131
FBM207b Termination Assembly Labeling for Contact Sensing ............................... 131
Figures
5-32.
5-33.
5-34.
5-35.
5-36.
5-37.
5-38.
5-39.
5-40.
5-41.
5-42.
5-43.
5-44.
5-45.
5-46.
5-47.
5-48.
5-49.
5-50.
5-51.
5-52.
5-53.
5-54.
5-55.
5-56.
5-57.
5-58.
5-59.
5-60.
5-61.
5-62.
5-63.
5-64.
5-65.
5-66.
5-67.
5-68.
5-69.
5-70.
5-71.
5-72.
5-73.
5-74.
5-75.
5-76.
5-77.
5-78.
B0400FA Rev D
FBM207c Termination Assembly Labeling for Contact Sensing ...............................

FBM207/b/c Voltage Monitor or Contact Sense Input Circuit .................................
FBM211 Input Connections (FBM Power) ..............................................................
FBM211 Input Connections (External Power) ..........................................................
Multiple FBM211 Input Channels Are Powered By a Single External
Power Supply ............................................................................................................
FBM211 Termination Assembly (TA) Labeling (Internal Source) .............................
FBM211 Termination Assembly (TA) Labeling (External Source) ............................
FBM211 Group Isolated Input Circuit .....................................................................
FBM212 Input Connections .....................................................................................
FBM212 Termination Assembly (TA) Labeling ........................................................
FBM212 Thermocouple/Millivolt Input Circuit .......................................................
FBM213 Input Connections .....................................................................................
FBM213 RTD Input/Output Circuit .......................................................................
FBM217 Input Connections (Voltage Monitor) (Part 1) ..........................................
FBM217 Input Connections (Voltage Monitor) (Continued, Part 2) .......................
FBM217 Input Connections (Contact Sense) ...........................................................
FBM217 Termination Assembly (TA) Labeling (Voltage Monitor) ..........................
FBM217 Termination Assembly (TA) Labeling (Contact Sense) ..............................
FBM217 Voltage Monitor Input Circuit ..................................................................
FBM219 Input Connections (Voltage Monitor) (Part1) ...........................................
FBM219 Input Connections (Contact Sense with Current Limiting) .......................
FBM219 Output Connections ..................................................................................
FBM219 Output Connections (Continued) .............................................................
FBM219 Output Connections with Power Distribution Terminals ..........................
FBM219 Termination Assembly (TA) Labeling (Voltage Monitor) ..........................
FBM219 Termination Assembly (TA) Labeling (Contact Sense) ..............................
FBM219 Voltage Monitor Input Circuit ..................................................................
FBM219 Output Switch (Externally Powered Load) Circuit .....................................
FBM220/221 FOUNDATION Fieldbus Cable Connections ...................................
FBM237 Output Connections ..................................................................................
FBM237 Channel Isolated Output Circuit ...............................................................
FBM241 Input Connections (Part 1) ........................................................................
FBM241 Input Connections (Continued, Part 2) .....................................................
FBM241 Input Connections (Continued, Part 3) .....................................................
FBM241b Input Connections ...................................................................................
FBM241c Input Connections ...................................................................................
FBM241c Input Connections (Continued) ...............................................................
FBM241d Input Connections ...................................................................................
FBM241 Output Connections (Part 1) .....................................................................
FBM241 Output Connections (Continued, Part 2) ..................................................
132
132
134
134
135
135
136
136
137
138
138
140
140
141
145
146
147
148
148
149
149
152
153
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
160
161
163
164
164
168
169
170
171
171
172
172
173
174
175
176
xi
B0400FA Rev D
Figures
5-79.
5-80.
5-81.
5-82.
5-83.
5-84.
5-85.
5-86.
5-87.
5-88.
5-89.
5-90.
5-91.
5-92.
5-93.
5-94.
5-95.
5-96.
5-97.
5-98.
5-99.
5-100.
5-101.
5-102.
5-103.
5-104.
177
178
179
179
180
181
182
182
183
184
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
194
197
197
198
FBM241b Output Connections ................................................................................

FBM241c Output Connections (Part 1) ...................................................................
FBM241c Output Connections (Continued, Part 2) ................................................
FBM241c Output Connections (Continued, Part 3) ................................................
FBM241d Output Connections ................................................................................
FBM241 Termination Assembly (TA) Labeling (Part 1) ...........................................
FBM241 Termination Assembly (TA) Labeling (Continued, Part 2) ........................
FBM241b Termination Assembly (TA) Labeling ......................................................
FBM241c Termination Assembly (TA) Labeling ......................................................
FBM241d Termination Assembly (TA) Labeling ......................................................
FBM241 Voltage Monitor or Contact Sense Input Circuits ......................................
FBM241 Output Switch (for Internal or External Source) Circuits ...........................
FBM242 Output Connections (Part 1) .....................................................................
FBM242 Termination Assembly (TA) Labeling (Part 1) ...........................................
FBM242 Termination Assembly (TA) Labeling (Continued, Part 2) ........................
FBM242 Channel Isolated Output Switch (for External Source) Circuits .................
FBM243 Input/Output Connections ........................................................................
FBM243 Input/Output Circuit ................................................................................
FBM246 with Redundant Adapter Connections .......................................................
FBM246 Input/Output Circuit ................................................................................
Cable Balun Module with Intelligent Field device powered by a
Common Power Supply ............................................................................................
5-105. Installing the Cable Balun Module ............................................................................
5-106. Maximum Switching Capacity for Relays Used in Termination Assemblies ..............
5-107. Electrical Service Life for Relays Used in Termination Assemblies .............................
6-1. Typical Control Scheme using DIN Rail Mounted FBM Subsystem ........................
6-2. Typical Editing Display for FCM ECB110 ...............................................................
6-3. ECB110 Configurable Parameters .............................................................................
6-4. Typical Editing Display for FBM201 (Analog Input, ECB1) ....................................
6-5. Typical Editing Display for FBM204 (Analog Output, ECB2) .................................
6-6. Typical Editing Display for FBM207 (Digital Input, ECB5) ....................................
6-7. Typical Editing Display for FBM241 (Digital Output, ECB5) .................................
8-1. PIO Bus Network Display (Typical) .........................................................................
8-2. PIO Bus Subnetwork Display (Typical) ....................................................................
8-3. FBM203 Equipment Information Display ................................................................
8-4. FCM10E/FCM10Ef Equipment Information Display (1 of 2) .................................
8-5. FCM10E/FCM10Ef Equipment Information Display (2 of 2) .................................
8-6. FBM205 Redundant Adapter ....................................................................................
8-7. FCM LED Indicators ................................................................................................
C-1. FBM201, Typical Control Scheme ...........................................................................
xii
199
200
201
202
206
214
215
216
216
217
217
226
227
228
230
230
233
237
247
248
249
250
Figures
C-5.
C-6.
C-7.
C-8.
C-9.
C-10.
C-11.
C-12.
C-13.
C-14.
C-15.
C-16.
C-17.
B0400FA Rev D
FBM205, Typical Control Scheme ...........................................................................

FBM207/FBM207b, Typical Control Scheme ..........................................................
FBM241/FBM241b/FBM241c/FBM241d, Typical Control Scheme .......................
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
xiii
B0400FA Rev D
xiv
Figures
Tables
2-1.
2-2.
2-3.
2-4.
3-1.
3-2.
3-3.
3-4.
3-5.
3-6.
4-1.
4-2.
4-3.
5-1.
5-2.
5-3.
5-4.
5-5.
5-6.
5-7.
5-8.
5-9.
5-10.
5-11.
5-12.
5-13.
5-14.
5-15.
5-16.
5-17.
5-18.
5-19.
5-20.
5-21.
5-22.
5-23.
5-24.
5-25.
5-26.
5-27.
5-28.
5-29.
5-30.
5-31.
FCM and FBM Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption ....................................... 31

TA Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption (Maximum) ....................................... 33
Per-Channel TA Power Consumption ........................................................................ 34
Power Supply Heat Dissipation ................................................................................... 34
FPS400-24 Input/Output Connectors ........................................................................ 56
P0914XA Baseplate Mounting Kit Contents ............................................................... 63
FPS400-24 Power Supply to Baseplate Cables ............................................................. 65
FPS400-24 Input/Output Connectors ........................................................................ 65
Lambda Power Supplies to Baseplate Cables ............................................................... 66
Setting the Baseplate ID Switches ............................................................................... 69
Ethernet and Fiber Optic Connection Equipment ...................................................... 77
Shielded Twisted-Pair Cables ...................................................................................... 85
Fiber Optic Cable Physical Specifications ................................................................. 90
Signal Wire Classification ............................................................................................ 96
Entity Parameters for FBM Nonincendive Field Circuits .......................................... 101
Termination Assemblies Basic Properties ................................................................... 104
FBM201 Termination Assembly ............................................................................... 109
FBM201 Termination Cabling Part Numbers .......................................................... 109
FBM207 Termination Assemblies ............................................................................. 127
FBM207b Termination Assembly ............................................................................. 127
FBM207c Termination Assembly ............................................................................. 128
FBM207, FBM207b, and FBM207c Termination Cabling Part Numbers ................ 128
FBM211 Termination Assemblies ............................................................................. 133
xv
B0400FA Rev D
5-32.
5-33.
5-34.
5-35.
5-36.
5-37.
5-38.
5-39.
5-40.
5-41.
5-42.
5-43.
5-44.
5-45.
5-46.
5-47.
5-48.
5-49.
5-50.
5-51.
5-52.
5-53.
6-1.
6-2.
8-1.
8-2.
8-3.
8-4.
8-5.
A-1.
A-2.
B-1.
xvi
FBM217 Termination Assemblies .............................................................................

FBM217 Termination Cabling Part Numbers ..........................................................
FBM218 Termination Assembly ...............................................................................
Termination Assembly Cables ...................................................................................
FBM237 Termination Assembly ...............................................................................
FBM241b Termination Assembly .............................................................................
FBM241c Termination Assemblies ...........................................................................
FBM241d Termination Assembly .............................................................................
FBM241, FBM241b/c/d Termination Cabling Part Numbers ..................................
Termination Assembly Relays Contact Data .............................................................
DIN Rail Mounted FBMs and Related ECBs ...........................................................
Required Fail-Safe Parameter Settings for Redundant FBM ECBs ............................
PRIM CMD STAT Field Values ..............................................................................
Explanations of the Bits (Set to 1) related to the FBM Status ....................................
FCM Equipment Information Display Fields ............................................................
FBM Operational Status LEDs .................................................................................
FCM LEDs ...............................................................................................................
RFI, ESD, and HFT Specifications ...........................................................................
S/IL Transient Specifications .....................................................................................
Fiber Optic Interface Specifications ...........................................................................
Tables
144
144
150
150
151
152
161
162
162
162
165
167
167
167
168
185
186
192
192
195
195
201
207
221
228
229
231
234
235
240
240
244
Preface
This document describes all aspects of the DIN rail mounted FBM subsystem, including:
Site planning
Installation
Configuration
Operation
Maintenance.
It is intended for use by process engineering, operations, and maintenance personnel.
Revision Information
For Release 6.5, the following changes were made:
Preface
Added a reference to Modbus Communication Interface Module (FBM224) Users
Guide (B0400FK)
Added a reference to Modbus Communication Input Interface Module (FBM 224)
(PSS 21H-2Z24 B4)
Updated WARNING about installing/removing components in hazardous locations.

Chapter 1 Overview
Added description of FBM224.
Chapter 2 Enclosure Installation
Table 2-1 added heat dissipation and power consumption for FBM224.
Chapter 5 Field Signal Connections
Added references to entity parameters for FBM224 to Table 5-2
Table 5-3 added FBM224
Added Field Connections for FBM224
Added WARNING about installing/removing components in hazardous locations.
Chapter 6 Configuration Information
Added FBM224 to Table 6-1.
Chapter 8 Maintenance
Guide (B0400FK) for equipment information display fields
Updated and added WARNING about installing/removing components in hazardous
locations.
Appendix C DIN Rail Mounted FBM Control Schemes
Guide (B0400FK).
xvii
B0400FA Rev D
Preface
Compliance with European Directives

All installation instructions shall be followed for system to comply with mandatory European
Directives 89/336/EEC and 73/23/EEC.
Safety Considerations
Safe use of this product depends largely upon proper installation and maintenance by you, the
user. This manual provides the information needed to properly install and maintain the DIN rail
mounted FBM subsystem. Where applicable, appropriate CAUTION and WARNING statements are included in the text of this document.
A CAUTION statement warns against potential hazards or unsafe practices which could result in
product or property damage; for example:
! CAUTION
Do not attempt to force the adjustment screw beyond its limit, or the threads may
be damaged.
A WARNING statement warns of a level of hazard which could result in personal injury; for
example:
! WARNING
Adjacent components and circuits have shock hazard potential that can cause personal injury. Use insulated tools and observe all safety precautions.
! WARNING
To prevent explosion, DO NOT install or remove cables, wiring, modules, or other
replaceable system components in hazardous locations. Remove power to the equipment at the source or ensure that the atmosphere is non-explosive before installing
or removing any electrical component.
xviii
Preface
B0400FA Rev D
Reference Documents
In addition to the information presented herein, you should be familiar with the following
I/A Series documents:
Control Processor 60 and Control Processor 60S Installation and Maintenance
(B0400FB)
FoxCAE Version 3.0 (B0193MR)

FOUNDATION fieldbus H1 Communication Interface Modules (FBM220/FBM221)
Users Guide (B0400FD)
HART Communication Interface Module (FBM214/215/216/218) Users Guide
(B0400FF)
Integrated Control Block Descriptions (B0193AX)
Integrated Control Configurator (B0193AV)
Integrated Control Software Concepts (B0193AW)
Modbus Communication Interface Module (FBM224) Users Guide (B0400FK)
Process Operations and Displays (B0193MM)
Profibus-DP Communication Interface Module (FBM223) Users Guide (B0400FE)
Site Planning (B0193AB)
Software Installation (Solaris Platform) (B0193JG)
System Definition: A Step-by-Step Procedure (B0193WQ)
System Equipment Installation (B0193AC)
System Management Displays (B0193JC and associated Help screens).
Most are available on the I/A Series Electronic Documentation CD-ROM (K0173TQ). The latest revisions may also be available through the Customer Satisfaction Center (CSC) at
http://ips.csc.invensys.com.
Also, the following Product Specification Sheets may be referenced:
Product Specification Sheet (PSS) Title
B03 Enclosure
B04 Enclosure
B05 Enclosure
Control Processor 60
Control Processor 60 and Control Processor 60S Integrated Control Software
Control Processor 60 Simplex
DIN Rail Mounted FBM Enclosures, Overview
DIN Rail Mounted FBM Equipment, Agency Certifications
DIN Rail Mounted FBM Field I/O Signal Terminations
DIN Rail Mounted FBM Subsystem Overview
DIN Rail Mounted FBM Subsystem Power Supplies
DIN Rail Mounted Fieldbus Module Baseplate
PSS Number
PSS 21H-2X3 B4
PSS 21H-2X4 B4
PSS 21H-2X5 B4
PSS 21H-1B7 B3
PSS 21H-1B7 B4
PSS 21H-1B8 B3
PSS 21H-2X1 B3
PSS 21H-2W2 B3
PSS 21H-2Y4 B3
PSS 21H-2W1 B3
PSS 21H-2W3 B4
PSS 21H-2X2 B4
xix
B0400FA Rev D
Preface
Product Specification Sheet (PSS) Title

FBM201 Channel-Isolated, 0 to 20 mA Input Interface Module
FBM202 Channel-Isolated, Thermocouple/mV Input Interface Module
FBM203 Channel-Isolated, Platinum and Nickel RTD Input
Interface Module
FBM204 Channel-Isolated, 0 to 20 mA, I/O Interface Module
FBM205 Channel-Isolated, Redundant-Ready 0 to 20 mA I/O Interface
Module
FBM206 Channel-Isolated, Pulse Input Interface Module
FBM207/FBM207b/FBM207c Channel-Isolated, Voltage Monitor/
Contact Sense Input Interface Module
FBM211 Differential 0 to 20 mA Input Interface Module
FBM212 Differential Thermocouple/mV Input Interface Module
FBM213 Differential Platinum and Nickel RTD Input Interface Module
FBM214 HART Communication Input Interface Module
FBM216 HART Communication Redundant Input Interface Module
FBM217 Discrete Input Interface Module
FBM218 HART Communication Redundant Input Interface Module
FBM219 Group Isolated, Discrete I/O Interface Module
FBM220/221 FOUNDATION fieldbus H1 Communication Interface
Module
FBM223 Profibus-DP Communication Interface Modules
FBM224 Modbus Communication Interface Module
FBM237 Channel Isolated, Redundant-Ready, 0 to 20 mA Output
Interface Module
FBM241/FBM241b/FBM241c/FBM241d Channel Isolated, Discrete I/O
Interface Module
FBM242 Channel Isolated, Externally Sourced, Discrete Output Interface
Module
FBM243 FoxCom, Dual Baud Rate Intelligent Device Interface Module
FBM246 FoxCom, Redundant, Dual Baud Rate Intelligent Device Interface
Module
Fieldbus Communications Module, FCM10E
Fieldbus Communications Module, FCM10Ef
Fieldbus Communications Module, FCM2F2/FCM2F4/FCM2F10
xx
PSS Number
PSS 21H-2Z1 B4
PSS 21H-2Z2 B4
PSS 21H-2Z3 B4
PSS 21H-2Z4 B4
PSS 21H-2Z5 B4
PSS 21H-2Z6 B4
PSS 21H-2Z7 B4
PSS 21H-2Z11 B4
PSS 21H-2Z12 B4
PSS 21H-2Z13 B4
PSS 21H-2Z14 B4
PSS 21H-2Z15 B4
PSS 21H-2Z16 B4
PSS 21H-2Z17 B4
PSS 21H-2Z18 B4
PSS 21H-2Z19 B4
PSS 21H-2Z20 B4
PSS 21H-2Z23 B4
PSS 21H-2Z24 B4
PSS 21H-2Z37 B4
PSS 21H-2Z41 B4
PSS 21H-2Z42 B4
PSS 21H-2Z43 B4
PSS 21H-2Z46 B4
PSS 21H-2Y1 B3
PSS 21H-2Y2 B3
PSS 21H-2Y3 B3
1. Overview
This chapter presents an overview of the DIN rail mounted FBM subsystem equipment.
The DIN rail mounted FBM subsystem provides a reliable, high speed communications interface
between the host control processor (for example the I/A Series control station) and field I/O sensors and actuators. It incorporates innovative equipment packaging, and the use of fiber optic
and/or coaxial cabling between modules to allow local or remote distribution of process I/O
points.
The subsystem consists of the following major functional elements. (Figure 1-1 shows how these
elements are interconnected.)
Fieldbus Modules (FBMs) FBMs serve as an interface between the field devices and
the I/A Series control station (via the module Fieldbus and the Ethernet trunk Fieldbus). They perform necessary data conversion, providing full support for analog
measurement, discrete sensing, and analog or discrete control and digital
communication.
Fieldbus communications modules (FCMs) FCM10E and FCM10Ef modules provide interfacing between the Ethernet trunk Fieldbus and the module Fieldbus.
FCM2F2/4/10 modules provide for fiber optic extension (baseplate-to-baseplate) of
the module Fieldbus. The FCMs are used in pairs for redundancy.
Baseplate The DIN rail mounted Fieldbus Module baseplate provides a base for
mounting of the FBMs and FCMs. Up to four baseplates can be interconnected (via
the module Fieldbus) to provide mounting for up to 30 FBMs per FCM or FCM
pair.
Module Fieldbus A 2 Mbps HDLC optionally redundant serial bus used to interconnect all baseplate-mounted modules (FCMs and FBMs). The module Fieldbus
cabling between baseplates can be shielded twisted-pair, fiber optic, or a combination
of both.
Ethernet trunk Fieldbus A 10 Mbps optionally redundant data communications bus
which interconnects baseplate groupings of FCMs and FBMs with the I/A Series control station. It employs asychronous protocol and conforms to the general
requirements of Ethernet communications.
Multiport fiber optic converter (hub) Converts the Ethernet 10Base2 to fiber optic
media, and provides six ports for fiber optic media distribution to up to six baseplate
groupings.
Media converters (BNC to fiber-ST) Provide 10Base2-to-fiber (and vice-versa) conversion for optional fiber optic extension of the Ethernet trunk Fieldbus.
Termination assemblies (TAs) TAs are field signal connection modules which provide optional signal conditioning and circuit protection required by the associated
FBM. Two types of TAs are offered: pass-through TAs, and TAs with signal conditioning (in both directions, reduction/increase). The TAs connect to the connectors
on the baseplate by means of dedicated cables.
B0400FA Rev D
1. Overview
Optional
Fiber Optic Extension
*
B
To/From
I/A Series
Control Station
10 MBps (10Base2) Ethernet Trunk

Fieldbus (Redundant)
A
To Similar
Equipment
B
*
*
(If Applicable)
Media Converters
and
Fiber Optic Cabling
*
Baseplate
(One of up
to Four per
FCM10E or
FCM10EF Pair)
Optional
FCM2F Modules
(Two for Redundancy)
A
Fieldbus
Modules
(FBMs)
Operational Status
Operational Status
Operational Status
Operational Status
Fieldbus
Tx
Rx
Fieldbus
Tx
Rx
Fieldbus
Tx
Rx
Fieldbus
Tx
Rx
Fiber
Tx
Rx
Fiber
Tx
Rx
Ethernet
Tx
Rx
Ethernet
Tx
Rx
Rx
Rx
Tx
Tx
FCM2F2
FCM2F2
Communication (up
to 2km)
Baseplate I. D.
2 Mbps Fiber Optic
No.
1
2
0
ON ON
Fieldbus Extender
1
OFF ON
P0914YZ
2
3
ON
OFF
OFF OFF
FBM201
Communication (up to 2km)

2 Mbps Fiber Optic
Fieldbus Extender
P0914YZ
FCM10E
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
FCM10E Modules
(for 10Base2)
or
FCM10Ef Modules
(for Fiber)
FCM10E
Communication
2 Mbps Fieldbus
P0914YM
Communication
2 Mbps Fieldbus
P0914YM
FCM Identification
Left Module
03
04
05
06
Termination
Assembly (TA)
08
07
i- i+
i-
02
iP
i+ iP
i- i+ iP
i- i+ iP
i- i+ iP
i- i+ iP
i- i+ iP
i- i+ iP
01
N
P
U
T
A
0m
0-2
1,
20
M
B
F
Right Module
User Defined
P0914ZM
Fiber Optic
Cabling (Each line
represents 2 cables:
TX and RX.)
Fiber Optic Cabling

(Each line represents
2 cables: TX and RX.)
Operational Status
Operational Status
To Other
Baseplates
*
B
Multi-Port
Fiber Optic Converter
(Hub)
OR
C 08
C
C 06 07
C
C 04 05
C
C 02 03
01
B
B 08
B 07
B 06
B 05
B 04
B 03
B 02
01
A
A 08
A 07
A 06
A 05
A 04
A 03
A 02
01
To/From Field
Sensors/Actuators
OR**
Module
Fieldbus***
(to Next
Baseplate)
Shielded
Twisted-Pair Cabling
* Foxboro recommends the use of surge protectors (Citel

Station Protector or equivalent) at these points if the Ethernet
Trunk Fieldbus cable run is subject to switch gear or lightening
induced surges.
** Combinations of shielded twisted-pair and fiber optic

cabling (within the baseplate grouping) are also possible.
*** Refer to Figures 1-4 through 1-6 for baseplate cabling

interconnections.
Figure 1-1. DIN Rail Mounted FBM Subsystem Elements
As illustrated in Figure 1-1, two basic network configurations are possible: 1) direct connection of
the Ethernet trunk fieldbus to the FCM(s) and 2) connection to the FCMs via a muti-port fiber
optic converter (hub). Both of these configurations offer optional extension of the Ethernet trunk
fieldbus through the use of media converters, allowing the FBMs to be located remotely from the
I/A Series control station. For maximum allowable cable lengths and equipment quantities, refer
to Product Sizing Constraints on page 26.
2
1. Overview
B0400FA Rev D
Also, as indicated in Figure 1-1, module Fieldbus distribution (baseplate-to-baseplate) can be

implemented using shielded twisted-pair cabling, fiber optic cabling, or a combination of both.
Baseplate-to-baseplate fiber optic cabling is implemented using FCM2F modules, a pair (for
redundancy) in each of the connected baseplates. Twisted-pair cabling is implemented by simply
making cable connections from one baseplate to the next. The following subsections provide
more detailed information on the baseplate cabling configurations and the Ethernet trunk Fieldbus cabling configurations.
Baseplate Implementation
The DIN rail mounted Fieldbus Module baseplate (Figure 1-2) provides for the mounting of the
DIN rail mounted Fieldbus Modules (FBMs) and Fieldbus communications modules (FCMs). Its
eight mounting positions can accommodate up to eight FBMs, or a combination of FBMs and
FCMs. The baseplate also provides the necessary connectors for redundant power, redundant
module Fieldbus, and I/O signal cable connections.
OFF
Baseplate I. D.
No.
0
1
2
3
2
1
ON ON
OFF ON
ON OFF
OFF OFF
OFF
Baseplate I. D.
No.
0
1
2
3
1
2
ON ON
OFF ON
ON OFF
OFF OFF
Horizontal-Mount Baseplate
(P0914XA)
Vertical-Mount Baseplate
(P0914XB)
Figure 1-2. DIN Rail Mounted Fieldbus Module Baseplate
As shown in Figure 1-2, the baseplate is available in two basic configurations, one for horizontal
DIN rail mounting and the other for vertical DIN rail mounting.
In addition, a mounting bracket kit is available for mounting of the horizontal baseplate in a standard, 483 mm (19-inch) rack. The kit (Foxboro part number P0930AY) provides for a 25.4 mm
(1 in) mounting depth in the rack.
The FBMs and FCMs plug onto the baseplate by means of their two connectors, and each is fastened in place by two hex screws. In addition to the FBMs and FCMs, an FCM identification
assembly (Figure 1-3) is mounted on the signal connectors adjacent to the FCM(s) in the first
baseplate of the group of up to four. The FCM identification assembly provides for mounting of
letterbug set(s), which provide identification, to the system software, of all mounted FBMs.
3
B0400FA Rev D
1. Overview
Left Module
FCM
Identification
User Defined
P0914ZX
Right Module
OFF
Baseplate I. D.
No.
ON
ON
1
2
OFF ON
ON OFF
OFF OFF
FCM Identification
Left Module
P0914ZM
Right Module
User Defined
Mounted in
Horizontal Baseplate
Mounted in
Vertical Baseplate
Figure 1-3. FCM Identification Assemblies
Up to four baseplates are interconnected by means of the module Fieldbus. Also, multiple groups
of baseplates can be connected to the Ethernet trunk Fieldbus, either directly (via Ethernet connectors) or through one or more multiport fiber optic converters (see Figure 1-1).
Figure 1-4 through Figure 1-6 show the three basic baseplate interconnection configurations.
Figure 1-4 shows baseplate interconnection using only shielded twisted-pair cable. This configuration is used when the four (maximum) baseplates are mounted in the same general location (for
example, in multiple enclosures in the same area). Shielded twisted-pair cables are available in
lengths of 0.25 m (10 in), 1 m (3.3 ft), 3 m (9.9 ft), 5 m (16.5 ft), 10 m (33 ft), 20 m (66 ft),
30 m (99 ft) and 60 m (198 ft). (For overall cabling distances, refer to Product Sizing Constraints on page 26.)
10 Mbps (10Base2) Ethernet Trunk Fieldbus
From I/A Series
Control Station
Baseplate
(1 of 4)
Module Fieldbus
(One of up to 3
Shielded TwistedPair Segments)
B
A
To Next FCMs
(If Applicable)
F F F F
B B B B
M M M M
F F F
B B B
M M M
F F F F F
B B B B B
M M M M M
F F
F F F F F F C C
B B B B B B M M
M M M M M M 10 10
E E
F
B
M
F F F
B B B
M M M
F F F F
B B B B
M M M M
FCM10E
Modules
(2)
F F F F
B B B B
M M M M
Figure 1-4. Baseplate Interconnection Using Shielded Twisted-Pair Cable
Figure 1-5 and Figure 1-6 show how the cabling distance between two or more baseplates can be
extended using fiber optic cabling. These figures show baseplate interconnection using a combination of shielded twisted-pair and fiber optic cabling (Figure 1-5), and fiber optic only cabling
(Figure 1-6). These configurations allow one or more of the baseplates to be mounted remote
from the others. The FCM2F modules provide for three different fiber optic cabling distances
between baseplates: 2 km (1.24 mi), 4 km (2.48 mi), or 10 km (6.2 mi). (For overall cabling distances, refer to Product Sizing Constraints on page 26.)
4
1. Overview
B0400FA Rev D
Twisted-Pair Module Fieldbus

(Shielded Twisted-Pair cable)
Fiber Optic
Cable Pairs
From I/A Series Control Station

or MultiPort Fiber Optic
Converter
A
A B
FCM2F2, FCM2F4,
or FCM2F10
Modules (2 Pairs)
(See Note 2)
F F
C C F F F F F F
M M B B B B B B
2 2 M M M M M M
F F
F
C
M
2
F
F F F F F F F F
B B B B B B C C
M M M M M M M M
F
C F F F F F F
M B B B B B B
2 M M M M M M
F
FCM10E or
FCM10EF
Modules
(2)
F F F F F F F F
B B B B B B B B
M M M M M M M M
Twisted-Pair Module Fieldbus
NOTES:
1. Redundant Configuration is shown. Non-redundant configuration uses one FCM2F per baseplate,
connected to either Fieldbus A or B.
Baseplate
(1 of 4)
2. Three versions of the FCM2F provide three different fiber optic cabling distances between
baseplates: FCM2F2 = 2 km (1.24 mi); FCM2F4 = 4 km (2.48 mi); FCM2F10 = 10 km (6.2 mi)
Figure 1-5. Baseplate Interconnection Using Shielded Twisted-Pair and Fiber Optic Cable
From I/A Series Control Station or

Multiport Fiber Optic Converter
A
A
FCM2F2, FCM2F4,
or FCM2F10
Modules (Pair)
(See Notes)
F F
C C F F F F F F
M M B B B B C C
2 2 M M M M M M
F F
B
F
C
M
2
F
F F
F
C F F F F C C
M B B B B M M
2 M M M M 2 2
F
F F
FCM10E or
FCM10Ef
Modules (2)
Module Fieldbus
(Fiber Optic Cable Pairs)
B
F F
F F
C C F F F F C C
M M B B B B M M
2 2 M M M M 2 2
F F
F F
FCM2F2, FCM2F4, or FCM2F10

Module Pair (typical per baseplate)
(see notes, below)
F F
C C F F F F F F
M M B B B B B B
2 2 M M M M M M
F F
Baseplate (1 of 4)
NOTES:
1. Redundant configuration is shown. Non-redundant configuration uses one FCM2F per baseplate,
connected to either Fieldbus A or B.
2. Three versions of the FCM2F provide three different fiber optic cabling distances:
FCM2F2 = 2 km (1.24 mi); FCM2F4 = 4 km (2.48 MI); FCM2F10 = 10 km (6.2 mi).
Figure 1-6. Baseplate Interconnection Using Fiber Optic Cable Only
B0400FA Rev D
1. Overview
Ethernet Trunk Fieldbus Implementation

The Ethernet trunk Fieldbus is implemented in the following basic configurations:
Direct network configuration (Figure 1-7). This configuration is used where groupings of FBMs are concentrated in a more localized area, or where groupings of FBMs
are located remote from the control station.
Active star network configuration (Figure 1-8). This configuration uses a multiport
fiber optic converter (hub), which allows distribution of the FBMs over a much wider
area.
For maximum cabling lengths and equipment quantities used in these configurations, refer to
Product Sizing Constraints on page 26. For cable connection procedures, refer to Ethernet
Trunk Fieldbus Cable Connections on page 77.
I/A Series
Control Station
(Fault-Tolerant)
A B
*
10Base2 (10 Mbps)

Ethernet Trunk Fieldbus
(Redundant)
10Base2
To Fiber
Conv.
Fiber
Optic
Cabling
Optional Fiber Optic

Extension of the
10 Mbps (10Base2) Ethernet Trunk Fieldbus (Redundant)
Fiber To
10Base2
Conv.
B
A
To/From
Baseplate-Mounted
FCM10E Modules
To Additional, Similar
Equipment Groupings
(If Applicable)
To/From
Baseplate-Mounted
FCM10E Modules
*Foxboro recommends the use of surge protectors (Citel CXD Station Protector or equivalent) at
these points. The Ethernet Trunk Fieldbus cable cannot withstand switch gear or lightening
induced surges.
Figure 1-7. Typical Direct Network Configuration
1. Overview
B0400FA Rev D
Optional Fiber Optic

Extensions Of The
I/A Series
Control Station
(Fault-Tolerant)
*
B
A
10Base2
To Fiber
Conv.
10Base2 (10 Mbps)

Ethernet Trunk
Fieldbus (Redundant)
Fiber To
10Base2
Conv.
Fiber Optic
Cabling
To Additional, Similar
Equipment Groupings
(If Applicable)
B
A
*
10Base2 Ethernet
Multiport
Fiber Optic
Converter
(Hub)
Fiber Optic Cable Pairs

[Each dashed line is one
pair (TX + RX)]
A
To/From
Baseplate-Mounted
FCM10Ef Modules
To/From
Baseplate-Mounted
FCM10Ef Modules
*Foxboro recommends the use of surge protectors (Citel CXD Station Protector or equivalent) at
these points. The Ethernet Trunk Fieldbus cable cannot withstand a direct lightning strike.
Figure 1-8. Typical Active Star Network Configuration
Fieldbus Communications Modules

The three types of FCMs (FCM10E, FCM10Ef, and FCM2F) are described in the following subsections.
FCM10E Fieldbus Communications Module

The FCM10E Fieldbus Communications Module (Foxboro part number P0914YM) allows DIN
rail mounted Fieldbus Modules (FBMs) to communicate with the I/A Series control station via
the high speed, optionally redundant 10 Mbps Ethernet trunk Fieldbus. The FCM10E converts
10 Mbps Ethernet signals used by the I/A Series control station to 2 Mbps HDLC signals used by
DIN rail mounted Fieldbus Modules (FBMs), and vice versa.
B0400FA Rev D
1. Overview
Figure 1-9. FCM10E Fieldbus Communications Module
The FCM10E also provides galvanic isolation between the 10 Mbps Ethernet trunk Fieldbus and
the 2 Mbps module Fieldbus. The FCM10E modules are used in pairs for redundancy. An
FCM10E (or pair of FCM10E modules) can support up to 30 FBMs.
FCM10Ef Fieldbus Communications Module

The FCM10Ef Fieldbus Communications Modules (Foxboro part number P0916CP) convert
2 Mbps HDLC signals used by DIN rail mounted Fieldbus Modules (FBMs) to 10 Mbps fiber
optic Ethernet signals in an Ethernet/fiber optic network. This allows the FBMs to communicate
with the I/A Series control station over extended distances in a fiber optic network configuration.
The FCM10Ef offers a maximum cabling distance (drop from the hub) of up to 2 km (1.24 mi).
Figure 1-10. FCM10Ef Fieldbus Communications Module
Using fiber optic cabling, the FCM10Ef modules link directly to the multiport fiber optic converter (hub), which connects to the I/A Series control station via the high speed, optionally
redundant 10 Mbps Ethernet trunk Fieldbus.
8
1. Overview
B0400FA Rev D
Up to six groups of baseplate-mounted FCM10Ef modules and associated FBMs can be linked to
the optionally redundant hub, for a maximum of 120 FBMs. To support redundancy, a pair of
FCM10Ef modules must be used for each FBM grouping. In non-redundant configurations, only
a single FCM10Ef is required for each grouping.
FCM2F2/FCM2F4/FCM2F10 Fieldbus Communications Module

The FCM2F Fieldbus Communications modules (Foxboro part numbers P0914YZ/
P0917JA/P0916TQ) provide baseplate-to-baseplate fiber optic extension of the module Fieldbus
(see Figure 1-6). This allows DIN rail mounted Fieldbus Modules (FBMs) to be locally, or
remotely distributed in multiple enclosures for strategic placement of input/output points.
The three versions of the FCM2Fs FCM2F2, FCM2F4, and FCM2F10 offer three different
maximum baseplate-to-baseplate fiber optic cabling distances: up to 2 km (1.24 mi), up to 4 km
(2.48 mi), and up to 10 km (6.2 mi), respectively. FCM2F2 and FCM2F4 are used with multimode graded-index fiber cable, and FCM2F10 is used with single-mode fiber cable.
The FCM2Fs are mounted on the baseplates in pairs for redundancy, one each for the A and
B cables of the Fieldbus. Non-redundant configurations require only a single FCM2F.
Figure 1-11. FCM2F Fieldbus Communications Module
Fieldbus Modules
The DIN
rail mounted Fieldbus Modules (FBMs) are compact, high-performance distributed

process I/O modules. They perform the signal conversion required to interface the electrical input
signals to/from the field sensors to the optionally-fault-tolerant I/A Series control station. Communication between the FBMs the I/A Series control station is via Fieldbus Communication
Modules (FCMs), which interface the 2 Mbps module Fieldbus used by the FBMs with the 10
Mbps Ethernet trunk Fieldbus used by the I/A Series control station. The FBMs automatically
accept communication from either communication path (A or B) of the redundant Ethernet
trunk Fieldbus. Thus, if one path fails, communication is not interrupted.
B0400FA Rev D
1. Overview
A broad range of FBM types are available to provide support for various analog measurement, discrete sensing, and analog or discrete control requirements. All of the various types of FBMs are
compact and stucturally identical, designed with an extruded aluminum exterior. Light-emitting
diodes (LEDs) incorporated into the front of each module provide visual status indications of the
Fieldbus Module functions.
Figure 1-12. DIN Rail Mounted Fieldbus Module (Typical)
The following subsections describe the functions of the individual types of FBMs.
FBM201 Channel Isolated, 0 to 20 mA Input Interface Module

FBM201 (Foxboro part number P0914SQ) contains eight isolated 0 to 20 mA dc analog input
channels, each accepting a two-wire, analog sensor input such as a 4 to 20 mA transmitter or a
self-powered 20 mA source. Each input is galvanically isolated from the other channels and
ground.
In addition to performing the signal conversion required to interface the electrical input signals
from the field sensors to the optionally redundant module Fieldbus, the module executes the Analog Input application program, which provides Integration Time and Rate of Change Limits configurable options.
FBM202 Channel Isolated, Thermocouple/mV Input Interface

Module
FBM202 (Foxboro part number P0914ST) contains eight isolated thermocouple input channels,
and one isolated RTD reference junction compensation channel (for terminal temperature sensing). Each thermocouple/mV channel accepts standard thermocouples for various temperature
ranges, and each provides upscale thermocouple burnout detection and rate-of-change detection.
The inputs are galvanically isolated from the other channels and ground.
10
1. Overview
B0400FA Rev D
FBM203 Channel Isolated, Platinum and Nickel RTD Input

Interface Module
FBM203 (Foxboro part number P0914SV) contains eight isolated resistance temperature detector (RTD) input channels. Each channel accepts a 2- or 3-wire RTD sensor input, within a 0 to
320 ohm resistance range. Each analog input is galvanically isolated from the other channels and
ground.
FBM204 Channel Isolated, 0 to 20 mA I/O Interface Module

FBM204 (Foxboro part number P0914SY) contains four isolated 20 mA dc analog input channels and four 20 mA dc analog output channels. Each input channel accepts an analog sensor
input such as a 4 to 20 mA transmitter, or a self-powered 20 mA source. Each output channel
produces a 0 to 20 mA output to drive an external load, and output is galvanically isolated from
the other channels and ground.
from the field sensors to the optionally redundant module Fieldbus, the module executes Analog
I/O application program, which provides the following configurable options: Integration Time,
Fail Safe Configuration (Hold/Fallback), and Analog Output Fail Safe Fallback Data (on a per
channel basis).
FBM205 Channel Isolated, Redundant 0 to 20 mA I/O

Interface Module
FBM205 (Foxboro part number P0914XG) contains four isolated 0 to 20 mA dc analog input
channels and four isolated 20 mA dc analog output channels. The module is used as a redundant
pair (two FBM205s). Each input and output channel is galvanically isolated from the other channels and ground.
The two modules combine to provide redundancy at the FBM level. To achieve redundancy, a
Redundant Adapter module is placed on the two adjacent baseplate termination cable connectors
to provide a single termination cable connection (see Figure 1-13). A single termination cable
connects from the Redundant Adapter to the associated termination assembly (TA). Each module
independently attempts to hold the output(s) at its specified output value(s), and each independently reports its observed value of the inputs. A redundant analog input and output block in the
control software validates each input and output in conjunction with information to/from the
module.
11
B0400FA Rev D
1. Overview
Fieldbus Modules
(FBM205s)
Operational Status
FBM205
2
3
ON ON
OFF ON
ON OFF
Operational Status
Operational Status
Fieldbus
Tx
Rx
Fieldbus
Tx
Rx
Ethernet
Tx
Rx
Ethernet
Tx
Rx
FCM10E
FBM205
FCM10E
Redundant Channel Isolated

4 Input, 0-20mA
4 Output, 0-20mA
P0914XG

4 Input, 0-20mA
4 Output, 0-20mA
P0914XG
Communication
2 Mbps Fieldbus
P0914YM
Communication
2 Mbps Fieldbus
P0914YM
OFF OFF
1 05 2
FCM Identification
106 2
Input (P)
Left Module
Right Module
2 08 1
FBM205
Redundant Adapter
Input (P)
2 07 1
Baseplate I. D.
No.
0
1
Operational Status
Input (-)
P0930BM
05 06 07 08
User Defined
P0914ZM
02
03
04
06
08
07
N
P
U
T
05
i- i+
i-
01
iP
i+ iP
i- i+ iP
i- i+ iP
i- i+ iP
i- i+ iP
i- i+ iP
i- i+ iP
20
1,
0-2
0m
Redundant Adapter
(P0916NN)
C
C 08
C
C 06 07
C
C 04 05
C
C 02 03
01
B
B 08
B 07
B 06
B 05
B 04
B 03
B 02
01
A
A 08
A 07
A 06
A 05
A 04
A 03
A 02
01
Termination
Assembly (TA)
To/From Field
Sensors/Actuators
Figure 1-13. Termination Assembly Connections to FBM205
In the I/A Series control station, a redundant analog output function block, AOUTR, is used for
each redundant pair of outputs. The AOUTR block handles output writes and initialization logic
for the redundant channels. On each execution cycle of the AOUTR block, identical output
writes are sent to both FBMs in the redundant pair, fully exercising the communication path to
the FBMs and the logic circuitry of each FBM. When a failure is detected in one of the FBMs, its
output is driven to 0 mA and the corresponding channel in the good module automatically continues supplying the proper current to the output current loop.
A redundant analog input function block, AINR, is used for each redundant pair of inputs. The
AINR block handles input reads and initialization logic for the redundant channels. On each execution cycle of the AINR block, identical read commands are sent to both FBMs in the redundant pair, fully exercising the communication path to the FBMs and the logic circuitry of each
FBM.
Each input channel accepts an analog sensor input, such as a 4 to 20 mA transmitter or a selfpowered 20 mA source. Each output channel drives an external load and produces a 0 to 20 mA
output. Transmitter power from each module is diode ORd together in the redundant adapter to
assure redundant power from either module. The microprocessor of each FBM in the pair executes the analog I/O application program, plus security routines that validate the health of the
FBM.
Input channel options include a configurable choice of analog input conversion time on a per
module basis. Input channel security is enhanced by redundantly powering the input current loop
from per-channel power supplies in each FBM of the pair.
Configurable options in the modules for output security include Fail Safe Action
(Hold/Fallback), Analog Output Fail-safe Fallback Data (on a per channel basis), Fieldbus Failsafe Enable, and Fieldbus Fail-safe Delay Time. The Analog Output Fail-safe Fallback Data
option must be set for 0 mA output. This removes one of the pair of redundant output channels
from service for detectable problems such as an FBM not properly receiving output writes, not
passing security tests on FBM microprocessor writes to output registers, failure of internal FBM
12
1. Overview
B0400FA Rev D
diagnostics, or FBM module watchdog timer time-out. Setting of the Output Fail-safe Configuration (Hold/Fallback) option for 0 mA output also minimizes the possibility of a fail high
result.
FBM206 Channel Isolated Pulse Input Interface Module

FBM206 (Foxboro part number P0916CQ) contains eight isolated configurable pulse input
channels, each accepting a pulse input with a maximum rate of 25 kHz. Input devices include
vortex and turbine meters, solid state or electro-mechanical contacts and other sensors with similar pulse outputs. Each input channel is galvanically isolated from the other channels and ground.
from the field sensors to the optionally redundant module Fieldbus, the module executes the
Pulse Input application program. The configurable options for this program are Pulse Rate Input
Totalization and Resolution, and Meter Scaling Factor.
FBM207/FBM207b/FBM207c Channel Isolated Voltage

Monitor/Contact Sense Input Interface Module
FBM207/FBM207b/FBM207c (Foxboro part numbers P0914TD/P0914WH/P0917GY) functions as a 16-channel dc voltage monitor or 16-channel contact sensor. Each channel accepts a
2-wire input from a dc voltage source (FBM207) or pair of contacts or solid state switches
(FBM207b/ FBM207c). Each discrete input is galvanically isolated from the other channels and
ground.
Associated termination assemblies (TAs) support the various discrete inputs, as follows:
FBM207
FBM207b
FBM207c
15-60 V dc, or 120 V ac/125 V dc, or 120 V ac/125 V dc with

excitation voltage source supplied outside loop (through TA), or
240 V ac, or 240 V ac with excitation voltage source supplied
outside loop (through TA) switch
24 V dc Contact Sense
48 V dc Contact Sense
from the field sensors to the optionally redundant module Fieldbus, the module executes programs for Discrete Input, Ladder Logic, Pulse Count, and Sequence of Events, with configurable
options of Input Filter Time and Fail-Safe Configuration.
FBM211 Differential 0 to 20 mA Input Interface Module

FBM211 (Foxboro part number P0914TN) contains sixteen 20 mA dc analog input channels,
each channel accepting a two-wire analog sensor input such as a 4 to 20 mA transmitter or a selfpowered 20 mA source. The FBM211 channels are group isolated electrically separate moduleto-module but not separated channel-to-channel on the same module.
from the field sensors to the optionally redundant module Fieldbus, the module executes the Analog Input application program, with Integration Time and Rate of Change Limits1 configurable
options.
13
B0400FA Rev D
1. Overview
FBM212 Differential Thermocouple/mV Input Interface

Module
FBM212 (Foxboro part number P0914XL) contains fourteen thermocouple input channels, and
one RTD reference junction compensation channel (for terminal temperature sensing). Each
thermocouple/mV channel accepts standard thermocouples for various temperature ranges, and
each provides upscale thermocouple burnout detection. The FBM212 channels are group isolated
electrically separate module-to-module but not separated channel-to-channel on the same
module.
Analog Input application program, with Integration Time and Rate of Change Limits1 configurable options.
FBM213 Differential Platinum and Nickel RTD Input Interface

Module
FBM213 (Foxboro part number P0914XN) contains eight resistance temperature detector
(RTD) input channels. Each channel accepts a 3-wire RTD sensor input, within a 0 to 320 ohm
resistance range. The FBM213 channels are group isolated electrically separate module-tomodule but not separated channel-to-channel on the same module.
Analog Input application program, with Integration Time and Rate of Change Limits configurable options.

FBM214 (Foxboro part number P0914XQ) contains eight group isolated input channels. Each of
the eight channels accepts a digital HART Frequency-Shift Keying (FSK) signal superimposed on
a 4 to 20 mA analog input signal. Each channel provides bi-directional digital communications
with a HART compliant field device, and performs analog to digital conversion on the 4 to
20 mA input control signal from that device. For detailed information, refer to HART Communication Interface Module (FBM214/215/216/218) Users Guide (B0400FF).
FBM215 HART Communication Output Interface Module

FBM215 (Foxboro part number P0917TQ) contains eight channel-isolated output channels.
Each of the eight channels accepts a digital HART Frequency-Shift Keying (FSK) signal superimposed on a 4 to 20 mA analog output signal. Each channel provides bi-directional digital communications with a HART compliant actuator, and provides an output signal of 4 to 20 mA to the
actuator. For detailed information, refer to HART Communication Interface Module
(FBM214/215/216/218) Users Guide (B0400FF).
1.
14
For FBM211 or 212, up to nine inputs can be configured for rate of change limits.
1. Overview
B0400FA Rev D
FBM216 HART Communication Redundant Input Interface

Module
FBM216 (Foxboro part number P0917TN) contains eight group isolated input channels. Each of
the eight channels accepts a digital HART Frequency-Shift Keying (FSK) signal superimposed on
a 4 to 20 mA analog input signal. Each channel provides bi-directional digital communications
with a HART compliant field device, and performs analog to digital conversion on the 4 to
20 mA input control signal from that device. For detailed information, refer to HART Communication Interface Module (FBM214/215/216/218) Users Guide (B0400FF).
FBM217 Group Isolated Discrete Input Interface Module

FBM217 (Foxboro part number P0914TR) provides 32 input channels, each accepting a twowire input from a dc voltage source, up to 30 V dc. Associated Termination Assemblies (TAs)
provide for discrete inputs 30 V dc, 120 V ac/125 V dc, or 240 V ac. The channels are group isolated electrically separate module-to-module but not separated channel-to-channel on the same
module.
from the field sensors to the optionally redundant module Fieldbus, the module executes programs for Discrete Input, Ladder Logic, Pulse Count, and Sequence of Events, with configurable
options of Input Filter Time and Fail-Safe Configuration.
FBM218 HART Communication Redundant Output Interface

Module
FBM218 (Foxboro part number P0917XK) contains eight channel-isolated output channels.
Each of the eight channels accepts a digital HART Frequency-Shift Keying (FSK) signal superimposed on a 4 to 20 mA analog output signal. Each channel provides bi-directional digital communications with a HART compliant actuator, and provides an output signal of 4 to 20 mA to the
actuator. For detailed information, refer to HART Communication Interface Module
FBM219 Group Isolated Discrete I/O Interface Module

FBM219 (Foxboro part number P0916RH) has 24 discrete input channels and 8 discrete output
channels. Associated termination assemblies (TAs) support discrete input or output signals at
voltages of under 60 V dc, 120 V ac/125 V dc, or 240 V ac.
Depending on the type of I/O signal required, the TAs contain current limiting devices, fuses,
relays, or relay outputs with internal or external power source and fusing.
The module with its associated TA supports the following discrete inputs and outputs:
Inputs
15 to 60 V dc,
125 V dc,
120 V ac, or 240 V ac
Switch (external or
internal) power source)
Outputs
15 to 60 V dc at 2 A or, 30 V dc
at 5 A, or 125 V dc at 0.6 A, or
120 V ac at 5 A, or 240 V ac at
5 A Switch (external or internal)
power source)
15
B0400FA Rev D
1. Overview
The module executes the Discrete I/O or Ladder Logic program, with the following configurable
options: Input Filter Time, Fail Safe Configuration, Fail-safe Fall-back, and Sustained or
Momentary Outputs. If the Momentary Outputs configuration is selected, then Pulse Output
Interval is also configurable.
FBM220/221 FOUNDATION fieldbus H1 Communications

Interface Module
FBM220/221 (Foxboro part numbers P0917HA/P0917HB) provide an interface between
FOUNDATION fieldbus field devices and the I/A Series system. FBM220 supports one H1 segment and FBM221 provides integration of four H1 channel isolated fieldbus segments. For
detailed information, refer to FOUNDATION fieldbus H1 Communication Interface Modules
(FBM220/FBM221) Users Guide (B0400FD).
FBM223 PROFIBUS-DP Communication Interface Modules

The FBM223 (Foxboro part number P0917HD) provides an interface between Profibus-DP
slave devices and the I/A Series system. FBM223 supports two Profibus-DP communication
buses, which are galvanically isolated from the I/A Series Ethernet trunk fieldbus and from each
other. For detailed information, refer to Profibus-DP Communication Interface Module (FBM223)
Users Guide (B0400FE).
FBM224 Modbus Communication Interface Module

The Modbus Communication Interface Module (Foxboro part number P0926GG) integrates
third-party devices that have a Modbus interface into an I/A Series system. The FBM224 provides digital communications to and from Modbus slave devices (input/output devices) on
Modbus networks. Devices with which the FBM224 can successfully communicate are those that
support the appropriate Modbus function codes and operate in the Modbus RTU mode. For
detailed information, refer to Modbus Communication Interface Module (FBM224) Users Guide
(B0400FK).
FBM237 Channel Isolated Redundant Ready 0 to 20 mA

Output Interface Module
FBM237 (Foxboro part number P0914XS) contains eight isolated 0 to 20 mA output channels.
The module can be used non-redundant (singularly) or as a redundant pair (two FBM 237s).
Each channel is galvanically isolated from the other channels and ground.
When used as a redundant pair, the modules combine to provide redundancy at the FBM level.
To achieve the redundant output, a Redundant Adapter module is placed on the two adjacent
baseplate termination cable connectors to provide a single termination cable connection (see
Figure 1-14). A single termination cable connects from the Redundant Adapter to the associated
termination assembly (TA). Each module independently attempts to hold the output(s) at its
specified output value(s), and each independently reports its observed value of the inputs. A
16
1. Overview
B0400FA Rev D
redundant analog output block in the control software validates each output in conjunction with
information to/from the module.
Fieldbus Modules
(FBM237s)
Operational Status
FBM237
Baseplate I. D.
No.
0
1
2
3
1
ON
2
ON
OFF ON
ON OFF
Tx
Rx
Fieldbus
Tx
Rx
Ethernet
Tx
Rx
Ethernet
Tx
Rx
FCM10E
Communication
2 Mbps Fieldbus
P0914YM
Communication
2 Mbps Fieldbus
P0914YM
FBM237
Redundant Adapter
P0930BS
Operational Status
Fieldbus
FCM10E
Channel Isolated
Redundant Ready
8 Output, 0-20mA
P0914XS
Operational Status
FBM237
Channel Isolated
Redundant Ready
8 Output, 0-20mA
P0914XS
OFF OFF
Operational Status
FCM Identification
Left Module
Right Module
User Defined
P0914ZM
01
02
03
04
06
08
07
N
P
U
T
05
iP
i+ iP
i- i+ iP
i- i+
iP
i- i+ iP
i- i+
iP
i- i+ iP
i- i+ iP
i- i+
i-
20
1,
0-2
0m
Redundant Adapter
(P0916QD)
C
C 08
C
C 06 07
C
C 04 05
C
C 02 03
01
B
B 08
B 07
B 06
B 05
B 04
B 03
B 02
01
A
A 08
A 07
A 06
A 05
A 04
A 03
A 02
01
TERMINATION
Termination
ASSEMBLY (TA)
Assembly (TA)
To/From Field
Sensors/Actuators
Figure 1-14. Termination Assembly Connections to Redundant FBM237
In the I/A Series control station, a redundant analog output function block, AOUTR, is used for
each redundant pair of outputs. The AOUTR block handles output writes and initialization logic
for the redundant channels. On each execution cycle of the AOUTR block, identical output
writes are sent to both FBMs in the pair, fully exercising communication path to the FBMs and
the logic circuitry of each FBM. When a failure is detected in one of the FBMs, its output is
driven to 0 mA and the corresponding channel in the good module automatically continues supplying the proper current to the output current loop.
Each output channel drives an external load and produces a 0 to 20 mA output. Transmitter
power from each module is diode ORd together in the Redundant Adapter to assure redundant
power from either module. The microprocessor of each module executes the Analog I/O application program, plus security routines that validate the health of the module.
Configurable options in the modules for output security include Fail Safe Action
(Hold/Fallback), Analog Output Fail-safe Fallback Data (on a per channel basis), Fieldbus Failsafe Enable, and Fieldbus Fail-safe Delay Time. The Analog Output Fail-safe Fallback Data
option must be set for 0 mA output. This removes one of the pair of redundant output channels
from service for detectable problems such as an FBM not properly receiving output writes, not
passing security tests on FBM microprocessor writes to output registers, failure of internal FBM
diagnostics, or FBM module watchdog timer time-out. Setting of the Output Fail-safe Configuration (Hold/Fallback) option for 0 mA output also minimizes the possibility of a fail high
result.
17
B0400FA Rev D
1. Overview
FBM241/FBM241b/c/d Channel Isolated Discrete I/O

Interface Module
The Channel Isolated, Discrete I/O Interface Modules FBM241/FBM241b/FBM241c/
FBM241d (Foxboro part numbers P0914TG/P0914WK/P0914WM/ P0914WP) have eight discrete input channels and eight discrete output channels. Associated termination assemblies (TAs)
support discrete input or output signals at voltages of under 60 V dc, 120 V ac/125 V dc, or
240 V ac. Depending on the type of I/O signal required, the TAs contain current limiting
devices, fuses, relays, or relay outputs with internal or external power source and fusing:
FBM
Inputs
Outputs
FBM241
15-60 V dc, 125 V dc,

120 V ac, or 240 V ac
Switch (external or internal)
power source
FBM241b
FBM241c
15-60 V dc Switch
15-60 V dc Contact
(unprotected or protected)
15-60 V dc Contact
15-60 V dc at 2A or,
30 V dc at 5A, or 125 V dc at 0.6A (resistive load),
or 125 V dc at 0.25A (inductive load)
120 V ac at 5A, or 240 V ac at 5A Switch
(external or internal power source)1
12 V dc at 12 mA Switch (internal power source)
15-60 V dc at 2A or,
30 V dc at 5A
12 V dc at 15 mA Switch (internal power source)
FBM241d
1.
Refer to Termination Assembly Relays on page 200 for detailed information on the relay
outputs.
Each type of FBM, without signal conditioning, uses a 15 to 60 V dc input or output signal. Each
discrete input and output is galvanically isolated from other channels and ground2.
from the field sensors to the optionally redundant module Fieldbus, the module executes the Discrete I/O or Ladder Logic program, with the following configurable options: Input Filter Time,
Fail Safe Configuration, Fail-Safe Fall-back, and Sustained or Momentary Outputs. If the
Momentary Output configuration is selected, then Pulse Output Interval is also configurable.
FBM242 Channel Isolated Externally Sourced Discrete Output

Interface Module
FBM242 (Foxboro part number P0914TA) contains 16 discrete output channels, which are
sourced externally, rated up to 2 A at 60 V dc. Associated Termination Assemblies (TAs) provide
for discrete outputs to loads of 2 A at 60 V dc, relay outputs (which provide high voltage/high
current switching, see Termination Assembly Relays on page 200), or relay outputs with power
distribution and fusing. Each output is galvanically isolated from other channels and ground.
In addition to performing the signal conversion required to interface the electrical output signals
to field sensors from the control station, the module executes a Discrete I/O application program
with Ladder Logic support, and a Fail-Safe Configuration configurable option for its outputs.
2.
18
When used with certain termination assemblies, the inputs and/or outputs are isolated as a group
from earth (ground).
1. Overview
B0400FA Rev D
FBM243 Channel Isolated FoxCom Dual Baud Rate Intelligent

Device Interface Module
FBM243 (Foxboro part number P0914TK) contains eight individual channels that provide isolated power and FoxCom communication capabilities to an Intelligent Transmitter/Positioner
over a single twisted pair of wires. The module also allows the use of an external power supply to
power the IT. The use of an external power supply common to two or more loops requires a
Cable Balun Module to maintain communication signal line balance.
The module provides bidirectional digital communications at 4800 baud rate between the Intelligent Field Device and the system redundant Fieldbus, or provides bidirectional digital communications at 600 baud rate between the field device and the module while allowing a simultaneous 4
to 20 mA analog signal to an emergency shutdown system. The baud rate is determined by the
configuration of the field device connected to each channel, independently of the other channels.
The module is an IT host, enabling the system to receive digital messages from the transmitter in
engineering units. Each message is received 10 times per second at 4800 baud, and two times per
second at 600 baud and contains:
Up to three measured variables in IEEE 32-bit floating-point format

Security information
Diagnostics
Message checking.
This information is available to all elements of the system.
Since communication is bidirectional, the system can display the output, transmitter temperature
(C and F), and continuous self-diagnostics. In addition, information that can be displayed or
reconfigured from the console or a Hand-Held Terminal (HHT) is as follows:
Output in engineering units
Fail-safe status
Tag number, name, and location
Device name (letterbug)
Last calibration date
Two levels of upload/download capabilities.
FBM246 Channel Isolated FoxCom Redundant Dual Baud Rate

Intelligent Device Interface Module
FBM246 (Foxboro part number P0917XN) contains eight individual channels. The pair of
FBM246s is a redundant version of the FBM243 and supports both transmitters and valve positioners. The eight FoxCom channels can support any combination of these devices. Individual
transmitters or positioners may be in either analog or digital mode.
NOTE
FBM246 is primarily a digital interface and operation of all transmitters in digital

mode provides substantially better performance. Analog mode should be used only
for special applications (For example, when the measurement is required for an
Emergency Shutdown System that requires 4 to 20 mA signals).
19
B0400FA Rev D
1. Overview
The two modules combine to provide redundancy at the FBM level. To achieve redundancy, a
Redundant Adapter module is placed on the two adjacent baseplate termination cable connectors
to provide a single termination cable connection (see Figure 1-15). A single termination cable
connects from the Redundant Adapter to the associated termination assembly (TA).
Fieldbus Modules
(FBM246s)
IR Active
Operational Status
01
Fieldbus
Tx
Rx
Fieldbus
Tx
Rx
02
02
Ethernet
Tx
Rx
Ethernet
Tx
Rx
03
03
04
04
05
05
06
06
07
07
08
08
1
ON
FBM246
FBM246
OFF
2
3
Operational Status
IR Active
01
2
ON
OFF ON
ON OFF
FCM10E
Channel Isolated
8 Communication,
Redundant FoxCom
P0917XN
Channel Isolated
8 Communication,
Redundant FoxCom
P0917XN
Communication
2 Mbps Fieldbus
P0914YM
FCM Identification
106 2
Input (P)
Left Module
Right Module
2 08 1
FBM246
Redundant Adapter
1 05 2
FCM10E
Communication
2 Mbps Fieldbus
P0914YM
OFF OFF
Input (P)
2 07 1
Baseplate I. D.
No.
0
1
Operational Status
Operational Status
Input (-)
P0917VU
P0914ZM
05 06 07 08
User Defined
02
03
04
06
08
07
N
P
U
T
05
i- i+
i-
01
iP
i+ iP
i- i+ iP
i- i+ iP
i- i+ iP
i- i+ iP
i- i+ iP
i- i+ iP
20
1,
0-2
0m
Redundant Adapter
C
C 08
C
C 06 07
C
C 04 05
C
C 02 03
01
B
B 08
B 07
B 06
B 05
B 04
B 03
B 02
01
A
A 08
A 07
A 06
A 05
A 04
A 03
A 02
01
Termination
Assembly (TA)
To/From Intelligent
Field Devices
Figure 1-15. Termination Assembly Connections to Redundant FBM246
Each channel provides isolated power and digital communication capabilities to an Intelligent
Transmitter (IT) over a single twisted pair of wires. The module also allows the use of an external
power supply to power the IT. The use of an external power supply common to two or more
loops requires a Cable Balun Module to maintain communication signal line balance.
The physical arrangement is similar to that used for FBM205 pairs. The slot pairs are (1, 2) (3, 4)
(5, 6) (7, 8). The first (odd) member of the pair is referred to as the main and the second is
referred to as the backup. The module that is the primary source of data is considered active and
the other module (if it is working normally) would be in the track state.
The pair of FBM246s supports transmitters and positioners, using ECB18 for transmitters and
ECB74 for positioners. Control blocks connect to the ECB18 and ECB74 child ECBs in the
same way the equivalent non-redundant strategy would be configured using an FBM243, providing a redundant digital communications path to single FoxCom devices. The connected device
ECBs normally get their input data from the active member of the pair. They use input data from
the module in track mode, if this was the only good source of data. Output writes to positioners
are sent to both modules.
The ECB used with the pair of FBM246s is ECB38R. The letterbug for the ECB38R is the letterbug of the first member of the pair. This is the letterbug that is displayed in the icon on the System Management Display Handler display.
The module provides bidirectional communication at 4800 baud between the IT and the system
redundant Fieldbus, or provides bidirectional communications at 600 baud while allowing a
simultaneous 4 to 20 mA analog signal to an emergency shutdown system. The baud rate is determined by the configuration of the field device connected to each channel independently of the
other channels.
20
1. Overview
B0400FA Rev D
The module is an IT host, enabling the system to receive digital messages from the transmitter in
engineering units. Each message is received 10 times per second at 4800 baud, and two times per
second at 600 baud and contains:
Up to three measured variables in IEEE 32-bit floating-point format
Security information
Diagnostics
Message checking.
This information is available to all elements of the system.
Since communication is bidirectional, the system can display the output, transmitter temperature
(C and F), and continuous self-diagnostics. In addition, information that can be displayed or
reconfigured from the console or a Hand-Held Terminal (HHT) is as follows:
Output in engineering units

Fail-safe status
Tag number, name, and location

Device name (letterbug)
Last calibration date
Two levels of upload/download capabilities.
Enclosures
The current offering of enclosures for the DIN rail mounted FBM subsystem include the following (see Figure 1-16):
Enclosure B03 NEMA 4, sealed
Enclosure B04 NEMA 12, sealed
Enclosure B05 NEMA 4 or 4X, sealed.
! CAUTION
Where CE compliance is required when utilizing Lambda 24-Volt dc power supplies, a metal enclosure and PDU Part Number P0916XA or P0916XD must also
be used. This restriction does not apply when the Foxboro Model FPS 400-24
power supply is used.
As shipped, the enclosures contain baseplates, which provide mounting for the FBMs and FCMs.
The enclosures also contain DIN rails for mounting termination assemblies (for field I/O wiring),
power supplies for powering the subsystem equipment, and junction boxes for connection of
plant power.
! WARNING
To prevent injury, these enclosures must be bolted down. Refer to the manufacturers installation guide.
21
B0400FA Rev D
1. Overview
B05 Enclosure
B03 Enclosure,
B03 Enclosure
B04 Enclosure
Figure 1-16. DIN Rail Mounted FBM Enclosures
B03 and B04 Enclosures

As shipped, the B03 or B04 enclosures contains up to four baseplates, vertically mounted on DIN
rails, for mounting up to 32 FBMs and FCMs in combination. The enclosure is a free-standing,
floor-mounted unit with both front- and rear-door access, with DIN rails for mounting of the
baseplates and termination assemblies. It also contains wireways, optional I/O shield earthing
bars, power junction boxes, and optionally redundant power supplies.
The enclosures differ only in their environmental ratings: B03, having a NEMA 4 rating, can be
located in harsh environmental areas; B04, having a NEMA 12 rating, is designed for mild (ordinary) environmental areas.
As shipped from the factory, the B03 or B04 Enclosure is designed for either General Purpose or
Hazardous Area (Class 1, Division 2, Zone 2) area classification, per customer specification.
Figure 1-17 shows the basic enclosure equipment configuration. As shipped from the factory,
cable entry is from the bottom. However, the enclosure can be modified on-site for top cable
entry. Also, the enclosure can be reconfigured on-site to meet the needs of other specific applications. For example, an enclosure can be reconfigured to contain only baseplates (up to eight) or
only termination assemblies. (Refer to Thermal Loading on page 31 to ensure that thermal dissipation figures for the enclosure will not be exceeded.)
The dual power supply option provides redundancy protection against power failures. The power
entry junction boxes accept primary or optional secondary ac power and direct it to the primary
or optional secondary power supply.
22
1. Overview
B0400FA Rev D
Operational Status
Operational Status
Cable Type 1
Operational Status
FBM Identification
3-Inch X 3-Inch
Wireways
Operational Status
Left Module
Fieldbus
Tx
Fiber
Tx
FCM
Identification
User Defined
1
FCM10E
P0914ZX
Right Module
Rx
Fieldbus
Tx
Rx
Fiber
Tx
Rx
Tx
FCM10E
OFF
Communication Baseplate I. D.
No. Ethernet
1
2 to
10 Mbps Coaxial
0
ON ON
2 Mbps Fieldbus
1
OFF ON
P0914YM
2
ON OFF
3
Rx
Rx
Rx
Tx
FBM201
Communication
2 Mbps Fieldbus
P0914YM
OFF OFF
FBM201
OFF
Channel IsolatedBaseplate I. D.
2
8 input, 0-20mANo. 1
P0914SQ
ON
OFF ON
ON
OFF OFF
ON
FBM Identification
FBM Identification
FBM Identification
FBM Identification
FBM Identification
FBM Identification
FBM Identification
Cable Type 1
Cable Type 1
Cable Type 1
Cable Type 1
Cable Type 1
Cable Type 1
FBM Identification
Cable Type 1
FBM Identification
Cable Type 1
FBM Identification
DIN Rail
FBM Identification
Junction Box
(Primary Power)
Cable Type 1
Primary
Power
Supply
Junction
Box
(Secondary
Power)
Cable Type 1
P0914SQ
FBM Identification
Secondary
Power
Supply
FBM Identification
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
FBM Identification
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Operational Status
P0914SQ
Operational Status
Optional
I/O Shield
Earth Bus
Bar
FBM Identification
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
FBM201
P0914SQ
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Operational Status
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Operational Status
FBM201
P0914SQ
FBM201
P0914SQ
Operational Status
Operational Status
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
Operational Status
FBM201
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
OFF
FBM201
ON
Operational Status
OFF OFF
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
Cable Type 1
ON
FBM201
Operational Status
FBM Identification
OFF ON
Operational Status
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
ON
FBM Identification
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
OFF
Operational Status
P0914SQ
Cable Type 1
P0914SQ
OFF
FBM Identification
FBM201
2
ON
Cable Type 1
OFF OFF
Baseplates
(4)
ON
Operational Status
FBM Identification
FBM201
OFF ON
Operational Status
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
ON
Cable Type 1
P0914SQ
OFF
Operational Status
Cable Type 1
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
Operational Status
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
2
P0914SQ
Operational Status
FBM201
FBM201
Operational Status
Operational Status
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
Termination
Assemblies
FBM Identification
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
FBM201
P0914SQ
Operational Status
Cable Type 1
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
Cable Type 1
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
FBM Identification
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Cable Type 1
Operational Status
FBM201
Operational Status
Cable Type 1
P0914SQ
Operational Status
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
Cable Type 1
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Operational Status
Cable Type 1
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
Operational Status
FBM201
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Operational Status
Cable Type 1
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
OFF
Operational Status
Operational Status
P0914SQ
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Operational Status
FBM Identification
NOTE: Cabling is
not shown.
Front View
Rear View
Figure 1-17. B03/B04 Enclosure, Typical Equipment Configuration
B05 Enclosure
As shipped, the B05 enclosure contains up to two baseplates, horizontally mounted on DIN rails,
for mounting up to 16 FBMs and FCMs in combination. It is a wall-mounted unit with frontdoor access, and DIN rails for mounting of the baseplates and termination assemblies. It also contains wireways, optional I/O shield earthing bars, power junction boxes, and optionally redundant power supplies.
Two levels of environmental protection are available to allow the enclosure to be used in various
locations: outdoors, sheltered, and indoors, as follows:
NEMA 4 Version Painted steel enclosure with NEMA ratings of 1, 3R, 4, 12, and
13 (IP55)
NEMA 4X Version Stainless steel enclosure with NEMA ratings of 1, 4, 4X, and 12
(IP66).
As shipped from the factory, the B05 Enclosure is designed for General Purpose or Hazardous
Area (Class 1, Division 2, Zone 2) area classification.
23
B0400FA Rev D
1. Overview
Figure 1-18 shows the basic enclosure equipment configuration.

As shipped from the factory, the B05 enclosure is equipped for bottom cable entry. However, the
enclosure can be reconfigured on-site for top cable entry. In the NEMA 4 version, wires enter
through a cable entry panel located at the bottom of the enclosure. For top cable entry, the outer
shell of the enclosure is rotated 180, placing the cable entry panel at the top.
For the NEMA 4X version, users must provide their own cable access ports (for top or bottom
cable entry), in keeping with maintenance of the enclosures protection classification.
The dual power supply option provides redundancy protection against power failures. The power
entry junction boxes accept primary or optional secondary ac power and direct it to the primary
or optional secondary power supply.
Operational Status
Operational Status
Operational Status
Operational Status
Operational Status
Operational Status
Operational Status
Fieldbus
Tx
Fiber
Tx
Operational Status
Rx
Fieldbus
Tx
Rx
Fiber
Tx
Rx
Tx
FBM201
No.
0
1
2
3
2
1
ON ON
OFF ON
ON OFF
OFF OFF
Tx
FBM201
FCM10E
FCM10E
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
Communication
2 Mbps Fieldbus
P0914YM
Communication
2 Mbps Fieldbus
P0914YM
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mABaseplate I. D.
P0914SQ
Rx
Rx
Rx
FBM201
FBM201
FBM201
Baseplates
(2)
FCM Identification
Left Module
Junction Box
(Primary
Power)
P0914ZM
Operational Status
FBM201
P0914SQ
No.
0
1
2
3
Operational Status
FBM201
Channel Isolated
Primary
Power
Supply
(250W)
Operational Status
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Operational Status
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Operational Status
Operational Status
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Operational Status
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
ON ON
OFF ON
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
ON OFF
OFF OFF
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
FBM Identification
Cable Type 1
Cable Type 1
FBM Identification
Cable Type 1
Termination
Assemblies
FBM Identification
Cable Type 1
FBM Identification
FBM Identification
Cable Type 1
FBM Identification
Cable Type 1
FBM Identification
Wireway
(3-Inch x 3-Inch)
Cable Type 1
Termination
Assemblies
Secondary
Power
Supply
(250W)
Cable Type 1
FBM Identification
Cable
Guides
Junction Box
(Secondary
Power)
User Defined
Operational Status
Right Module
DIN Rail
NOTE: Cabling is not shown.
Figure 1-18. B05 Enclosure, Typical Equipment Configuration
24
I/O Shield
Bus Bar
1. Overview
B0400FA Rev D
Termination Assemblies
Termination Assemblies (TAs), designed for DIN rail mounting, provide a means for linking the
DIN rail mounted Fieldbus Modules (FBMs) with their associated field device wiring (see
Figure 1-19). Multiple types of field I/O signal terminations are available with each FBM type
(FBM201, FBM202, and so forth), to provide the necessary signal handling and circuit
protection required by the particular FBM.
Some TAs have built-in signal conditioning, where required, to interface high-voltage inputs. The
signal conditioning also provides isolation and FBM circuit protection. Wire terminations on the
TAs accept compression type wiring or ring lug termination, depending on the specific TA type.
Each TA connects to the baseplate-mounted FBM by means of a termination cable. In nonredundant FBM configurations, the cable connects directly to a baseplate-mounted connector
directly below (or adjacent to) the associated FBM. In a redundant FBM configuration, an
adapter plugs into the two I/O connectors on the Baseplate and a single TA cable connects the
adapter to the TA.
For detailed descriptive information on the TAs, associated cables, and how the TAs are used,
refer to Field Signal Connections on page 91.
Figure 1-19. Termination Assemblies (Typical)
25
B0400FA Rev D
1. Overview
Product Sizing Constraints

Sizing constraints of the DIN rail mounted FBM subsystem are as follows:
Cable Lengths Ethernet Trunk Fieldbus, 10Base2

Ethernet trunk Fieldbus3, 10Base2 coaxial cabling only:
184 m (607 ft) maximum4
Fiber optic extension (between BNC to fiber-ST converters):
2 km (1.24 mi) maximum, each extension3
Maximum Ethernet trunk segments:
Three 10B2, joined by two fiber optic extensions
Hub to FCM10Ef:
2 km (1.24 mi) maximum3.
Cable Lengths Module Fieldbus
Module Fieldbus, shielded twisted-pair segment (between two baseplates):

Overall module Fieldbus, shielded twisted-pair (all segments):
Module Fieldbus, fiber optic segment (between two baseplates):
10 km (6.2 mi) maximum4
Module Fieldbus segments:
3 maximum.
Cable Lengths Combined
I/A Series control station to farthest FBM (using combined coaxial and fiber optic
cabling)5:
20 km (12.4 mi).
Equipment Quantities
Number of FBMs hosted by an I/A Series control station:

120 maximum (depending on selected scan periods)
Number of BNC to fiber-ST converters per Ethernet trunk Fieldbus:
4 converters maximum per bus (2 extensions)
3.
The Ethernet trunk Fieldbus connects between the Control Processor 60 and the FCM10E modules
in the Direct network configuration (see Figure 1-7), and between the Control Processor 60 and the
hub(s) in the Active Star network configuration (see Figure 1-8).
4.
In any specific application, individual maximum cable lengths may be affected by the overall maximum cable length (20 km) between the I/A Series control station and the farthest FBM.
5.
In the combined coaxial and fiber optic Ethernet trunk Fieldbus configurations, BNC to Fiber-ST
converters are used (see Figure 1-7 and Figure 1-8).
26
1. Overview
B0400FA Rev D
Number of FCM10E or FCM10Ef pairs per I/A Series control station:

30 maximum
Number of FCM10E or FCM10Ef pairs per hub:
6 maximum
Number of FBMs per FCM10E or FCM10Ef pair:
30 maximum
Number of baseplates per module Fieldbus:
4 maximum.
Other product sizing constraints can be obtained by referencing appropriate sections of this
document.
27
B0400FA Rev D
28
1. Overview
2. Enclosure Installation
This chapter consists of installation information for the DIN rail mounted FBM subsystem
enclosures.
DIN rail mounted FBM enclosures consist of the following:
B03 enclosure A sealed, floor-mounted enclosure, holding up to four baseplates,
and having a NEMA 4 rating
B04 enclosure A sealed, floor-mounted enclosure, holding up to four baseplates,
and having a NEMA 12 rating
B05 enclosure A sealed, wall-mounted enclosure, holding up to two baseplates and

having a choice of a NEMA 4 or 4X rating.
NOTE
If the baseplates in your DIN rail mounted FBM subsystem are to be mounted in
an enclosure other than those mentioned above, refer to Equipment Installation
on page 51.
Installation of the DIN rail mounted FBM subsystem enclosures involves mounting the enclosure
on the floor (in the case of the B03 or B04 enclosure), or on a wall (in the case of the B05 enclosure) at the desired location, and making the required main power and earth connections.
! WARNING
To prevent the hazard of electrical shock and signal interference, high voltage main
power cables (those carrying 30 V rms or greater, or 60 V dc or greater) must be
kept separate from low voltage signal cables (those carrying less than 30 V rms, or
less than 60 V dc). Separate conduit, cable runs, and so forth, must be used, as well
as separate cable entries into the enclosure. The minimum allowable separation
between high and low voltage cables is 50 mm (2 in) at all points in the cable run.
! CAUTION
Where CE compliance is required when utilizing Lambda 24-Volt dc power supplies, a metal enclosure and PDU Part Number P0916XA or P0916XD must also
be used. This restriction does not apply when the Foxboro Model FPS 400-24
power supply is used.
Preinstallation Procedures
The following procedures provide general information regarding unloading and unpacking of all
DIN rail mounted FBM equipment, and performing checks on the power network to be used by
the equipment.
29
B0400FA Rev D
Unloading
The DIN rail mounted FBM subsystem units are designed to withstand vibration and shock normally encountered during shipping and installation; however, extreme shocks and vibration
should be avoided. If practical, all major movements of the units should be accomplished before
the units are unpacked.
Unpacking
The following unpacking procedure applies, in general, to all DIN rail mounted FBM
subsystem units:
1. Inspect the exterior of the shipping carton for obvious damage. (Any noticeable damage should be indicated in the shippers bill of lading.)
2. Verify that the equipment received is that described in the bill of lading.
3. Remove shipping straps, shipping shroud, and other packing materials, such as polyethylene bags and styrofoam cushioning materials.
NOTE
If you anticipate that the unit will be stored, or shipped from the present site, save
all packing materials for reuse.
4. If the unit is attached to a skid, remove all shipping hardware and hold-down bolts
used to fasten the unit to the skid. Separate the skid from the unit.
5. Ensure that the appropriate interconnecting cables are present, by comparing the
cable part numbers and quantities with those listed in the bill of lading.
Subsystem Power Checks

Perform the following checks before installing the equipment:
1. Check that the required ac or dc power distribution network lines are installed.
2. Check that the appropriate number of ac power outlets (if required) are installed and
spaced appropriately.
3. Switch on main system power and, using a multimeter, check that the appropriate
operating voltage exists at each enclosure connection point.
30
B0400FA Rev D
Thermal Loading
The enclosures have limitations regarding the amount of heat (power) they can dissipate. These
limitations, in turn, can affect the quantity of modules and termination assemblies that can be
contained in the enclosures. The values for allowable heat dissipation within the enclosures
depend on the ambient (external) temperature, as shown in the following table:
Loading
(Dissipation)
Enclosure
B03
B04
B05
Up to 293 W
Up to 523 W
Up to 293 W
Up to 523 W
Up to 166 W
Up to 227 W
Enclosure Operating
(External Ambient) Temperature
-20 to +60C (-4 to +140F)
-20 to +50C (-4 to +122F)
-20 to +60C (-4 to +140F)
-20 to +50C (-4 to +122F)
-20 to +60C (-4 to +140F)
-20 to +50C (-4 to +122F)
To determine whether the total equipment selected for mounting in an enclosure exceeds these
values, add the power dissipation values for the power supplies and all modules and termination
assemblies to be mounted in the enclosure.
! CAUTION
While the FBMs have a high operating temperature limit of 70 C, some termination assemblies have a high operating temperature limit of only 50 C. If in doubt
regarding the application/installation of certain termination assemblies for use with
associated FBMs, refer to the appropriate TA PSSs for the temperature specifications.
The heat dissipation (and power consumption) values for the DIN rail mounted Fieldbus Communications modules (FCMs), Fieldbus Modules (FBMs), termination assemblies (TAs), and
power supplies are listed in Table 2-1, Table 2-2, and Table 2-4. Per-channel power consumption
for the various types of inputs/outputs are listed in Table 2-3.
Table 2-1. FCM and FBM Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption
FBM
FCM10E
FCM10Ef
FCM2F2/4/10
FBM201
FBM202
FBM203
FBM204
FBM205,
redundant pair
Dissipation
(Watts, Maximum)
7
7
5
3
3
3
3.5
6
Consumption
(Watts, Maximum)
7
7
5
7
3
3
7
10
31
B0400FA Rev D
Table 2-1. FCM and FBM Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption (Continued)
FBM
FBM206
FBM207
FBM207b
FBM207c
FBM211
FBM212
FBM213
FBM214
FBM215
FBM216,
redundant pair
FBM217
FBM218,
redundant pair
FBM219
FBM220
FBM221
FBM223
FBM224
FBM237
FBM237,
redundant pair
FBM241
FBM241b
FBM241c
FBM241d
FBM242
FBM243
FBM246, redundant pair
Dissipation
(Watts, Maximum)
Consumption
(Watts, Maximum)
3
5.5
4
5
3
3
3
5
5
10
7
3
4
5
7
3
3
8
7
13
5
10
3
13
5
3.5
4
6
7
5
8
6
3.5
4
6
7
7
12
6
6
6
6
5
3
6
5
5
5
5
3
7
10
NOTE
Only TAs with relays and/or signal conditioning are included in Table 2-2, since
only these TAs dissipate or consume power.
32
B0400FA Rev D
Table 2-2. TA Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption (Maximum)
TA
P0916AM
P0916PK
P0916PH
P0916PM
P0916PS
P0916PY
P0916PU
P0916QA
P0917LL
P0917LP
P0917LS
P0917LV
P0917RF
P0917RG
P0916AS
P0916QG
P0916QT
P0916QV
P0916QJ
P0916QL
P0916QX
P0916QZ
P0917MX
P0916JW
P0916AW
P0916QQ
P0916NG
P0916JZ
P0926BE
Used with FBM
Dissipation
(Watts)*
Consumption
(Watts)*
FBM207
FBM207
FBM207
FBM207
FBM217
FBM217
FBM217
FBM217
FBM219
FBM219
FBM219
FBM219
FBM220
FBM221
FBM241
FBM241
FBM241
FBM241
FBM241
FBM241
FBM241
FBM241
FBM241
FBM241c
FBM241c
FBM241c
FBM242
FBM242
FBM242
6.7
6.7
13.4
13.4
13.4
13.4
26.9
26.9
14.3
14.3
24.4
24.4
2.5
2.5
7.6
7.6
7.6
7.6
11
11
11
11
7
4.2
4.2
4.2
8.5
8.5
7
6.7
6.7
13.4
13.4
13.4
13.4
26.9
26.9
14.3
14.3
24.4
24.4
11.5
11.5
7.6
7.6
7.6
7.6
11
11
11
11
3.5
4.2
4.2
4.2
8.5
8.5
N/A
*For per-channel power consumption/dissipation figures, refer to Table 2-3.
33
B0400FA Rev D
Table 2-3. Per-Channel TA Power Consumption
Input/OutputType
Per-Channel Power Consumption

(or Dissipation)
120 V input
240 V input
Relay output
P0197RF (for FBM220)
P0917RG (for FBM221)
120 V ac /125 V dc solid-state output
420 mW dissipation
840 mW dissipation
600 mW dissipation, 530 mw consumption
2.5 W dissipation, 11.5 consumption
2.5 W dissipation, 11.5 consumption
420 mw dissipation
Table 2-4. Power Supply Heat Dissipation
Part Number
P0904HX
P0904HV
P0904HW
P0917LY
Power Supply
250 W (24 V dc LL Div. 2)
500 W (24 V dc Standard LL)
500 W (24 V dc LL Div. 2)
400W (24 V dc LL Div. 2)
Dissipation
(Nominal)
43 W
86 W
86 W
28 W
Enclosure Power and Earth (Ground) Networks

The I/A Series power and earth distribution networks are described in Site Planning (B0193AB).
The following subsections present procedures which describe the earth connections to the
B03/B04 enclosure. These procedures assume that the earthing network described in Site Planning (B0193AB) (see NOTE below) is in place before you install the equipment.
B03/B04 Enclosure Installation

Installation of the B03 and B04 enclosures is identical. Installation involves the following issues,
as described in the following subsections:
Dimensions and clearance requirements
Footprint measurements and recommended floor cut-outs
Equipment configurations and mass
Mounting
Adjoining (two or more enclosures together)
Over-temperature sensing
Earth (ground) connections
Main power connections.
34
B0400FA Rev D
B03/B04 Enclosure Dimensions and Clearance Requirements

Dimensions and clearance requirements for the B03 and B04 enclosures are identical. They are
shown in Figure 2-1.
DIMENSIONS-NOMINAL
800
31.4
Rear Door
(Fully Opened)**
800
31.4
2100
82.6
2200
86.6
2000
78.6
Front
Top View
Plinth*
Cable Base*
200
8.0
100
Plinth
3.93
2200
86.6
600
23.6
Front
Front Door
(Fully Opened)**
800
31.4
Top View
Cable Base
Front View
* Enclosure can be ordered with neither plinth nor cable base.

** Enclosure can be modified in the field to provide opposite door swings.
Figure 2-1. B03/B04 Enclosure Dimensions and Clearance Requirements
B03/B04 Enclosure Footprint and Recommended Floor Cutouts

The footprint of the plinth (or cable base) for the B03/B04 enclosure is shown in Figure 2-2, and
recommended floor cut-outs are shown in Figure 2-3. As shown in these figures, B03 and B04
have the same footprints and floor cutout requirements.
35
B0400FA Rev D
125
mm
125
100
100
30
12.5
37.5
18 x 14
8.5
37.5
12.5
25
50
550
30
52.5
25
14
600
675
735
800
62.5
32.5
52.5
22.5
62.5
32.5
Figure 2-2. Enclosure B03/B04 Plinth/Cable Base Footprint
Field Termination Cable Floor CutOut, 304 mm (12 in) x 102 mm (4 in)
mm
in
Enclosure Base Footprint,

800 mm (31.5 in) x 550 mm (21.7 in)
38
1.5
475
18.7
38
1.5
114
4.5
572
22.5
114
4.5
Power Cable Floor CutOuts, 120 mm (4 in) square

Front
Figure 2-3. Enclosure B03/B04 Recommended Floor Cut-outs
B03/B04 Enclosure Cable Entry

As shipped from the factory, the B03 or B04 enclosure is equipped for bottom cable entry. Either
enclosure type (B03 or B04) has a single, removable metal plate, located at the bottom (inside) of
the enclosure, which can be drilled or punched for cable routing.
If top cable entry is required, it is recommended that the junction boxes and power supplies be
moved to the top (within the enclosure), to reduce the ac cable run within the enclosure. (This
will minimize the effects of electromagnetic interference from the cables.) To make room for the
junction boxes and power supplies, move the baseplates to the lower section of the enclosure.
36
B0400FA Rev D
For either type of cable entry (top or bottom), actual cable entry into the enclosure is provided by
drilling or punching the required openings in the enclosures top or bottom plate. Appropriate fittings and sealants (as required) must be used at the points of cable (conduit) entry, to maintain
the enclosures contamination protection classification.
B03/B04 Enclosure Equipment Configurations and Mass

As shipped from the factory, a B03 or B04 enclosure typically contains up to four baseplates,
redundant or non-redundant power supplies and junction boxes, I/O shield earth bus bars, and
enclosure side panels. The number of termination assemblies (TAs) that can be accommodated in
this typical configuration is 28 to 46, depending on the dimensions of the TAs used.
Figure 1-17 shows a typical B03/B04 enclosure equipment configuration.
An enclosure ordered empty can accommodate up to eight baseplates, along with the required
power supplies and junction boxes. Alternatively, an enclosure ordered empty can acccommodate
56 to 92 TAs, depending on the dimensions of the TAs used.
A fully loaded B03 or B04 enclosure has a mass of 191 kg (425 lb). With skids and packaging, the
mass is 214 kg (475 lb).
B03/B04 Enclosure Mounting

The B03/B04 enclosure is designed for floor mounting. Wires, cables, and conduits enter through
the bottom of the enclosure but, as mentioned previously, the enclosure can be reconfigured onsite for top cable entry. Front and rear doors provide access to the equipment and wiring areas.
Additionally, the doors can be mounted to open from left-to-right or right-to-left.
Before proceeding with mounting of the B03/B04 enclosure, the following issues must be
considered:
High and low voltage cables must be separated (see the Warning statement on
page 29).
The type of enclosure (B03 or B04), and whether top or bottom cable entry (or both)
is to be employed. Bottom cable entry can be from below the enclosure (from beneath
a raised floor or from a cable trough), or from floor level via the openings provided by
removing the front and rear access panels on the enclosure base. For either enclosure
type, if top cable entry is used it is effected via conduit, which is fed through the
enclosures top panel.
NOTE
For information on B03/B04 enclosure dimensions and clearance requirements,

refer to B03/B04 Enclosure Dimensions and Clearance Requirements on page 35.
1. If the enclosure is to be bolted to the floor:
a. Place the enclosure in the desired location.
b. Locate the mounting holes at the corners of the base (see Figure 2-2).
(This requires removal of the sealing plate at the bottom of the enclosure.)
c. Mark the hole locations on the floor.
d. Move the enclosure away from the markings.
37
B0400FA Rev D
e. Drill the holes in the floor, and install the appropriate mounting hardware in the
holes. (The hardware used depends on the type of floor and is left to your
discretion.)
f. Move the enclosure over the holes and fasten it to the floor using suitable
hardware.
2. If cable entry is to be from the bottom:
a. Remove the cable access plate from the inside base of the enclosure. (This also
requires disconnecting the ground wire attached to the plate.)
b. Drill or punch the required holes in the cable access plate and provide appropriate
fittings and sealants (as required) for a watertight seal.
c. Replace the cable access plate and reconnect the ground wire.
! CAUTION
In Step 3, before drilling or punching holes for top cable entry, take measures to
ensure that metal debris will not fall into any installed electronic equipment.
3. If cable entry is to be from the top (this assumes that the enclosure has been reconfigured for top cable entry on-site, as described under B03/B04 Enclosure Cable Entry
on page 36):
a. Remove the enclosure top panel by unscrewing the four bolts holding it in place.
(This also requires disconnecting the ground wire attached to the panel.)
b. Drill or punch holes in the enclosure top panel in positions (at the discretion of
the user) required for cable routing into the enclosure.
c. Provide appropriate conduit fittings and sealants (as required) for a watertight or
dust-resistant seal, as required.
d. Replace the enclosure top panel and reconnect the ground wire.
Adjoining B04 Enclosures

Multiple B04 enclosures can be adjoined to maximize use of floor space. The Rittal Corporation
(original manufacturer of the B04 enclosure) offers several different types of kits for adjoining the
enclosures. Rittal can be contacted by phone at 1-800-477-4000, online at
http://www.rittal-corp.com, or by email rittal@rittal-corp.com.
B03/B04 Enclosure Over-Temperature Sensing

The B03/B04 enclosure is not shipped with an over-temperature sensor. If this feature is desired,
off-the-shelf sensors are readily available from local equipment vendors.
NOTE
The B03 and B04 enclosures are designed to adequately dissipate all power developed by the DIN rail subsystem equipment housed within them. If the specified
guidelines herein are followed (see Thermal Loading on page 31) over-temperature conditions should not arise.
38
B0400FA Rev D
B03/B04 Enclosure Earth (Ground) Connections

NOTE
For information on installing a power and earth distribution network for the DIN
rail mounted FBM subsystem equipment, refer to Enclosure Power and Earth
(Ground) Networks on page 34.
Make the earth connections to the B03/B04 enclosure as indicated in Figure 2-4.
Operational Status
Operational Status
Cable Type 1
FBM Identification
Operational Status
Operational Status
Left Module
Fieldbus
Tx
Fiber
Tx
FCM
Identification
User Defined
1
FCM10E
P0914ZX
Right Module
Rx
Fieldbus
Tx
Rx
Fiber
Tx
Rx
Tx
FCM10E
OFF
No. Ethernet
2 to
1
10 Mbps Coaxial
0
ON ON
2 Mbps Fieldbus
1
OFF ON
P0914YM
2
ON OFF
3
Rx
Rx
Rx
Tx
FBM201
Communication
2 Mbps Fieldbus
P0914YM
OFF OFF
OFF ON
ON
OFF OFF
ON
Cable Type 1
FBM Identification
Cable Type 1
FBM Identification
Cable Type 1
FBM Identification
Cable Type 1
FBM Identification
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
Cable Type 1
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
FBM Identification
Operational Status
Dedicated system earth

bus bar. Connect to dedicated system (quiet) earth.
Also, see note below.
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
Operational Status
FBM201
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
Operational Status
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Operational Status
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
Operational Status
P0914SQ
FBM201
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Operational Status
P0914SQ
Operational Status
P0914SQ
OFF
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
ON
Cable Type 1
FBM201
Cable Type 1
OFF OFF
Operational Status
FBM Identification
ON
FBM201
P0914SQ
Operational Status
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
OFF ON
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
FBM201
ON
Operational Status
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
OFF
FBM Identification
FBM201
P0914SQ
Operational Status
Cable Type 1
P0914SQ
OFF
Operational Status
2
ON
FBM Identification
OFF OFF
ON
OFF ON
Cable Type 1
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
ON
FBM Identification
FBM201
Operational Status
Operational Status
OFF
2
Cable Type 1
P0914SQ
Operational Status
FBM Identification
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
Operational Status
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
Cable Type 1
Operational Status
FBM201
FBM201
Operational Status
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
FBM Identification
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Cable Type 1
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
Operational Status
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
Cable Type 1
Operational Status
FBM201
FBM201
Operational Status
Operational Status
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
FBM Identification
P0914SQ
FBM Identification
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
Operational Status
Cable Type 1
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Operational Status
FBM201
FBM201
Operational Status
P0914SQ
OFF
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
ON
FBM Identification
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Operational Status
Operational Status
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
Operational Status
FBM201
FBM201
OFF
2
Cable Type 1
FBM Identification
Cable Type 1
FBM Identification
Cable Type 1
FBM Identification
Cable Type 1
FBM Identification
Cable Type 1
FBM Identification
Cable Type 1
FBM Identification
Cable Type 1
FBM Identification
Plant utility earth tie

point (two 0.25 inch
bolts directly beneath
junction box). Connect
to plant utility earth.
Cable Type 1
FBM Identification
Connect I/O shield bus

bar(s) to plant utility
earth tie point (located
just below junction box).
Front View
Rear View
NOTE: In applications where no I/O shield bus bars are included and it is known that the
ac power system earth is not noisy, the dedicated system earth bus bar may be tied to
plant utility earth to avoid having to provide a dedicated quiet earth facility.
Figure 2-4. B03/B04 Enclosure, Earth Connection Points
39
B0400FA Rev D
B03/B04 Enclosure Main Power Connections

To connect the power lines to the B03/B04 enclosure with the Foxboro FPS400-24 power supply(s), refer to Figure 2-5 and proceed as follows:
NOTE
1. Switch off main system power.
2. Open the front enclosure door to access the input power terminal strip. The power
terminal strip(s) are DIN rail mounted and have a slide-off plastic top cover.
3. Slide the top cover off the terminal strip(s).
4. Route the power lines to the terminal strip(s).
5. Connect the power lines as shown in Figure 2-6. You can connect an ac convenience
outlet in the enclosure. Fusing and connections are the responsibility of customer.
6. Replace the terminal strip top cover(s).
Primary Power Supply
Output 1
BP #0
Output 2
BP #1
Output 3
BP #2
Output 4
BP#3
Output 5
+ _ SH
Output 6
+ _ SH
+ _ SH
DIN Rail Mounted Terminal

Strip
+ _ SH
+ _ SH
+ _ SH
INPUT 100-240V ac
125V dc
G SH
L N
P0926CN
Primary
Customer
Power
and Optional
Terminals
For Daisy Chain
To Additional
Enclosures
100 - 240 V ac
50 - 60 Hz
125 V dc
L1 +
L1 +
L1 +
L1 +
L2 _
L2 _
L2 _
L2 _
L (L1) +
L (L1) +
N (L2) N (L2) -
P0926DZ
Cabinet/Chassis
Figure 2-5. B03/B04 Enclosure With FPS400-24 Power Supply
To connect the power lines to the B03/B04 enclosure with Lambda power supplies, refer to
Figure 2-6 and proceed as follows:
40
B0400FA Rev D
NOTE
2. Open the front enclosure door to access the junction box(es). (The primary junction
box is located along the right side, and the secondary junction box, if included, is
located on the left.)
3. Place the junction box power switch(es) in the OFF position (or remove the fuse).
4. Remove the bottom cover from each junction box by inserting a 5/32 hex driver tool
(Foxboro part number X0197AZ) into the access hole, applying pressure, and lifting
the cover from its place.
5. Route the power lines to the junction box(es).
6. Connect the power lines as shown in Figure 2-6.
7. Replace the junction box cover(s).
41
B0400FA Rev D
Junction Box
(Primary or
Secondary)
Power Out
Connectors
Power Switch/
Circuit Breaker*
Bottom
Cover
Access
Hole
N N L L
Earth
N N L L
Earth
Line
Neutral
Line
Neutral
Secondary
Junction
Box
ac Main
Primary
Junction
Box
ac Main
(Primary)
*General Purpose junction box is shown. The Class 1, Division 2 junction box has
a fuse in place of the power switch/circuit breaker.
Figure 2-6. ac Main Power Connections (Redundant Power)
42
B0400FA Rev D
B05 Enclosure Installation

Installation of the B05 enclosure involves the following issues, as described in the following
subsections :
Dimensions and clearance requirements
Equipment configurations and mass
Mounting
Over-temperature sensing
Main power connections.
B05 Enclosure Dimensions and Clearance Requirements

Dimensions and clearance requirements for the B05 enclosure are shown in Figure 2-7.
43
B0400FA Rev D
800
31.5
10
0.4
1110
43.73
1100
43.34
800
31.5
Wall
Door
(Fully Opened)*
1200
47.3
1254
49.4
300
11.8
Front View
* Door swing is reversible

(field modification) for
NEMA 4 version only.
Top View
Wall Mounting
Bracket (1 of 4),
See Below
Wall Mounting Bracket
54
15
29
27
10
15
20
10.2
20
NOTE: Per user preference, brackets can be mounted on the sides rather than top and bottom.
Figure 2-7. 16-Position FBM Enclosure B05 Dimensions and Clearance Requirements
B05 Enclosure Cable Entry

NEMA 4 Version
The NEMA 4 version of the B05 enclosure contains a removable cable access plate at the base of
the enclosure. This plate can be temporarily removed for convenient drilling or punching of holes
to provide the necessary cable entry points. If top cable entry is desired, the enclosure can be modified on-site to place the cable access plate at the top, as follows:
1. Referring to Figure 1-18, notice that all enclosure components are mounted on a
metal plate, which is attached to the shell of the enclosure by means of six bolts (three
at the top and three at the bottom).
44
B0400FA Rev D
! CAUTION
The metal plate with its attached equipment is heavy, and can thus cause injury to
personnel during lifting. To prevent injuries when lifting this plate, use two people
to do the lifting, or use an appropriate mechanical lifting device.
2. With the enclosure laying on its back (on the floor), remove the six bolts mentioned
in Step 1.
3. Lift the metal plate (along with its attached components) and rotate it 180 (Alternatively, the enclosure shell can be rotated while the metal plate is held above it.)
4. Re-fasten the enclosure metal plate to the enclosure shell using the six bolts.
For either type of cable entry (top or bottom), actual cable entry into the enclosure is provided by
drilling or punching the required openings in the enclosures top or bottom plate. Appropriate fittings and sealants (as required) must be used at the points of cable (conduit) entry, to maintain
the enclosures contamination protection classification.
! CAUTION
Before drilling or punching holes for top cable entry, take measures to ensure that
metal debris will not fall into any installed electronic equipment.
NEMA 4X Version
The NEMA 4X (stainless steel) version of the B05 enclosure does not contain a removable cable
access plate; the bottom or top panel of the enclosure must be drilled or punched to provide the
necessary cable entry points. Also, appropriate fittings and sealants (as required) must be used at
the points of cable (conduit) entry, to maintain the enclosures contamination protection
classification.
B05 Enclosure Equipment Configuration and Mass

As shipped from the factory, the B05 enclosure typically contains up to two baseplates, redundant
or non-redundant power supplies and junction boxes, and I/O shield earth bus bars. The enclosure is sized to accommodate the appropriate number of TAs for most applications.
Figure 1-18 shows a typical B05 enclosure equipment configuration. A fully loaded B05 enclosure
has a mass of 169 kg (375 lb). With skids and packaging, the mass is 187 kg (415 lb).
B05 Enclosure Mounting

The B05 enclosure is designed for wall mounting, with wires, cables, and conduits entering
through the top or bottom of the enclosure.
NOTE
1. Before proceeding with mounting of the B05 enclosure, you must be aware that
the high and low voltage cables must be separated (see the Warning statement on
page 29).
2. For B05 dimensions and clearance requirements, refer to B05 Enclosure Dimensions and Clearance Requirements on page 43.
45
B0400FA Rev D
To mount the B05 enclosure, proceed as follows.

1. Attach the wall mounting brackets to the rear of the enclosure (see Figure 2-7). For
the NEMA 4 version of the enclosure, attach the brackets using the hardware provided (bolts, nuts, and washers). For the NEMA 4X (stainless steel) version, the
brackets must be welded in place to maintain the NEMA 4X rating.
! CAUTION
The enclosure is heavy, and can thus cause injury to personnel during lifting. In
order to perform the following procedure safely, three persons must be employed,
two for lifting of the enclosure and the third for marking of the bolt locations (and
later tightening the bolts) on the wall.
NOTE
1. To reduce the weight of the enclosure during this installation procedure, it may
be desirable to remove the door.
2. The mounting brackets contain slots and holes. This procedure assumes that the
holes are used, but the procedure may be altered for use of the slots.
2. Provide the required mounting holes in the wall, proceed as follows:
a. Place the enclosure (with its attached wall mounting brackets) in the desired location against the wall, and mark the wall at the four bolting positions.
b. Move the enclosure away from the wall and set it on the floor.
c. Drill the four holes in the wall, as necessary for accepting 10 mm mounting bolts.
3. Position the enclosure on the wall such that the wall mounting brackets align with the
four drilled holes. Then install two 10 mm bolts in the two top mounting positions,
along with the required washers and lock washers. Tighten the bolts securely.
4. Install two 10 mm bolts in the two bottom mounting positions, along with the
required washers and lock washers, and tighten securely.
5. Referring to B05 Enclosure Cable Entry on page 44, provide the necessary cable
cutouts and install (as required) sealed conduit fittings.
B05 Enclosure Over-Temperature Sensing

The B05 enclosure is not shipped with an over-temperature sensor. If this feature is desired, offthe-shelf sensors are readily available from local equipment vendors.
NOTE
The B05 enclosure is designed to adequately dissipate all power developed by the
DIN rail subsystem equipment housed within it. If the specified guidelines herein
are followed (see Thermal Loading on page 31) over-temperature conditions
should not arise.
46
B0400FA Rev D
B05 Enclosure Earth (Ground) Connections

NOTE
rail FBM subsystem equipment, refer to Enclosure Power and Earth (Ground)
Networks on page 34.
Make the earth connections to the B05 enclosure as indicated in Figure 2-8.
47
B0400FA Rev D
Dedicated system earth bus bar

(3-terminal jones block directly
above junction box). Connect
to dedicated system (quiet) earth.
Also, see note below.
Operational Status
Operational Status
Operational Status
Operational Status
Operational Status
Operational Status
Operational Status
Operational Status
Fieldbus
Tx
Rx
Fieldbus
Tx
Rx
Fiber
Tx
Rx
Fiber
Tx
Rx
Rx
Rx
Tx
FBM201
FBM201
Channel Isolated
P0914SQ
No.
ON
1
2
3
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
ON
OFF ON
ON OFF
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
Tx
FCM10E
FBM201
FCM10E
Communication
2 Mbps Fieldbus
P0914YM
Communication
2 Mbps Fieldbus
P0914YM
OFF OFF
FCM Identification
Left Module
P0914ZM
Operational Status
FBM201
1
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Operational Status
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Operational Status
Operational Status
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Operational Status
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Operational Status
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
ON
ON
OFF ON
ON OFF
OFF OFF
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
FBM Identification
Cable Type 1
Cable Type 1
FBM Identification
Cable Type 1
FBM Identification
Cable Type 1
FBM Identification
FBM Identification
Cable Type 1
FBM Identification
Cable Type 1
FBM Identification
Cable Type 1
Cable Type 1
FBM Identification
Plant utility earth

tie point (Use spare
10-32 tapped holes
on metal bracket.)
Connect to plant
utility earth.
No.
0
1
2
3
Operational Status
FBM201
Channel Isolated
P0914SQ
Operational Status
Right Module
User Defined
Connect I/O shield bus bar to plant utility

earth tie point (see above, left).
NOTE: In applications where no I/O shield bus bars are included and it is known that the
ac power system earth is not noisy, the dedicated system earth bus bar may be tied to
plant utility earth to avoid having to provide a dedicated quiet earth facility.
Figure 2-8. B05 Enclosure, Earth Connection Points
48
B0400FA Rev D
B05 Enclosure Main Power Connections

To connect the power lines to the B05 enclosure, refer to Figure 2-6 and proceed as follows:
2. Open the enclosure door to access the junction box(es). (The primary junction box is
located along the left side, and the secondary junction box, if included, is located on
the right.)
3. Place the junction box power switch(es) in the OFF position (or remove the fuse).
4. Remove the bottom cover from each junction box by inserting the hex driver tool
(Foxboro part number X0197AZ) into the access hole, applying pressure, and lifting
the cover from its place.
5. Route the power lines to the junction box(es).
6. Connect the power lines as shown in Figure 2-6.
7. Replace the junction box cover(s).
49
B0400FA Rev D
50
3. Equipment Installation
This chapter consists of installation information for the DIN rail mounted FBM equipment:
power supplies, baseplates, modules (FBMs and FCMs), and Ethernet trunk Fieldbus
equipment.
Power Supply Mounting and Installation

NOTE
This subsection pertains only to those instances where users are installing baseplates
into their own custom enclosures.
If the DIN rail mounted FBM subsystem equipment is to be mounted in a facility other than a
DIN rail mounted FBM subsystem enclosure (B03, B04, or B05), you must install a primary and
(if applicable) secondary power supply in your enclosure(s). The enclosures use either the Foxboro
Power Supply or Lambda Power Supplies as described in the following paragraphs.
Foxboro Power Supply (FPS400-24)

The Foxboro power supply is a DIN rail mounted agency certified power supply (see Figure 3-1):
400 W agency certified, 24 V dc LL Div. 2 (Part No. P0917LY)
Figure 3-1. Foxboro DIN Rail Mounted FBM Subsystem Equipment Power Supply
51
B0400FA Rev D
Typically, the power supply mounts on a DIN rail in the enclosure. Since the power supply is
convection cooled, the power supply must be positioned in any enclosure with the clearances
6 (175)
in (mm)
TOP
6 (175)
6 (175)
BOTTOM
16 (400)
DIN Rail Stop
CABNET BOTTOM
Figure 3-2. Foxboro Power Supply FPS400-24 Clearance Requirements
To wall mount the power supply, proceed as follows:

1. Ensure that the wall mounting or enclosure have holes that line up with the screw
holes in the mounting bracket for the power supply. The mounting bracket screw
hole dimensions are shown in Figure 3-3.
52
B0400FA Rev D
5.92 [150]
3.45[88]
1.24 [31]
0.80 [20]
DIN Rail Mount
3.44 [88]
4.92 [125]
REAR VIEW
(WALL MOUNT BRACKET)
Figure 3-3. Foxboro Power Supply FPS400-24 Wall Mount Bracket Screw Hole Dimensions
2. Align the screw holes in the mounting bracket and attach the bracket to the wall
mounting. Use the supplied washers and bolts to mount the bracket
3. Slide the power supply into the mounting bracket.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the secondary power supply (if applicable).
5. If a DIN rail is available, remove the cover from the DIN rail mounted terminal strip
and snap the terminal strip to the DIN rail. If a DIN rail is not available, you must
supply a terminal strip for input power distribution.
To DIN rail mount the power supply, proceed as follows:
NOTE
The FPS-24 power supply is normally shipped in standard enclosures mounted on a

DIN rail.
1. Locate the FPS-24 in the enclosure using the clearances shown in Figure 3-2.
2. Snap the FPS-24 onto the DIN rail.
3. Snap the DIN rail stop onto the DIN rail beneath the FPS-24 (see Figure 3-2) and
tighten the screw on the stop.
To remove the FPS-24 from the DIN rail:
1. Remove the power wiring from the power supply.
2. Loosen the DIN rail stop screw.
3. Remove the DIN rail stop from the DIN rail.
53
B0400FA Rev D
4. Place a screwdriver blade into a slot on the DIN rail mount (see Figure 3-3).
5. Apply pressure between the mount and the DIN rail to disconnect the power supply
from the DIN rail.
Factory Mains Power Connections to the Power Supply

Connect the factory mains input connector to the power supply.
1. Connect the power supply input cable to the terminal strip.
2. Connect the factory mains input connector to the power supply using the connection
points shown in Figure 3-4, Figure 3-5 and Table 3-3.
3. Attach a ground bus bar, electrically isolated from the enclosure, in close proximity to
the power supplies. This bus bar will serve as the quiet earth tie point.
54
B0400FA Rev D
Primary
+
_
Primary
P0926CF
+
_
SH
SH
BasePlate #0
+
_
Secondary
+
_
SH
Primary
SH
Primary
+
_
+
_
SH
SH
BasePlate #3
BasePlate #1
Secondary
Secondary
+
_
+
_
SH
Secondary Power Supply
Output 1
BP #0
Output 2
BP #1
Output 3
BP #2
Output 4
BP#3
Output 5
+ _ SH
Output 6
P0926CD
P0926CE
P0926CF
SH
Primary Power Supply

+ _ SH
+ _ SH
Output 1
BP #0
Output 2
BP #1
Output 3
BP #2
Output 4
BP#3
Output 5
+ _ SH
Output 6
+ _ SH
+ _ SH
P0926CE
+ _ SH
P0926CD
+ _ SH
INPUT 100-240V ac
125V dc
G SH
L N
+ _ SH
+ _ SH
+ _ SH
+ _ SH
INPUT 100-240V ac
125V dc
G SH
L N
P0926CN
P0926CN
Secondary
Customer
Power
and Optional
Terminals
For Daisy Chain
To Additional
Enclosures
100 - 240 V ac
50 - 60 Hz
125 V dc
L (L1) +
L (L1) +
N (L2) N (L2) -
P0926DZ
Cabinet/Chassis
Ground Stud
P0926CC
Secondary
P0926CE
BasePlate #2
DIN rail mounted

Terminal Strip
Primary
Customer
Power
and Optional
Terminals
For Daisy Chain
To Additional
Enclosures
100 - 240 V ac
50 - 60 Hz
125 V dc
L (L1) +
L (L1) +
N (L2) N (L2) -
P0926DZ
Cabinet/Chassis
Ground Stud
DIN rail mounted

Terminal Strip
Figure 3-4. FPS400-24 Power Supply Wiring
! CAUTION
Due to high leakage currents, it is vital that the grounding circuit be connected
properly. Never operate the system with the grounding conductor disconnected.
55
B0400FA Rev D
123
Output
Connectors
12
56
Input
Connector
Front View
Figure 3-5. Factory Mains Input Power Connector to FPS400-24
Table 3-1. FPS400-24 Input/Output Connectors
Pin
1
2
5
6
Input Connector
Function
Line (L1)
Neutral (L2)
Safety GND
Shield
Pin
1
2
3
Output Connector
Function
Positive 24 V dc Output
Negative 24 V dc Output
Shield
Lambda Power Supplies

Three types of Lambda power supplies are available for your individual power and safety requirements (see Figure 3-6):
250 W agency certified, 24 V dc LL Div. 2 (Part No. P0904HX)
500 W standard (P0904HV)
500 W agency certified, 24 V dc LL Div. 2 (Part No. P0904HW).
56
TI
C
N
TE
R
IN
A
L
FU
T
C Bxx
AU x
TI
O
N
O
N
B0400FA Rev D
R
E
FO MO
O R VE
P R
U ER EM SE
N A O N
IT T T S
M IO E ING
AY N S
E
O OR NS JUM
C D E P
C A
E
U M
R
R A
S
. G
E
TO
LAMB
DA
Electro
nics in
c.
LZ
Regula S-500-X
ted Po
wer Su
INPUT
pply
AUTO
-SELEC
xxx/xxx
TED
OUTPU
/VAC
TB
R C x
E
FO MO A xx
U
O R VE T
P R
U ER EM SE IO
N A O N
IT T T S N
M IO E ING
A N
R Y O ORSENS JUM
M CC DA E PE
IN UR MA RS
A . GE
L
FU TO
N
C
TI
O
N
T
xx.x-xx
.x VDC
MAX.
xxA(xx RATINGS
x
xxA(xx W) @ 40
C
x
xxA(xx W) @ 50
C
x
xxA(xx W) @ 60
C
x W)
@ 71
C
TE
xx-xx
Hz
x0 A RM
PATENT S MAX.
PEND
ING
LAMB
500 W Power Supply

(P0904HV or P0904HW)
DA
Electro
nics in
c.
LZ
Regulat S-250-X
ed Po
wer Su
pply
INPUT
AUTO
-SE
xxx/xx LECTED
x/VAC
xx-xx
Hz
x0 A RM
PATENT S MAX.
PEND
ING
OUTP
UT
xx.x-x
x.x VD
C
MAX.
RATIN
xxA(xx
GS
x
xxA(xx W) @ 40
C
x
xxA(xx W) @ 50
C
x
xxA(xx W) @ 60
C
x W)
@ 71
C
250 W Power Supply

(P0904HX)
Figure 3-6. Lambda DIN Rail Mounted FBM Subsystem Equipment Power Supplies
NOTE
In some installations, per user preference, it may be desirable to add ground fault
detection equipment at the Lambda power supply output terminals. Addition of
this equipment is in fact possible because, with regard to direct current (dc), the +
and - output terminals are isolated from the power supply case. Note, however, that
RFI filtering capacitors (typically 0.1 ILQWHUQDOWRWKHSRZHUVXSSO\FRQQHFW
EHWZHHQWKHWHUPLQDOVDQGWKHSRZHUVXSSO\FDVH7KLVFRXOGLPSDFWRQWKHVSHFLILF
W\SHRIJURXQGIDXOWGHWHFWLRQHTXLSPHQWVHOHFWHGIRUWKLVIXQFWLRQ
Typically, the Lambda power supplies mount on standard supporting braces in the enclosure. To
install the power supplies, proceed as follows:
! CAUTION
Due to the weight and placement of the Lambda power supplies, this procedure
must be performed by two people.
1. Ensure that the supporting braces at the top of the enclosure have holes which line up
with the screw holes in the power supplies. If not, adjust the supporting braces. The
power supply screw hole mounting dimensions are shown in Figure 3-7.
57
B0400FA Rev D
mm
in
85.7
3.38
177.8
7.0
Screw Hole in
Power Supply
63.5
2.5
250 W Power Supply (P0904HX)

(Bottom of Base Shown)
228.6
9.0
165.1
6.5
107.9
4.25
Screw Hole in
Power Supply
76.2
3.0
500 W Power Supply (P0904HW)

(Bottom of Base Shown)
260.3
10.25
Figure 3-7. Lambda Power Supply Screw Hole Dimensions
2. Align the screw holes in the primary power supply with corresponding holes in the
supporting braces.
3. Attach the power supply to the supporting braces using the included screws and washers. Use large washers for holes away from the edges of the supporting braces.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the secondary power supply (if applicable).
5. Attach a ground bus bar, electrically isolated from the enclosure, in close proximity to
the power supplies. This bus bar will serve as the quiet earth tie point.
Factory Mains Power Connections to the Lambda Power

Supplies
Make the factory mains connections to the Lambda power supply(s) using the connection points
shown in Figure 3-8 and Figure 3-9.
! CAUTION
Due to high leakage currents, it is vital that the grounding circuit be connected
properly. Never operate the system with the grounding conductor disconnected.
58
Protected Earth
Ground Connection
(Green/Yellow Wire)
B0400FA Rev D
Terminal Block Protective Shield
Remove these screws

to remove the terminal
block protective shield.
250 W Power
Supply
Line Connection
(Black Wire)
Neutral Connection
(White Wire)
Power Cable
Figure 3-8. Factory Mains Power Connections to the Lambda 250 W Power Supply
Terminal Block Protective Shield

Remove these screws
to remove the terminal
block protective shield.
Protected Earth
Ground Connection
(Green/Yellow Wire)
Line Connection
(Black Wire)
500 W Power
Supply
Neutral Connection
(White Wire
Power Cable
Figure 3-9. Factory Mains Power Connections to the Lambda 500 W Power Supply
59
B0400FA Rev D
Baseplate Installation
NOTE
The B03, B04, and B05 enclosures are shipped with the baseplates in place. The
instructions presented here are for custom mounting of the baseplates in user-supplied
enclosures.
The DIN rail mounted Fieldbus module baseplate can be mounted three different ways:
Horizontal mounting of the baseplate (P0914XA) on a brace-supported or

backplate-supported horizontal DIN rail.
Vertical mounting of the baseplate (P0914XB) on a brace-supported or backplatesupported vertical DIN rail.
Horizontal mounting of the baseplate (P0914XA) in a standard, 483 mm (19-inch)

rack, without the use of a DIN rail. A mounting bracket kit, P0930AS, contains the
necessary hardware for mounting the Baseplate and provides a 25.4 mm (1 in)
mounting depth. The mounting bracket attaches to the rear of the horizontal baseplate (P0914XA) using four screws provided with the bracket.
DIN Rail Mounting of the Horizontal Baseplate

As illustrated in Figure 3-10 mechanical support is required for horizontal DIN rail mounting of
the baseplate. This support, required for all mounting configurations of the baseplates, can be in
the form of metal braces, a backplate, or a wall. The added support prevents unnecessary movement or twisting motion of the DIN rail/baseplate combination.
Supporting Braces
(Part of Equipment Rack)
(DIN Rail Attached)
Baseplate
(P0914XA)
DIN Rail
1
OFF
1
ON
OFF ON
ON OFF
OFF OFF
2
3
OFF
Baseplate I. D.
No.
0
Baseplate I. D.
2
ON
No.
0
1
ON
OFF ON
ON OFF
OFF OFF
2
3
2
ON
DIN Rail
Baseplate
(P0914XA)
NOTE: For proper support, ends
of baseplate must overlap
braces, as shown.
Brace-Supported DIN Rail
Backplate or wall to
which DIN rail is attached
Backplate (or Wall) Supported DIN Rail
Figure 3-10. Required Support for Baseplate with Horizontal DIN Rail Mounting
60
B0400FA Rev D
To install a horizontally mounted DIN rail baseplate (P0914XA) or a vertically mounted baseplate (P0914XB) on a structurally supported DIN rail, proceed as follows:
1. Referring to Figure 3-11, using a 3/32 inch (2.4 mm) electricians flat-head (common)
screw driver, back off both clamping screws to within 3 to 4 threads of disengaging the
clamp. (An easy check for this is that the end of the screw will be fully inside the body
of the clamp.)
2. Confirm that both clamps are cocked at an angle (as shown in Figure 3-11). If a clamp
is not cocked, press lightly in the center of the clamp and release. The clamp should
spring back into the correct position.
3. Mount the baseplate onto the DIN rail by engaging both clamps. The hooks closest to
the field cabling side must engage first. (Throughout the process, firm positive pressure must be applied to the baseplate.) Confirm that the clamps have successfully
engaged by pulling up on the module side of the baseplate. If either corner lifts, one of
the clamps is not fully engaged. If this is the case, remove the baseplate by jiggling it
while gently pulling it away from the DIN rail, and then repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. While pressing the baseplate firmly against the DIN rail, continue the firm, positive
pressure and tighten both clamping screws securely.
4. With firm pressure applied to
baseplate, tighten clamp screws.*
1. Back off clamping screws

almost completely.*
2. Clamps must be cocked

at an angle, as shown.*
3. Mount baseplate onto DIN rail
by engaging both clamps.*
* See text for detailed procedure.

Figure 3-11. Mounting of Baseplate on DIN Rail
To remove a horizontally mounted baseplate from the DIN rail, proceed as follows:
1. Remove all modules (FBMs and FCMs) and cabling from the baseplate.
2. Loosen the two clamping screws, turning them ten turns counterclockwise.Float the
baseplate on the DIN rail and gently move it top-to-bottom while moving it toward
you, causing the clamps to disengage from the DIN rail.
61
B0400FA Rev D
DIN Rail Mounting of the Vertical Baseplate

As illustrated in Figure 3-12 mechanical support is required for vertical DIN rail mounting of the
baseplate. This support, required for all mounting configurations of the baseplates, can be in the
form of metal braces, a backplate, or a wall. The added support prevents unnecessary movement
or twisting motion of the DIN rail/baseplate combination.
Baseplate
(P0914XAB)
1
Baseplate
(P0914XB)
OFF
0
1
2
3
1
ON
OFF
Baseplate I. D.
No.
Baseplate I. D.
No.
2
ON
0
1
2
3
OFF ON
ON OFF
OFF OFF
1
ON
2
ON
OFF ON
ON OFF
OFF OFF
NOTE:
For proper support,
ends of baseplate
must overlap braces,
as shown.
DIN Rail
DIN Rail
Supporting Braces
(Part of Equipment Rack)
(DIN Rail Attached)
Brace-Supported DIN Rail
Backplate or wall to
which DIN rail is attached
Backplate (or Wall) Supported DIN Rail
Figure 3-12. Required Support for Baseplate with Vertical DIN Rail Mounting
To install a vertically mounted DIN rail baseplate (P0914XB) on a structurally supported DIN
rail, follow the procedure on page 61.
To remove the baseplate from the vertical DIN rail, proceed as follows:
1. Remove all modules (FBMs and FCMs) and cabling from the baseplate.
2. Loosen the lower baseplate set screw, turning it ten turns counterclockwise.
! CAUTION
If the baseplate set screws are loosened without physically supporting the baseplate,
the baseplate will slide down the DIN rail, causing possible damage to equipment.
Always support the baseplate with one hand while loosening the set screws.
3. With the baseplate supported, loosen the upper baseplate set screw, turning it ten
turns counterclockwise.
4. Float the baseplate on the DIN rail and gently move the baseplate side-to-side while
moving it toward you, causing the clamps to disengage from the DIN rail.
62
B0400FA Rev D
Installing the Horizontal Baseplate in a 19-Inch Rack

Before installing the horizontally mounted baseplate (P0914XA) in a standard, 483 mm (19-inch)
rack, mounting bracket kit P0930AS must be attached to the rear of the baseplate. Table 3-2 lists
the contents of this kit.
Table 3-2. P0914XA Baseplate Mounting Kit Contents
Part No.
P0930AY
X0127DF
X0143SC
X0173NC
X0143AX
X0143QY
X0173NB
Description
Mounting bracket (1-inch depth)
Screw, 0.190-32 x 0.5
Lock washer, 0.190
Nut clip
Flat washer, 0.250
Lock washer, 0.250
Screw, M6 x 15 mm
Qty.
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
Attach the mounting bracket and mount the baseplate in the 19-inch rack as shown in
Figure 3-13.
63
B0400FA Rev D
Screw (0.190-32 x 0.5 mm),

and Lock Washer (4 Places)
Clip Nut, 4 Places
(Shown in Place)
Screw (M6 x 15 mm),

Washer, and Lock
Washer (4 Places)
Mounting Bracket
(P0930AY)
Baseplate
(P0914XA)
Figure 3-13. Installation of Horizontal Baseplate into a 19-Inch Rack
Baseplate Power Supply Cabling

Each baseplate receives primary and (optionally) secondary power from the enclosure power supply(s). For the DIN rail mounted FBM subsystem enclosures (B03, B04, and B05) the enclosures
are shipped with the baseplates, power supplies, and baseplate power cabling in place. If the baseplate is mounted in a facility other than a DIN rail mounted FBM subsystem enclosure, Foxboro
power supplies are offered (Power Supply Mounting and Installation on page 51) for custom
installations.
Foxboro Power Supply FPS400-24

The following power supply cables are available for installing the Foxboro power supply
FPS400-24 (Table 3-3).
64
B0400FA Rev D
Table 3-3. FPS400-24 Power Supply to Baseplate Cables
Cable Type
Input
Input
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Cable Part Number
Cable Length
P0926CN
P0926CM
P0926CA
P0926CB
P0926CC
P0926CD
P0926CE
P0926CF
301 mm (12 in)

863 mm (34 in)
405 mm (16 in)
914 mm (36 in)
1.21 m (48 in)
1.52 m (60 in)
1.83 m (72 in)
2.13 m (84 in)
Each baseplate accepts one cable for primary power, and a second cable for secondary power, if
applicable. For ease of cable routing, select cables with a slightly greater length than the distance
between the baseplate and the power supply.
Cables for connecting the Foxboro power supply have a Mate N-Lock connector on each of the
cable for connection between the baseplate and the power supply.
Connect the Foxboro power supply output connector(s) as shown in Figure 3-14 and Table 3-3.
123
Output
Connectors
12
56
Input
Connector
Front View
Figure 3-14. Output Power Connector from FPS400-24 to Baseplate Connector
Table 3-4. FPS400-24 Input/Output Connectors
Pin
1
2
5
6
Input Connector
Function
Line (L1)
Neutral (L2)
Safety GND
Shield
Pin
1
2
3
Output Connector
Function
Positive 24 V dc Output
Negative 24 V dc Output
Shield
65
B0400FA Rev D
Proceed to Baseplate Power Cable Connections on page 67 to connect the output power cables
to the baseplate.
Lambda Power Supplies

The following power supply cables are available for installing Lambda power supplies (Table 3-5).
Table 3-5. Lambda Power Supplies to Baseplate Cables
Cable Part Number

P0916GW
P0916GX
P0916GY
P0916GZ
P0916GU
P0916GV
Cable Length
405 mm (16 in)
711 mm (28 in)
1.21 m (48 in)
1.52 m (60 in)
1.83 m (72 in)
2.13 m (84 in)
Cables for installing Lambda power supplies have a connector on one end for connection to the
baseplate, and three ring-type terminals at the other end for +, -, and ground connections at the
power supply.
between the baseplate and the power supply.
Make the cable connections at the Lambda power supplies as shown in Figure 3-15.
! WARNING
Do not touch the + and - terminals on the power supply simultaneously with any
metal object (such as a screwdriver, or wristwatch band). Accidental interconnection of the two terminals can cause significant injury.
NOTE
If, during an overload (or short circuit) condition, the current attempts to exceed
110% of the 40C rating, the output voltage will begin to decrease toward zero,
thereby limiting the current delivered to the load.
66
B0400FA Rev D
Bolt
+
Terminal
Ring Terminal
Cable
Lock Washer
Nut
Ground
Black Bus Bar
(See Note)
Red
Baseplate
Power Supply
Power Cable
Terminal
Terminal
Blue
(+ or -)
Lambda 250 W Power Supply
(P0904HX)
To Baseplate
Notes:
1. The ground bus bar must be isolated from
enclosure metal and connected to a
dedicated quiet earth. In applications
where it is known that the ac power
system ground is not noisy, the ground
bus bar may be tied to the ac power
safety ground.
2. Multiple cables (from the baseplates)
will have to be stacked on the
terminals.
Terminal
Black
Ground
Bus Bar
(See Note)
Blue
+
Terminal
Red
Baseplate
Power Cable
Lambda 500 W Power Supply

(P0904HV or P0904HW)
To Baseplate
Figure 3-15. Baseplate Power Cable Connections to Lambda 250 W and 500 W Power Supplies
Proceed to Baseplate Power Cable Connections on page 67 to connect the power cables to the
baseplate.
Baseplate Power Cable Connections

between the baseplate and the power supply. Make the connections at the baseplate as shown
Figure 3-16
67
B0400FA Rev D
Primary Power
(from Primary
Power Supply)
Secondary Power
(from Secondary
Power Supply)
OFF
Baseplate I. D.
No.
0
1
2
3
2
1
ON ON
OFF ON
ON OFF
OFF OFF
Figure 3-16. Power Supply Cable Connections at the Baseplate
Baseplate ID Switch Setting

Each baseplate contains a two-switch (four-position) DIP switch, which must be set for proper
subsystem operation. The ID of each baseplate must be a number from 0 to 3, which is set by
means of the two switches (see Figure 3-17).
The particular sequence of the baseplate ID numbers does not matter. The baseplates can be
numbered according to their physical placement in the enclosure(s), or according to their positions in the cable connection scheme. However, no two baseplates in the grouping (on the same
FCM or FCM pair) may be assigned the same ID number.
OFF
OFF
Baseplate I. D.
Baseplate I. D.
No.
0
1
2
3
1
ON
No.
0
1
2
3
2
1
ON ON
OFF ON
ON OFF
OFF OFF
ON
OFF ON
ON OFF
OFF OFF
Figure 3-17. Baseplate ID Switches
Set the baseplate ID switches as indicated in Table 3-6. Pressing the upper part of the rocker
switch places the switch in the ON (or CLOSED) state; pressing the lower part of the rocker
switch places it in the OFF (or OPEN) state. (The factory default setting is OFF-OFF, or ID
number 3.)
68
B0400FA Rev D
Table 3-6. Setting the Baseplate ID Switches
Baseplate
ID Number
0
1
2
3
Switch 11
ON (up)
OFF (down)
ON (up)
OFF (down)
1.
Switch 21
ON (up)
ON (up)
OFF (down)
OFF (down)
The actual designator printed on the switch may be

OPEN instead of OFF.
Module Installation
Fieldbus Modules (FBMs) and Fieldbus Communications Modules (FCMs) are installed as
shown in Figure 3-18. The following subsections present rules regarding placement of the FBMs
and FCMs on the baseplate. To install any module:
1. Press the module in place on the baseplate (engaging the two connectors at the rear of
the module with those on the baseplate).
2. Tighten the two self retaining hex screws on the module using a hex driver tool
(Foxboro part number X0179AZ).
! CAUTION
1. When installing the modules on the baseplate, use a 5/32 hex driver tool
(Foxboro P/N X0179AZ). If another type of tool must be used, make sure that it
does not generate more than 12 inch/pounds of torque, or you might strip the
threaded inserts out of the baseplate.
2. The modules must be screwed in place for secure operation. Do not rely on the signal connectors to hold the modules in place.
3. For safety reasons, always consider the possible impact on plant operations before
removing a module from the baseplate.
Modules can be removed/replaced while power is applied to the baseplate without damaging the
module or baseplate electronics.
69
B0400FA Rev D
Fieldbus Communications
Modules (FCM10E
or FCM10Ef)
Shown in Place
Self-Retaining
Hex Screw
(1 of 2)
Operational Status
1
2
3
Fieldbus
Tx
Rx
Fieldbus
Tx
Rx
Ethernet
Tx
Rx
Ethernet
Tx
Rx
FCM10E
OFF
FCM10E
2
ON ON
OFF ON
ON OFF
Communication
2 Mbps Fieldbus
P0914YM
Communication
2 Mbps Fieldbus
P0914YM
OFF OFF
Baseplate I. D.
No.
0
Operational Status
FCM Identification
Left Module
P0914ZM
User Defined
Right Module
FCM
Identification
Assembly
al Status
Operation
Letterbug Set Sockets
Baseplate I. D.
No.
0
1
ON
2
ON
1
2
3
OFF ON
ON OFF
OFF OFF
Baseplate
ID Switches
201
FBneMl Iso
lated
Fieldbus
Module (FBM)
Chan 0-20mA
8 input,
Q
P0914S
ABC
D0
Letterbug Set
Figure 3-18. Baseplate Module and Letterbug Installation
FBM Installation (Placement)

Non-redundant (single) FBMs may be placed in any available position on the baseplate. On the
horizontal baseplate, install redundant FBMs in adjacent odd/even paired positions working from
right to left (positions 7 and 8, 5 and 6, 3 and 4, and 1 and 2). On the vertical baseplate, redundant FBMs may be placed in any adjacent odd/even paired positions.
FCM10E or FCM10Ef Installation (Placement)

These modules are used only on the first baseplate (in a group of up to four). On the horizontal
baseplate, the modules are placed in positions 7 and 8; on the vertical baseplate, the modules are
placed in the first two positions (1 and 2). If a single (non-redundant) FCM10E or FCM10Ef
module is to be installed, it must be installed in position 7 on the horizontal baseplate, or position
1 on the vertical baseplate. [The slot next to it (to the right of it) must remain empty.]
NOTE
Where a redundant Ethernet trunk Fieldbus is used, the FCM10E or FCM10Ef

module pair, at any given time, communicates on one bus only (bus A or B). The
odd slot corresponds to bus A, and the even slot to bus B.
70
B0400FA Rev D
FCM2F2/4/10 Installation (Placement)

Install redundant FCM2F2/4/10 modules in the first two positions (1 and 2) and/or the last two
positions (7 and 8) on the baseplate. In a nonredundant configuration, use the odd-numbered
positions (1 and/or 7) only. If a single (nonredundant) FCM2F2/4/10 module is installed, the
slot next to it (position 2 and/or position 8) may be used for FBM installation.
NOTE
Where a redundant module Fieldbus is used, the FCM2F2/4/10 module pair, at

any given time, communicates on one bus only (bus A or B). The odd slot corresponds to bus A, and the even slot to bus B.
FCM Identification Assembly Installation

The FCM identification assembly contains sockets for letterbug sets, which provide system
addressing for the FCM(s) (FCM10E or FCM10Ef ). [Letterbugs for the FBMs are derived from
characters in these (FCM) letterbug sets.] Two FCM identification assembly types (similar in
function) are available: P0914ZM for use on the horizontal baseplate and P0914ZX for use on
the vertical baseplate. Place the FCM identification assembly on the I/O connectors adjacent to
the associated FCM10E or FCM10Ef module(s).
To install the FCM identification assembly simply insert it onto the two I/O connectors below
the FCM(s), as shown in Figure 3-18. Secure the assembly in place by tightening the two common retaining screws.
Letterbug Set Installation

Assemble and install the letterbug set for each FCM10E or FCM10Ef module as shown in
Figure 3-18. To determine the letterbug characters for the FCM10E or FCM10Ef (and the associated FBMs) refer to Module Addressing, below.
Module Addressing
Baseplate-mounted modules (FBMs and FCMs)1 are identified to the system software by means
of a unique, 6-character string called a letterbug. The letterbug string for a particular FBM or
FCM is established from three factors:
Setting of physical letterbug set(s) for the FCM(s)1 on the first baseplate (in a group of
up to four baseplates).
The number of the baseplate (0 - 3) in the group of up to four, as set by means of the
pair of baseplate ID switches on each baseplate (see Figure 3-18).
The physical position (1 - 8) of the module on the baseplate.
1.
The one exception is the FCM2F2/4/10, which has no letterbug set associated with it.
71
B0400FA Rev D
Figure 3-19 shows examples of how FBMs and FCMs assume unique letterbug addresses in accordance with these three factors. As shown in this figure, physical letterbug sets are user-installed for
the FCMs (up to two) on the first baseplate of the grouping. The first four characters in these letterbug sets are user-assigned, and are unique for each baseplate grouping. (These first four characters apply to all modules in the baseplate grouping.) The fifth character reflects the setting of the
baseplate ID switches (always zero for the first baseplate), and the sixth character is always zero.
NOTE
1. In the letterbug set associated with the FCM10E or FCM10Ef module(s), the
last two characters must be 00 (zero, zero).
2. Both letterbug sets for a redundant FCM pair must be identical.
The letterbugs for all the other modules (FBMs) mounted in the baseplate grouping are not physically installed, but are derived (and reported to system software) from the three factors mentioned previously. Accordingly, each FBM in the baseplate grouping has the same unique first
four characters (user-assigned for the FCMs); each has a fifth character derived from the baseplate
number (0 - 3); and each has a sixth character derived from the physical position (1 - 8) of the
module on the baseplate.
Thus, as illustrated on the left side of Figure 3-19, if the FCM letterbug characters set by the user
are NFFA00; the letterbug for the FBM in position 2 on the first baseplate (baseplate ID = 0) is
NFFA02; and letterbug for the FBM in position 3 of the second baseplate (baseplate ID = 1) is
NFFA13.
For the next grouping of baseplates (on the right in Figure 3-19), the letterbug assignments are
similar, but with different user-assigned first four characters.
72
B0400FA Rev D
To Next Equipment
Grouping (If Applicable)
Redundant 10Base2 Ethernet Trunk Fieldbus (See Notes)

From Control
Processor 60
A
B
Baseplate
I.D. (Behind
First FBM)
Set To 0
F
B
M
Example:
Letterbug =
NFFA02
F
B
M
F
B
M
F
B
M
F
B
M
F
B
M
F
C
M
F
C
M
FCM Identifier
N F F A 0 0
See Notes
below
N F F A 0 0
Physical Letterbug Sets (2)
Baseplate
I.D. (Behind
First FBM)
Set To 1
F
B
M
F
B
M
F
B
M
F
B
M
F
B
M
F
B
M
F
B
M
F
B
M
Example:
Letterbug =
NFFA13
Baseplate
I.D. (Behind
First FBM)
Set To 0
Example:
Letterbug =
BMLR02
See Notes
below
Baseplate
I.D. (Behind
First FBM)
Set To 1
F
B
M
F
B
M
F
B
M
F
B
M
F
B
M
F
B
M
F
C
M
F
C
M
FCM Identifier
B M L R 0 0
B M L R 0 0
Physical Letterbug Sets (2)
F
B
M
F
B
M
F
B
M
F
B
M
F
B
M
F
B
M
F
B
M
F
B
M
Example:
Letterbug =
BMLR13
To Next Baseplate (Up To 4, Total)
To Next Baseplate (Up To 4, Total)
Baseplate Group 1
Baseplate Group 2
NOTES:
1. The letterbug assignment convention is the same regardless of network (Ethernet trunk Fieldbus)
topology, or baseplate interconnection (module Fieldbus) topology.
2. The topologies shown are coaxial only (non-fiber optic cabling). For examples of fiber optic
network topologies, refer to PSS 21H-2W1 B3.
Figure 3-19. Examples of Baseplate Letterbug Assignments
Redundant Adapter Installation

The redundant adapter provides a redundant I/O connection to a single termination assembly
(TA). Contained in the adapter are the input sense resistors and output diodes required for operation of redundant FBM modules (FBM205, FBM237 and FBM246) with the TA. The redundant adapter is position dependent (use positions 1 and 2, 3 and 4, 5 and 6, or 7 and 8), since its
connectors must engage the corresponding pairs of connectors on the baseplate, adjacent to the
redundant FBM pair.
NOTE
As indicated previously, on the horizontal baseplate, redundant FBMs (and thus the
redundant adapter) are placed in adjacent odd/even paired positions working from
right to left on the baseplate.
Figure 3-20 shows installation of a redundant adapter for FBM205. The redundant adapter for
the FBM237and FBM246 is similar in construction.
73
B0400FA Rev D
Operational Status
Operational Status
Operational Status
Fieldbus
Tx
Rx
Fieldbus
Tx
Rx
Ethernet
Tx
Rx
Ethernet
Tx
Rx
OFF
Baseplate I. D.
No.
0
Operational Status
ON
1
2
ON
OFF ON
ON OFF
OFF OFF
FBM205
FBM205
FCM10E

4 Input, 0-20mA
4 Output, 0-20mA
P0914XG

4 Input, 0-20mA
4 Output, 0-20mA
P0914XG
Communication
2 Mbps Fieldbus
P0914YM
Communication
2 Mbps Fieldbus
P0914YM
FCM10E
FCM Identification
Left Module
P0914ZM
1 05 2
106 2
Input (P)
Input (P)
2 07 1
FBM205
Redundant Adapter
User Defined
2 08 1
NOTE:
Shown is installation of the redundant
adapter (P0916NN) for the redundant
FBM205. Installation of the redundant
adapter (P0916QD) for the redundant
FBM237 and (P0917VU) for the
redundant FBM246 is similar.
Right Module
Redundant
Adapter
Input (-)
P0930BM
05 06 07 08
Figure 3-20. Redundant Adapter Installation (Typical)
If the FBM205 is used (single module or redundant pair), attach the redundant adapter,
P0916NN, onto the two I/O connectors adjacent to the FBM205s on the baseplate. For a redundant pair of FBM237s, attach the redundant adapter, P0916QD, onto the two I/O connectors
adjacent to the FBM237s on the baseplate. [The redundant adapter is not used with a single
(nonredundant) FBM237.] For a redundant pair of FBM246s, attach the redundant adapter,
P0917VU, onto the two I/O connectors adjacent to the FBM246s on the baseplate.
Termination Assembly Installation

Install the termination assemblies (TAs) by snapping them onto the DIN rail, as shown in
Figure 3-21.
To fix the TAs in place (and prevent them from sliding downward) it is recommended that an
end bracket be installed just below the bottommost TA.
To remove a TA, pry out each plastic DIN connector with a straight-slot screwdriver while lifting
the TA from the DIN rail (see Figure 3-21).
For information on TA loading in the enclosures, refer to Enclosure Installation on page 29. For
detailed descriptive information on the TAs and how they are used, refer to Field Signal Connections on page 91.
To connect TAs to the field I/O wiring, refer to Chapter 5 Field Signal Connections.
74
B0400FA Rev D
Attaching a Termination
Assembly to a DIN Rail
Termination
Assembly
DIN
Rail
DIN Rail
DIN
Rail
Termination
Assembly
Removing a Termination
Assembly from a DIN Rail
DIN
Rail
Termination
Assembly
DIN
Rail
Termination
Assembly
Termination
Assembly
DIN
Rail
Figure 3-21. Installing or Removing Termination Assemblies (TAs)
75
B0400FA Rev D
76
4. Equipment Signal Cabling

This chapter describes the subsystem signal cable connections, both at the Ethernet trunk
Fieldbus level and at the module Fieldbus (baseplate) level.
Ethernet Trunk Fieldbus Cable Connections

Ethernet trunk Fieldbus cabling configurations are shown in the following figures:
Figure 1-7. Typical Direct Network Configuration
Figure 1-8. Typical Active Star Network Configuration.
Both of these configurations involve the use of two types of customer-supplied cabling:
Ethernet (10Base2) and fiber optic. For the 10Base2 cabling, RG-58 (ThinNet) cable is used.
The equipment listed in Table 4-1 is offered for use in making the Ethernet and fiber optic cable
connections. Whether these items are shipped to your location depends on the Ethernet trunk
Fieldbus cabling configuration specified at the time of system purchase.
NOTE
The DIN rail mounted FBM subsystem was designed and tested for operation with
the Ethernet/fiber optic equipment listed Table 4-1. The subsystem may operate
with similar, off-the-shelf equipment, but Invensys Systems, Inc. is not responsible
for any system malfunctions that may occur if such equipment is used.
For reference purposes, specifications for the Ethernet/fiber optic equipment listed
here are presented in Appendix B Ethernet/Fiber Optic Equipment
Specifications.
Table 4-1. Ethernet and Fiber Optic Connection Equipment
Part Number
P0916JM
P0916JN
P0916JP
Part Description
Multiport Fiber Optic Converter (Hub) Provides six fiber ports using ST
bayonet type connectors (used in active star network only). The front panel has
a slot for installation of the P0916JN 10Base2 Coaxial Transceiver Module (see
next entry) to add a ThinNet 10Base2 port. The converter (hub) includes an
expansion connector to stack multiple converters. Uses 110 or 220-240 V ac.
10Base2 Coaxial Transceiver Module For use in P0916JM converter (above)
to
add a ThinNet 10Base2 port. Also requires BNC T-connector (P0912ZV) and
terminator (P0912SY).
BNC to Fiber-ST Media Converter 10 Mbps Ethernet transceiver for
conversion from a ThinNet Ethernet segment to a fiber optic segment. Includes
an external 95-125 V ac 60 Hz power supply. Note: for 220-240 V ac
operation,
order separate power supply, P0916TZ (see below).
77
B0400FA Rev D
Table 4-1. Ethernet and Fiber Optic Connection Equipment (Continued)
Part Number
P0916TZ
P0912SY
P0912ZV
Part Description
External 220-240 V ac power supply for use with BNC to Fiber-ST Media
Converter (P0916JP).
50 ohm terminator For FCM10E modules (if applicable) and for 10Base2
Coaxial Transceiver Module.
T-connector For use with 10Base2 Coaxial Transceiver Module.
FCM10E modules are shipped equipped with T-connectors for making the BNC cable
connections.
The ThinNet (RG-58) cabling and associated BNC connectors used in making the Ethernet
cable connections are not Foxboro part numbered, but are readily attainable from your local cable
supplier.
For the fiber optic cabling specifications, refer to Fiber Optic Cable Specifications on page 88.
Point-to-point connections require four fiber optic cables for redundancy, two for transmitting
and two for receiving connectors. For this reason it is recommended that you purchase duplex
cabling, which consists of two fibers intertwined in a single cable. The cables must be terminated
with ST-type connectors, and the maximum allowable cable length for any fiber optic point-topoint connection is 2 km.
Other fiber optic cable requirements, such as flexibility or durability, depend on the particular
application. Check with your cable vendor/installer for a listing of application-specific cable characteristics.
NOTE
For maximum allowable lengths for cables running between Ethernet trunk Fieldbus equipment, refer to Product Sizing Constraints on page 26.
Both types of cabling (RG-58 coaxial and fiber optic) are normally accomplished by cable specialists. Therefore, associated cable fabrication and termination are beyond the scope of this document. However, the following subsections provide specific cable connection information.
Ethernet Trunk Fieldbus Connections at the I/A Series Control

Station
NOTE
The use of surge protectors (Citel CXD Station Protector or equivalent) is recommended at the I/A Series control station if the Ethernet Trunk Fieldbus cable run is
subject to lightning strikes.
The control station connects to two lengths of RG-58 (10Base2) cabling (for redundancy), one
for bus A cable, and one for bus B cable of the Ethernet trunk Fieldbus. For general information on how the connections are made, refer to Figure 1-7, and Figure 1-8 on. For specific information on making Ethernet trunk Fieldbus connections at the I/A Series control station, refer to
the installation document for the control station in question [for example, Control Processor 60
Installation and Maintenance (B0400FB)].
78
B0400FA Rev D
Fiber Optic Extension of Ethernet Trunk Fieldbus

The length of the Ethernet trunk Fieldbus can be extended by adding a segment of fiber optic
cabling to bus A and bus B of the Ethernet trunk Fieldbus. The conversion (RG-58 to fiber
optic and vice versa) for each redundant channel is performed by two BNC to Fiber-ST Media
Converters (see Table 4-1).
Proceed as follows to connect a fiber optic extension to each redundant length of RG-58
coaxial (10Base2) cabling from the control station:
1. Assemble the media converter mounting bracket (P0917PB) for each BNC to
Fiber-ST Media Converter to be used (see Figure 4-1).
M4 Pan Head
Machine Screw
(X0173LJ)
Lock Washer
(X0143SB)
Bracket
(P0902JR)
Spring Clip
(X0175GD)
(1 of 2)
Figure 4-1. Assembling the Media Converter Mounting Bracket
2. Attach a mounting bracket assembly to each BNC to Fiber-ST Media Converter by

inserting the BNC connector into one of the holes in the bracket and securing it in
place with the associated BNC connector nut.
3. Attach two BNC to Fiber-ST Media Converters (with bracket assemblies) to a standard DIN rail (see Figure 4-2) at either end of the planned fiber optic extension (four
converters total for a redundant configuration).
4. Attach the power supply cable to each media converter as shown in Figure 4-2, and
plug the power supply into a nearby electrical outlet.
5. Attach the RG-58 coaxial cabling (for bus A and bus B) from the control station
to the BNC connectors on the two closest media converters, as shown in Figure 4-2.
Take note of (and mark on the cables) which cables are designated bus A and bus
B.
6. Connect the fiber optic cables between the media converters, as shown in Figure 4-2.
79
B0400FA Rev D
NOTE
For fiber optic cabling specifications, refer to Fiber Optic Cable Specifications on
page 88.
! CAUTION
Each fiber optic cable must be connected such that one end connects to the TX
connector on one media converter, and the other end to the RX connector on the
other media converter. Data cannot be transferred if both ends of the fiber optic
cables are connected to the same types of connectors (both RX or both TX).
Attach RG-58 cabling

(to Fieldbus devices) here.
Attach RG-58 cabling (to

Control Processor 60) here.
From Power Supply
DIN Rail
Fiber Optic
Cabling
1AMP
TX
RX
TX
12 VDC
1AMP
12 VDC
RX
BNC to Fiber-ST
Media Converter
BNC to Fiber-ST
Media Converter
From Power Supply

DIN Rail
50 Ohm Terminator (P0912SY)
T-Connector (P0912ZV)
50 Ohm Terminator (P0912SY)

T-Connector (P0912ZV)
Figure 4-2. RG-58 (Coaxial) to Fiber Optic Cabling Connections via Media Converters
7. Connect the RG-58 Ethernet trunk Fieldbus cabling from the second pair of BNC to
Fiber-ST Media Converters to either of the following:
Direct Network Configuration Connect the media converters to the FCM10E
on the first baseplate (in a group of up to four), as described under Ethernet
Trunk Fieldbus Connections at the FCM10E on page 81.
Active Star Network Configuration Connect the media converters to the multiport fiber optic converter (hub), as described under Active Star Network Connections on page 81.
80
B0400FA Rev D
Ethernet Trunk Fieldbus Connections at the FCM10E

NOTE
This section is relevant only to the direct network configuration (shown in

Figure 1-7). Skip this section if you are employing the active star network configuration (shown in Figure 1-8).
Connect the coaxial Ethernet trunk Fieldbus (bus A and bus B) to the FCM10E modules of
the first baseplate (in a group of up to four), as shown in Figure 4-3.
Ethernet Trunk Fieldbus (Redundant)
(RG-58)
B
From
Control
Station
Operational Status
Operational Status
Fieldbus
Tx
Rx
Fieldbus
Tx
Rx
Ethernet
Tx
Rx
Ethernet
Tx
Rx
FCM10E
(Redundant Pair)
To Next
Fieldbus
Compatible
Device
*
FCM10E
FCM10E
Communication
2 Mbps Fieldbus
P0914YM
Communication
2 Mbps Fieldbus
P0914YM
*
* Foxboro recommends the use of surge protectors (Citel Station Protector or equivalent)
at these points if the Ethernet Trunk Fieldbus cable run is subject to switch gear or
lightening induced surges.
** If the FCM10Es are the last devices on the Fieldbus, use 50 ohm terminators (P0912SY)
in place of cables A and B.
Figure 4-3. Coaxial Ethernet Trunk Fieldbus Connections at the FCM10E
The Ethernet connections are now complete from the control station to the baseplate for the
direct network configuration. Proceed to Signal Cable Connections Baseplate Level on
page 84 to make connections between the baseplates.
Active Star Network Connections

NOTE
1. This section is relevant only to the active star network configuration (shown in
Figure 1-8); it does not pertain to the direct network configuration.
2. For fiber optic cabling specifications, refer to Fiber Optic Cable Specifications on
page 88.
Proceed as follows to finish making connections from the control station to the redundant multiport fiber optic converter(s) [hub(s)], and then to the baseplates via the FCM10Ef modules.
81
B0400FA Rev D
Connections from the Media Converters to the Multiport Fiber Optic

Converters
The redundant active star network configuration requires redundant multiport fiber optic converters (hubs) to link the Ethernet trunk Fieldbus to multiple baseplates (multiple FCM10Ef
modules). [This differs from the method used in the direct network configuration, in which the
baseplates (with FCM10E modules) connect directly to the Ethernet trunk Fieldbus via cable
drops.] Fiber optic cabling from the hubs to the FCM10Ef modules can be up to 2 kilometers in
length.
In the redundant active star network configuration, the two multiport fiber optic converters must
be designated (and labeled) as Hub A and Hub B, in accordance with which channels they
support (bus A and bus B of the Ethernet trunk Fieldbus).
Each multiport fiber optic converter is shipped with an AUI transceiver module, which you must
replace with the 10Base2 Coaxial Transceiver Module (P0916JN).
The following procedure describes how to replace the AUI transceiver module with a 10Base2
Coaxial Transceiver Module, and how to make the RG-58 Ethernet trunk Fieldbus cable connections from the redundant BNC to Fiber-ST Media Converters to the redundant multiport fiber
optic converters.
1. Unscrew the AUI transceiver module from the hub.
2. Detach the module casing from the AUI connector.
3. Plug the rear of the 10Base2 Coaxial Transceiver Module to the AUI connector, as
4. Secure the AUI connector to the 10Base2 Coaxial Transceiver Module with the 4-40
pan-head screws (included), as shown in Figure 4-4.
Transceiver Module Port in Hub
AUI Connector
Attach AUI
connector to
transceiver module
using pan-head
screws here.
Secure transceiver
module to port
in the hub using
these captive screws.
10Base2 Transceiver Module
Figure 4-4. Replacing Transceiver Module in Multiport Fiber Optic Converter (Hub)
5. Slide the 10Base2 Transceiver Module into the transceiver module port on the hub,
and secure it by tightening its captive screws, as shown in Figure 4-4.
6. Attach the BNC T-connector and terminator to the transceiver modules 10Base2
(BNC) port, as shown in Figure 4-5.
82
B0400FA Rev D
7. Attach the RG-58 Ethernet trunk Fieldbus cabling from bus A to the T-connector
on hub A, as shown in Figure 4-5.
Repeat this step, attaching the bus B cabling to hub B.
50 Ohm Terminator
(P0912SY)*
T-Connector
(P0912ZV)
Multiport Fiber Optic Converter (Hub)

Power
1
TXRX
TXRX
TXRX
TXRX
TXRX
TXRX
Transmit (TX) and Receive (RX) Ports

(Attach fiber optic cables here.)
RS-232
Port
Status Power
10Base2
Transceiver Module Port
Power
10Base2
Connector
Transceiver
Module
Attach RG-58 Ethernet trunk
Fieldbus cabling here.**
* The 50 ohm terminator is required only if this is last device in the Fieldbus chain.
** The use of a surge protector (Citel CXD Station Protector or equivalent) is recommended
at this point if the Ethernet Trunk Fieldbus cable run is subject to lightning strikes.
Figure 4-5. Ethernet Trunk Fieldbus Cabling to Multiport Fiber Optic Converter (Hub)
8. Attach the power cable from the power connector on each hub to a plug provided by
the power distribution unit in the enclosure.
9. For each baseplate which must connect to a hub, attach two fiber optic cables to the
receive (RX) and transmit (TX) ports on the front of both hub A and hub B, as
Cabling connections to each hub must be at identical channels (that is, if you attached
fiber optic cables to channel 3 on hub A, you must attach fiber optic cables for the
same baseplate to channel 3 on hub B).
10. Run the cables to their associated baseplates.
You have completed the cable connections to the redundant multiport fiber optic converters
(hubs). Proceed to the following subsection to connect the fiber optic cables to the FCM10Ef
modules.
Connections from the Hub to the FCM10Ef Modules

Connect each pair of fiber optic cables [receive (RX) and transmit (TX)] from the ports on each
hub in the redundant pair to the FCM10Ef modules, as shown in Figure 4-6. Fiber optic cabling
from the hubs to the FCM10Ef modules must not exceed 2 kilometers in length.
! CAUTION
For each fiber optic cable, must one end must attach to the TX connector on the
hub, and the other end to the RX connector on its corresponding FCM10Ef. Data
cannot be transferred if both ends of the fiber optic cables are connected to RX or
TX connectors.
83
B0400FA Rev D
Connections from the control station to the FCM10Ef modules (for the active star network
configuration) are complete. Proceed to the next section to make cable connections between the
baseplates.
From RX From TX
(Hub A) (Hub A)
From TX
(Hub B)
Rx
Rx
Tx
Tx
From RX
(Hub B)
FCM10Ef
(Redundant Pair)
Figure 4-6. Fiber Optic Ethernet Trunk Fieldbus Connections at the FCM10Ef
Signal Cable Connections Baseplate Level

This subsection provides information on the module Fieldbus connections between baseplates.
Depending on the specific configuration in question, these connections can be made using
shielded twisted-pair cable, fiber optic cable, or a combination of both.
Shielded Twisted-Pair Cable Connections

NOTE
When FBM220/221 modules are used in a multiple baseplate configuration, clampon ferrite cores (EMI filters) must be used on the twisted-pair cables. Refer to
FOUNDATION fieldbus H1 Communication Interface Modules (FBM220/FBM221)
Users Guide (B0400FD).
Figure 4-7 shows baseplate implementation using shielded twisted-pair cable connections. (This
cabling configuration corresponds to the baseplate implementation configuration in Figure 1-4.)
Using this configuration, the baseplates can be interconnected using up to 60 m (198 ft) total of
shielded-twisted pair cable. Shielded twisted-pair cables are available in the lengths shown in
Table 4-2.
84
B0400FA Rev D
Table 4-2. Shielded Twisted-Pair Cables
Part Number
P0916ND
P0916MZ
P0916NC
P0916NB
P0916NA
P0916UH
P0916UJ
P0916UK
Length
0.25 m (10 in)
1 m (3.3 ft)
3 m (9.9 ft)
5 m (16.5 ft)
10 m (33 ft)
20 m (66 ft)
30 m (99 ft)
60 m (198 ft)
Make the cable connections as shown in Figure 4-7. Because the two module Fieldbus cable connectors on the baseplate are parallel-wired internal to the baseplate, either connector may be used
for the baseplate-to-baseplate cable connections. Also, as shown in Figure 4-7, terminators
(P0916RB) must be used at all module Fieldbus connectors that are not used for actual connection of the module Fieldbus cables.
FCM10E(s) or FCM10Ef(s) (Pair)
Module Fieldbus
(Shielded Twisted-pair Cable)
Baseplate (1 of 4)
Terminator
(P0916RB)
Operational Status
FBM201
0
P0914SQ
1
2
3
ON ON
OFF ON
ON OFF
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
Tx
Rx
Fieldbus
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Ethernet
Tx
Rx
Communication
2 Mbps Fieldbus
P0914YM
0
1
2
3
ON ON
OFF ON
ON OFF
Operational Status
FBM203
Channel Isolated Baseplate I. D.

8 Input, RTD (Pt/Ni/Cu)
No.
2
1
P0914SV
Operational Status
FBM203
FCM10E
Communication
2 Mbps Fieldbus
P0914YM
Operational Status
Operational Status
Fieldbus
Ethernet
FCM10E
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
Operational Status
FBM201
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
OFF OFF
Operational Status
Operational Status
FBM201
2
Operational Status
FBM203
Channel Isolated
FBM203
Channel Isolated
P0914SV
Operational Status
FBM203
Channel Isolated
P0914SV
Operational Status
FBM203
Channel Isolated
P0914SV
Operational Status
FBM203
Channel Isolated
P0914SV
Operational Status
FBM203
Channel Isolated
P0914SV
OFF OFF
Operational Status
Channel Isolated
P0914SV
P0914SV
FCM Identification
Left Module
P0914ZM
Right Module
User Defined
Terminator
(P0916RB)
Operational Status
FBM202
0
1
2
3
ON
OFF ON
ON OFF
OFF OFF
ON
Operational Status
FBM202
8 Input, Thermocouple/mV
No.
2
1
P0914ST
Operational Status
FBM202
Channel Isolated
1
2
3
OFF ON
ON OFF
OFF OFF
Operational Status
FBM204
4 Input, 0-20mANo.
2
4 Output, 0-20mA 1
0
ON ON
P0914SY
P0914ST
Operational Status
FBM204
Channel Isolated
P0914ST
Operational Status
FBM202
Channel Isolated
P0914ST
Operational Status
FBM202
Channel Isolated
P0914ST
Operational Status
FBM202
Channel Isolated
P0914ST
Operational Status
Operational Status
FBM204
Channel Isolated
4 Input, 0-20mA
4 Output, 0-20mA
P0914SY
FBM204
Channel Isolated
4 Input, 0-20mA
4 Output, 0-20mA
P0914SY
Channel Isolated
4 Input, 0-20mA
4 Output, 0-20mA
P0914SY
NOTES:
1. Maximum Baseplate quantity is four, per cable drop.
2. Maximum total cable run of all Module Fieldus cables is 60 m (198 ft).
Figure 4-7. Baseplate Interconnections (Example) Using Shielded Twisted-Pair Cabling
85
B0400FA Rev D
Combined Shielded Twisted-Pair and Fiber Optic Cabling Connections

NOTE
1. For fiber optic cabling specifications, refer to Fiber Optic Cable Specifications
on page 88.
2. The FCM2F10 requires single-mode fiber cable.
3. When FBM220/221 modules are used in a multiple baseplate configuration,
clamp-on ferrite cores (EMI filters) must be used on the twisted-pair cables. Refer
to FOUNDATION fieldbus H1 Communication Interface Modules (FBM220/FBM221)
Users Guide (B0400FD).
Figure 4-8 shows baseplate implementation using combined shielded twisted-pair and fiber optic
cabling. (This cabling configuration corresponds to the baseplate implementation configuration
in Figure 1-5.) With this configuration, any two baseplates can be separated up to 10 km (6.2 mi)
using fiber optic cable. (Note, however, that overall maximum cable length constraints for the
subsystem must be observed, as described under Product Sizing Constraints on page 26.)
Three versions of the FCM2F provide three different fiber optic cabling distances:
FCM2F2 = 2 km (1.24 mi); FCM2F4 = 4 km (2.48 mi); FCM2F10 = 10 km (6.2 mi).
Make the cable connections as shown in Figure 4-8. The shielded twisted-pair cables are available
in lengths from 0.25 m to 60 m. (Refer to Shielded Twisted-Pair Cable Connections on page 84
for specific lengths.). Because the two module Fieldbus cable connectors on the baseplate are parallel-wired internal to the baseplate, either connector may be used for the baseplate-to-baseplate
cable connections. Also, as shown in Figure 4-8, terminators (P0916RB) must be used at all module Fieldbus connectors that are not used for actual connection of the module Fieldbus cables.
For the fiber optic cabling, required cable characteristics are described on page 78.
86
B0400FA Rev D
FCM10E(s)
or FCM10Ef(s)
(Pair)
Baseplate (1 of 4)
Terminator
(1 of 4)
(P0916RB)
Module Fieldbus
(Shielded Twisted-pair Cable)
Operational Status
Operational Status
Operational Status
Operational Status
Operational Status
Operational Status
Fieldbus
Ethernet
Operational Status
Rx
Tx
Fieldbus
Rx
Ethernet
Tx
Tx
Fieldbus
Tx
Rx
Fieldbus
Tx
Rx
Fiber
Tx
Rx
Fiber
Tx
Rx
P0914SQ
0
1
ON
ON OFF
OFF OFF
FBM201
FBM201
FBM201
FBM201
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
FCM10E
Operational Status
Operational Status
Rx
Rx
Tx
FCM2F2
FCM10E
Communication
2 Mbps Fieldbus
P0914YM
ON
OFF ON
Operational Status
Rx
Tx
FBM201
Operational Status
Operational Status
Operational Status
Tx
Rx
2
Operational Status
Communication
2 Mbps Fieldbus
P0914YM
Communication (up
to 2km)
Baseplate I. D.
2 Mbps Fiber Optic
No.
1
2
Fieldbus Extender
0
ON ON
P0914YZ
1
2
3
FBM203
FCM2F2
2 Mbps Fiber Optic
Fieldbus Extender
P0914YZ
OFF ON
ON OFF
OFF OFF
FBM203
Channel Isolated
FBM203
Channel Isolated
P0914SV
FBM203
Channel Isolated
P0914SV
Channel Isolated
P0914SV
P0914SV
FCM Identification
Left Module
P0914ZM
Right Module
User Defined
FCM2F(s) (Pair)
Module Fieldbus
(Fiber Optic Cable Pair)
Operational Status
Operational Status
Operational Status
Operational Status
Operational Status
Tx
Rx
Fieldbus
Tx
Rx
Fiber
Tx
Rx
Fiber
Tx
Rx
Rx
FBM204
FBM202
FBM202
FCM2F2
FCM2F2
Channel Isolated
Channel Isolated
P0914ST
P0914ST
P0914ST

2 Mbps Fiber Optic
Fieldbus Extender
P0914YZ

2 Mbps Fiber Optic
Fieldbus Extender
P0914YZ
ON
ON
OFF ON
ON OFF
OFF OFF
Operational Status
Operational Status
Tx
FBM202
Channel Isolated
Operational Status
Rx
Tx
FBM202
No.
1
2
P0914ST
Operational Status
Operational Status
Fieldbus
Baseplate I. D.
No.
0
1
2
OFF OFF
ON
ON
OFF ON
ON OFF
FBM204
Channel Isolated
4 Input, 0-20mA
4 Output, 0-20mA
P0914SY
FBM204
Channel Isolated
4 Input, 0-20mA
4 Output, 0-20mA
P0914SY
FBM204
Channel Isolated
4 Input, 0-20mA
4 Output, 0-20mA
P0914SY
Channel Isolated
4 Input, 0-20mA
4 Output, 0-20mA
P0914SY
FCM2F(s) (Pair)
NOTES:
1. Maximum baseplate quantity is four.
2. The fiber optic extension can be between any two baseplates,
with up to three extensions per baseplate grouping.
Figure 4-8. Baseplate Interconnections (Example) Using Shielded Twisted-Pair and
Fiber Optic Cabling
Fiber Optic Cabling (Only) Connections

NOTE
1. For fiber optic cabling specifications, refer to Fiber Optic Cable Specifications
on page 88.
Figure 4-9 shows baseplate implementation using fiber optic cabling only. (This cabling configuration corresponds to the baseplate implementation configuration in Figure 1-6.) With this configuration, the baseplates can be dispersed over a wider area, but the maximum overall fiber optic
cabling distance (between all baseplates). With this configuration, any two baseplates can be separated up to 10 km (6.2 mi). (Note, however, that overall maximum cable length constraints for
the subsystem must be observed, as described under Product Sizing Constraints on page 26.)
Three versions of the FCM2F provide three different fiber optic cabling distances:
FCM2F2 = 2 km (1.24 mi); FCM2F4 = 4 km (2.48 mi); FCM2F10 = 10 km (6.2 mi).
Make the cable connections as shown in Figure 4-9. Required fiber optic cable characteristics are
described on page 78. Also, as shown in Figure 4-8, terminators (P0916RB) must be used at the
module Fieldbus connectors on all of the baseplates.
87
B0400FA Rev D
Baseplate (1 of 4)
Terminator (1 of 8)
(P0916RB)
FCM2Fs
(Pair)
Operational Status
Fieldbus
Operational Status
Fiber
Check Fiber
Fieldbus
Operational Status
Operational Status
Operational Status
Operational Status
Module Fieldbus
(Fiber Optic Cabling)
FCM10E(s)
or FCM10Ef(s)
(Pair)
Operational Status
FCM2Fs (Pair)
Operational Status
Operational Status
Fiber
Check Fiber
Fieldbus
Fieldbus
Ethernet
Ethernet
Operational Status
Operational Status
Operational Status
Operational Status
Fieldbus
Operational Status
Fiber
Fieldbus
Check Fiber
FCM2F
2 Mbps Fiber OpticNo.
2
1
ON ON
Fieldbus Extender0
1
OFF ON
P0914YZ
2
ON OFF
OFF OFF
I/A Series
3
FCM2F
FBM201
FBM201
FBM201
FBM201
FCM10E
FCM10E
Communication
2 Mbps Fiber Optic
Fieldbus Extender
P0914YZ
Channel Isolated
8 Input, 0-20mA
Channel Isolated
8 Input, 0-20mA
Channel Isolated
8 Input, 0-20mA
Channel Isolated
8 Input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
Communication
10 Mbps Ethernet to
2 Mbps Fieldbus
P0914YM
Communication
10 Mbps Ethernet to
2 Mbps Fieldbus
P0914YM
I/A Series
I/A Series
I/A Series
I/A Series
I/A Series
I/A Series
I/A Series
FBM203
FBM203
FBM203
FBM203
FCM2F
FCM2F
Channel Isolated Baseplate I. D.

No.
2
1
Channel Isolated
Channel Isolated
Channel Isolated
P0914SV
P0914SV
P0914SV
Communication
2 Mbps Fiber Optic
Fieldbus Extender
P0914YZ
Communication
2 Mbps Fiber Optic
Fieldbus Extender
P0914YZ
P0914SV
1
2
ON ON
OFF ON
ON OFF
OFF OFF
I/A Series
3
I/A Series
I/A Series
I/A Series
Fiber
Check Fiber
I/A Series
I/A Series
FCM Identification
Left Module
P0914ZM
Operational Status
Fieldbus
Operational Status
Fiber
Check Fiber
Operational Status
Operational Status
Fiber
Communication
Baseplate I. D.
1
2
Fieldbus Extender0
ON ON
1
OFF ON
P0914YZ
ON
OFF
OFF OFF
I/A Series
FCM2Fs
(Pair)
User Defined
Operational Status
Fieldbus
Check Fiber
FCM2F
2
3
Fieldbus
Right Module
Operational Status
Fiber
Check Fiber
Fieldbus
Operational Status
Fiber
Fieldbus
Check Fiber
FBM202
FBM202
FCM2F
FCM2F
FCM2F
Communication
2 Mbps Fiber Optic
Fieldbus Extender
P0914YZ
Channel Isolated
Channel Isolated
P0914ST
P0914ST
Communication
2 Mbps Fiber Optic
Fieldbus Extender
P0914YZ
Communication
2 Mbps Fiber Optic
Fieldbus Extender
P0914YZ
Communication
Baseplate I. D.
1
2
ON ON
Fieldbus Extender0
1
OFF ON
P0914YZ
I/A Series
I/A Series
I/A Series
I/A Series
2
3
Fieldbus
Operational Status
ON
OFF
OFF OFF
I/A Series
Operational Status
Fieldbus
Fiber
Operational Status
Fiber
Fieldbus
Check Fiber
Check Fiber
FCM2F
I/A Series
Operational Status
Operational Status
Fiber
Check Fiber
FCM2F
FBM204
FBM204
FCM2F
FCM2F
Communication
2 Mbps Fiber Optic
Fieldbus Extender
P0914YZ
Channel Isolated
4 Input, 0-20mA
4 Output, 0-20mA
P0914SY
Channel Isolated
4 Input, 0-20mA
4 Output, 0-20mA
P0914SY
Communication
2 Mbps Fiber Optic
Fieldbus Extender
P0914YZ
Communication
2 Mbps Fiber Optic
Fieldbus Extender
P0914YZ
I/A Series
I/A Series
I/A Series
Fiber
Check Fiber
I/A Series
I/A Series
FCM2Fs (Pairs)
NOTE: Maximum baseplate quantity is four.
Figure 4-9. Baseplate Interconnections (Example) Using Fiber Optic Cabling
Fiber Optic Cable Specifications

Fiber optic cabling can be purchased from a qualified fiber optics cabling vendor/installer.
NOTE

2. You are strongly urged to subcontract the installation of the fiber optic cables to
an experienced fiber optic cable system vendor/installer. However, if you have the
required skills, a kit manufactured by Optical Fiber Technologies, Inc., Billerica,
Massachusetts, can be used for preparing the fiber optic cable for termination and
installing connectors on the cables.
There is a wide variety of fiber optic cables available to meet most of your needs. Two general categories of cable types are indoor and outdoor cables. Figure 4-10 depicts the construction of a single-fiber indoor cable. Figure 4-11 illustrates an outdoor type cable, having multiple fiber bundles
and strength members that allow the cable to extend over greater distances.
It is recommended that the selected fiber optic cabling have the following characteristics:
Multimode
Graded-index fiber
62.5 micron core/125 micron cladding
Maximum allowable signal loss = 1 dB/km at a wavelength of 1300 nm
Maximum allowable signal loss = 3.5 dB/km at a wavelength of 850 nm.
88
B0400FA Rev D
Cables with different characteristics can be used, but cabling distance capabilities will be
impacted.
Sheath
Cladding
Core
Figure 4-10. Fiber Optic Cable Indoor Type
HDPE Jacket
Glass Routing
Strength Member
Glass Rod
Strength Member
HDPE
Core Tube
Fiber
Bundle
Kevlar Ripcord
Water Blocking Tape
Flooding Compound
Figure 4-11. Fiber Optic Cable Outdoor Type
Two fibers are required for basic (nonredundant) fiber-optic communication, one for transmission and the other for reception. The cables must be terminated with ST-type connectors. Cable
requirements such as flexibility and durability depend on the particular application. Check with
your cable installer/vendor for a listing of application-specific cable characteristics.
Table 4-3 lists physical data for two cables manufactured by Belden Wire & Cable that meet
Foxboro application specifications. It provides an example of the type of information commonly
available on fiber optic cables.
89
B0400FA Rev D
Table 4-3. Fiber Optic Cable Physical Specifications
Variable
Part Number
Number of Fibers
Outer Diameter
Center Core
Diameter Over Cladding
Buffer
Coating
Minimum Bend Radius
Maximum Recommended
Load
Mass
Strength Member
Outer Jacket
Inner Jacket
1.
2.
90
Indoor Cable
Belden 2251821
NEC OFNR
2
3.0 x 6.1 mm
(0. 118 x 0.242 in)
62.5 microns
125 microns
900 microns
Installation:
5 cm (2 in)
Long Term Application:
2.54 cm (1 in)
Installation:
113 kg (250 lb)
Long Term Application
32 kg (70 lb)
18 kg/km
(12 lb/1000 ft)
Kevlar
Polyvinyl Chloride
Outdoor Cable
(Interbuilding Trunk Cable)
Belden 225442
2
10.3 mm (0.405 in)
62.5 microns
125 microns
250 microns
Installation:2
20 x diameter
10 x diameter
Installation:
181 kg (400 lb)
36 kg (80 lb)
90 kg/km
(60 lb/1000 ft)
Fiberglass epoxy rod/ Kevlar
Polyethylene
Polyvinyl Chloride
Not recommended for pulling through conduit.

Calculation for outdoor cable (only) provides bend radius in inches.
5. Field Signal Connections

This chapter provides information on how to connect the I/O wiring between the DIN rail
mounted FBM subsystem and the field devices.
Field Wiring to Termination Assembly Connections

! WARNING
To prevent explosion, install and remove cables, wiring, modules and other replaceable components only when area is known to be nonhazardous.
Field wiring connects to the FBMs by means of termination assemblies (TAs), as illustrated in
Figure 5-1:
Field wiring attaches to the screw terminals on a termination assembly (TA), and
A termination cable connects the TA to the FBM (via a field connector on the
baseplate).
Screw Terminals Termination Assembly
Baseplate
Operational Status
FBM201
0
1
2
3
Operational Status
Operational Status
Operational Status
Operational Status
Fieldbus
Tx
Rx
Fieldbus
Tx
Rx
Ethernet
Tx
Rx
Ethernet
Tx
Rx
OFF
2
P0914SQ
Operational Status
ON ON
OFF ON
ON OFF
OFF OFF
FBM201
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
FBM201
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
FCM10E
Channel Isolated
8 input, 0-20mA
P0914SQ
P0914SQ
FCM10E
Communication
2 Mbps Fieldbus
P0914YM
Communication
2 Mbps Fieldbus
P0914YM
FCM Identification
Left Module
P0914ZM
Right Module
User Defined
Field Connector
Termination Cable
Field Wiring
Figure 5-1. Field Wiring to FBM Connections
Depending on the type of FBM (FBM201, FBM202, and so forth), one or more TAs are available for each FBM to handle specific signals and/or voltage levels. The termination assemblies and
their associated termination cables are described in greater detail in the subsections of this chapter
dedicated to the individual FBMs.
91
B0400FA Rev D
! CAUTION
Before making the field I/O connections, review the different types field wiring and
safety regulations in Field (Signal) Wires on page 95, and the types of signals
which each FBM can safely handle in Fieldbus Modules with Nonincendive Field
Circuits on page 98.
The termination assemblies should already be installed in your enclosure, as described in Termination Assembly Installation on page 74.
To make the field I/O connections to the appropriate TA (and the associated FBM), proceed as
follows:
1. Determine which termination assembly must be used with the selected FBM and its
associated field wiring. Refer to Termination Assembly Properties on page 103 for
information to help you determine this. Match the type of input and/or output signal
to the termination assembly which can handle it.
2. Write the identification (letterbug) of the selected FBM on the FBM Identification
portion of the termination assembly, as shown in Figure 5-2.
92
B0400FA Rev D
Component box(es) provides space for user-created labels which detail the connections for
field wiring to the termination assemblys terminals.
Termination
Assembly (typical)
(top view)
Connector for
Termination Cable
Cable Type 1
FBM Identification
Compression-type
screw terminals*
Shown: two 2 tier
blocks of eight
terminals per block
Each terminal is identified with a unique 3 digit alphanumeric mark

for field connections. For example, this terminal has the mark A06,
which indicates row A, column 6.
Cable Type 1
FBM Identification
This defines the type of termination cable required for this termination
assembly. For length and actual part number of the cable, refer to the
FBM[xxx] Field Connections section of this chapter (where [xxx] is
the number of the FBM associated with this termination assembly).
This writable area allows you to write the identification
of the FBM to which this termination assembly connects.
*Termination assemblies with ring lug screw terminals are also available.
Figure 5-2. Parts of the Termination Assembly (Typical)
3. Determine which termination cable must connect this termination assembly to the
baseplate (and associated FBM). Refer to the specific FBMxxx Field Connections
section in this chapter for information on determining this (where xxx is the number
of the FBM to which you are connecting field wiring).
4. Determine to which channels on the termination assembly each field wire must
connect.
5. Locate the set of blank labels (Foxboro part number P0930RA) packaged with the
subsystem and, using the information obtained in Step 4, print the labels and insert
them into the space provided on each termination assembly component box.
6. Route the field wires from the associated I/O devices into the enclosure containing the
FBMs, to the appropriate termination assembly.
7. Slip the exposed end of each field wire into its appropriate screw terminal, and secure
by turning the associated screw clockwise until the terminal firmly makes contact with
the wire.
93
B0400FA Rev D
8.
9.
10.
11.
The screw terminals and their respective designators are shown on a typical
termination assembly in Figure 5-3.
For termination assemblies associated with FBM201, FBM204, FBM205, or
FBM211, attach the in-line resistor assembly, if required, to the termination assembly, as described in Figure 5-6.
For termination assemblies associated with FBM207, FBM217, FBM219, FBM241,
FBM241c, or FBM242, attach the necessary external fuses, relays, or external excitation voltage to the appropriate screw terminals on the termination assembly.
The screw terminals for connection to an external power source are separate from the
screw terminals for field wiring on the termination assembly, usually on a 2 tier block
with two terminals per block (see Figure 5-3).
Refer to the FBMxxx Field Connections section in this chapter (starting on
page 109) for information on determining which are the appropriate terminals (where
xxx is the number of the FBM to which you are connecting field wiring).
Plug one end of the appropriate termination cable into its connector on the termination assembly, as shown in Figure 5-2. Secure the termination cable by turning both of
its screw connectors clockwise until the cable is fastened.
Refer to the FBMxxx Field Connections section in this chapter for information to
help you determine which end of the cable to connect to the TA (where xxx is the
number of the FBM to which you are connecting field wiring).
Attach the other end of the termination cable to the appropriate input/output connector on the baseplate. Secure the termination cable by turning both of its screw connectors clockwise until the cable is fastened.
For a redundant pair of FBM205s or FBM237s, you must attach the termination
cable to the redundant adapter, which installs over the FBMs field connectors. (This
adapter was installed during Redundant Adapter Installation on page 73.)
You have completed connecting field wiring to the FBM.
94
B0400FA Rev D
Termination Assembly
(typical)
Row C
Row B
Row A
Screw Terminals
for connection to
external power
Three-Tier
Terminal Block source
Row B
Row A
Two-Tier
Terminal Block
B
01
B
02
A
01
B
03
A
02
B
04
A
03
B
06
B
05
A
04
A
05
B
08
B
07
A
06
A
07
Row B
A
08
Row A
C
10
C
09
Row C
B
11
B
10
B
09
A
09
A
10
C
12
C
11
B
12
A
11
C
13
B
13
A
12
C
14
B
15
B
14
A
13
C
15
A
14
C
16
B
16
A
15
L
+
L
+
A
16
N
-
Row L+
N
-
Row N-
The screw terminals on each terminal block are labelled clearly, as shown above.
Note: Compression-type screw terminals are shown. Ring lug screw terminals are also
available, and have a similar layout and orientation.
Figure 5-3. Field Wiring Connections to Termination Assemblies
Field (Signal) Wires

The following paragraphs discuss field wire classification, allowable quantity, size, and shield terminations.
Signal Wire Classification

Field (signal) wiring is divided into three classifications which, for safety reasons, must be physically isolated from one another by mutually exclusive conduits, pipes, troughs, raceways and/or
runs, and by using separate cable entries into enclosures. These classifications are shown in
Table 5-1.
95
B0400FA Rev D
! WARNING
To reduce risk of fire or electric shock, do not interconnect the outputs of different
Class 2 circuits.
Table 5-1. Signal Wire Classification
High-Voltage (HV)
Low-Voltage (LV)
Nonincendive (NI)
Wires carrying voltages above 30 V rms (42.4 V peak) or 60 V dc.

Wires carrying voltages at or below 30 V rms (42.4 V peak) or 60 V dc.
These are termed Class 2 circuits in the U.S. and Canada. See Note.
Wires that enter or leave the equipment enclosure and, under normal
operating conditions, when shorted, opened, or grounded are not
capable, due to arcing or thermal effects, of igniting the specified
flammable gas/vapor-in-air mixture or combustible dust.
NOTE
The power sources in the FBM are voltage and power limited to Class 2 levels as
defined in the National Electrical Code (NFPA-70), Article 725 and the Canadian
Electrical Code, Section 16 (CSA C22.1). Field circuits that are connected to only
the FBM power sources are, by definition, Class 2 circuits. Field circuits that connect to an external, non-FBM power source are Class 2 only if the external power
source is listed/certified as Class 2. This is important to understand because the
U.S. National and the Canadian electrical codes have specific requirements that
apply to wiring methods used for Class 2 circuits.
The minimum allowable distance between wires or groups of wires in different classifications is
50 mm (2 in) at all points along the wire run.
! WARNING
Failure to separate these classifications of field wiring, as described herein, may
result in injury to personnel and/or property damage.
NOTE
1. Signal cables should not be routed in troughs, wireways, pipes, or conduits containing power cables, nor routed close to electric motors, welding machines, or
other equipment capable of generating significant amounts of electromagnetic
interference (EMI). Failure to comply may result in improper system operation.
2. All signal wiring must be twisted-pair to minimize cross-talk between channels.
Figure 5-4 shows separation schemes for incendive/nonincendive wiring.
96
B0400FA Rev D
NOTE
The separation barriers shown in Figure 5-4 are an integral part of the enclosures.
Steps should be taken to bypass field outputs in case of an FBM signal termination
connector failure. The bypass capability can be placed in marshalling cabinets or
junction blocks on the field side of the signal termination connector. This allows
replacing of failed signal termination connectors while maintaining output signals.
Input
Power
Input
Power
Non-Hazardous Area
Any
Enclosure
Any
Enclosure
SB
Incendive Signal Wiring
Sensors and/or
Actuators
Sensors and/or
Actuators
Nonincendive Signal Wiring
Sensors and/or
Actuators
Division 2 (Zone 2) Hazardous (Potentially Explosive) Area

B05
Enclosure
Input
Power
XX
SB
Nonincendive Signal Wiring
Sensors and/or
Actuators
Sensors and/or
Actuators
XX
XX
SB = Separation barrier consisting of panduit, partition, 50 mm (2 in) spacing, or other
separation between wires.
XX = Conduit or other wiring method accepted by local inspection authority.
Figure 5-4. Wiring Separation, Example
Number of Wires
The maximum number of field input/output wires allowed inside each enclosure is a function of
the sizes of the wires in conjunction with: 1) the available cross-sectional area of the I/O wire
channel(s), 2) the allowable number of termination blocks in the enclosure, and 3) where applicable, the requirement to separate the different classifications of field wires (as described under Signal Wire Classification on page 95).
These factors must be considered to avoid having too many I/O wires within a particular enclosure. You are responsible for determining the quantity of, and selecting sizes for, the field wires
scheduled for connection within any enclosure.
97
B0400FA Rev D
Wire Size
For field I/O wiring, recommended wire size is between 0.47 mm diameter (24 AWG) and
2.05 mm diameter (12 AWG).
Shield Terminations
Where applicable, field wiring shields must be terminated using one of the following methods
(the preferred method is listed first):
At the transmitter (but not at both ends of the shield)

At the earth (ground) plate or bus bar within a user-supplied marshalling cabinet
At a bus bar within the enclosure. The bar must be connected to plant utility earth
using an 8 AWG (10 mm2) insulated green wire, or green wire with one or more yellow stripes.
Enclosure Termination Assembly Complement

For information on how many termination assemblies (TAs) can be accommodated in the various
types of enclosures, refer to the Chapter 2 Enclosure Installation.
Fieldbus Modules with Nonincendive Field Circuits

Some Fieldbus Modules (FBMs) have field circuits that are nonincendive when installed according to the electrical codes (requirements) described in the following paragraphs. This allows the
use of ordinary location wiring methods (for example, the field wiring not being enclosed in a
conduit) in Division 2/Zone 2 hazardous locations. There are two sets of requirements that apply:
Underwriters Laboratories (UL), which apply to North American (U.S. and Canadian) installations, and CENELEC, which apply to European installations. The requirements are similar in
concept, but terminology is somewhat different for each.
! WARNING
To prevent explosion, do not install or remove cables, wiring, modules, or other
North American vs. CENELEC Terminology

In the following listing, the North American (UL) is the first given, and CENELEC is the second,
as in:
Voc (UL) = Um (CENELEC) = The maximum open circuit voltage available at the
FBM field terminals
Voc = Um = The maximum open-circuit voltage available at the FBM field terminals
Vmax = Ui = The maximum voltage that can be connected to the FBM field terminals
from an external source
Isc = Io = The maximum short-circuit current that can be supplied by the FBM field
terminals
98
B0400FA Rev D
Imax = Ii = The maximum current that can be delivered to the FBM field terminals by
an external source
Ca = Co = The maximum total capacitance that can be connected to the FBM field
terminals
Ci = Ci = The effective capacitance of the internal FBM circuitry, as seen at the FBM
field terminals
La = Lo = The maximum total inductance that can be connected to the FBM filed
terminals
Li = Li = The effective inductance of the internal FBM circuitry, as seen at the FBM
field terminals.
The CENELEC terminology is used in the entity parameters table on page 101.
Requirements
The National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) allows the use of nonincendive circuits in Class I,
Division 2 Groups A through D; Class II, Division 2, Group G (and Groups E and F dusts with
resistivities greater than 100,000 ohms/centimeters); and Class III Division 2 hazardous locations. It allows the use of entity parameters in determining the suitability of connected field circuits/devices to individual FBM I/O terminals. The following information applies to the use of
FBMs with nonincendive field circuits.
The two basic types of nonincendive FBM field circuits are:
S those deriving their energy from the FBMs
R those suppling energy to the FBMs.
Type S
Type S field circuits are restricted by the maximum allowable connected capacitance (Co) and
maximum allowable connected inductance (Lo). These are determined from the maximum open
circuit voltage (Um) and the maximum short circuit current (Io) available at the FBM terminals.
Examples include:
Internally powered 0 to 20 mA I/O
Thermocouple inputs
RTD inputs
Contact sensor inputs
Internally powered output switches
Internally powered pulse inputs.
99
B0400FA Rev D
Type R
Type R input field circuits have essentially zero input capacitance (Ci) and inductance (Li). The
nonincendivity of the field circuits is purely a function of the parameters of the user-connected
field devices, power sources, and wire. (You must determine these limits by referring to published
ignition curves, and incorporating the applicable safety factor for voltage or current per UL Standard 1604.) Examples include:
Voltage monitoring circuits
Externally powered 0 to 20 mA I/O
Externally powered output switching
Externally powered pulse inputs.
NOTE
Some FBMs have field circuits that cannot be made nonincendive (for example,
240 V load switching).
Table 5-2 specifies the entity parameters for each Fieldbus Module and termination assembly
combination that can be connected to nonincendive field circuits. For additional information
concerning the entity parameter concept, see UL Standard 1604.
100
B0400FA Rev D
Table 5-2. Entity Parameters for FBM Nonincendive Field Circuits
Entity Parameters3
FBM
Type
TA Type
(P/N)1
FBM201
P0916AA/AB
FBM202
FBM203
P0916AC/AD
P0916AE/AF
FBM204
P0916AG/AH
FBM205
P0916AJ/AK
FBM206
P0916JQ/PG
FBM207
FBM207b
FBM211
FBM212
FBM213
P0916AL/AN
P0916JS/PP
P0916JT/PQ
P0916BV/BW
P0916JR/PR
FBM214
FBM219
P0916BX/
P0926EA
P0917XV/
P0926EK
P0916BX/
P0926EA
P0916CA/CB
P0917XV/
P0926EK
P0917LE
FBM223
P0917SY
FBM215
FBM216
FBM217
FBM218
TA Field
Terminal
Field Circuit
Type2
(S) Um
(R) Ui
(S) Io
(R) Ii
(S) Co
(R) Ci
iP to i+
Input (S)
25
21
0.12
c
0
i+ to iInput (R)
60
i+ to iInput (S)
3
0
1000
i+ to iInput (S)
6
0
1000
i+ to iC
Input (S)
6
0.3
1000
i- to iC
Input (S)
6
0.3
1000
i+ to iP
Input (S)
25
21
0.12
4
i+ to iInput (R)
60
0
o+ to oOutput (S)
30
21
0.12
i+ to iP
Input (S)
25
42
0.12
4
0
i+ to iInput (R)
60
5
o+ to oOutput (S)
32
21
0.12
i+ to P+
In-Pulse (S)
25
37
0.12
i- to P+
In-Pulse (S)
25
37
0.12
4
i+ to iIn-Pulse (R)
60
0
4
i+ to iIn-VM (R)
60
0
i+ to iS
In-CS (S)
26
3
0.2
4
0
i+ to iInput (R)
60
i+ to iInput (S)
3
0
1000
i+ to iInput (S)
6
0
1000
i+ to iC
Input (S)
6
0.3
1000
i- to iC
Input (S)
6
0.3
1000
Refer to the HART Communication Interface Module
(S) Lo
(R) Li
0.5
0
1000
1000
1000
1000
0.5
0
0.5
0.5
0
0.5
0.5
0.5
0
0
1000
0
1000
1000
1000
1000
i+ to iIn-VM (R)
30
4
0
0
Refer to the HART Communication Interface Module
(FBM214/215/216/218) Users Guide (B0400FF)
i+ to iIn-VM (R)
30
4
0
0
oC to oK O-ExtP (R)
60
0.25A 0
0
Refer to Profibus-DP Communication Interface Module (FBM223)
Users Guide (B0400FE)
101
B0400FA Rev D
Table 5-2. Entity Parameters for FBM Nonincendive Field Circuits (Continued)
Entity Parameters3
FBM
Type
TA Type
(P/N)1
FBM224
P0926GH
FBM237
P0916CC/QC
FBM241
P0916UY/UZ,
P0916AQ/AR
FBM241b
FBM241c
P0916JV/QN
P0916UD/SS,
P0916JW/QP
P0916AW/AX,
P0916QQ/QR
FBM241d
P0916JX/QS
FBM242
FBM243
P0916JY/RJ
P0916BA,
P0917XW
FBM246
P0916BA,
P0917XW
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
TA Field
Terminal
Field Circuit
Type2
(S) Um
(R) Ui
(S) Io
(R) Ii
(S) Co
(R) Ci
Refer to Modbus Communication Interface Module (FBM224)

Users Guide (B0400FK)
o+ to oOutput (S)
30
21
0.12
0.5
6
o+ to oR-Output (S)
32
21
0.12
0.5
4
i+ to iIn-VM (R)
60
0
0
oC to oK O-ExtP (R)
60
2A
0
0
4
0
0
i+ to iIn-VM (R)
60
iS to i+
In-CS (S)
28
2.5
0.2
50
oC to oK O-ExtP (R)
60
2A
0
0
iS to i+
In-CS (S)
28
2.5
0.2
50
Externally powered, connection is not nonincendive.
iS to i+
In-CS (S)
28
2.5
0.2
50
oK to oC O-IntP (S)
15
15
0.2
1
oC to oK O-ExtP (R)
60
2A
0
0
cP to c+
Inputs (S)
25
30
0.12
0.5
25
60
0.12
0.5
cP to c+
Inputs (S)7
The TA part numbers are listed as follows: compression type/ring lug type.
(S) = the FBM terminals supply energy; (R) = the FBM terminals receive energy. This defines
whether to use Um or Ui, Io or Ic, Co or Ci, and Lo or Li in the entity parameter columns.
Units are expressed as follows: Um and Ui in dc Volts; Io and Ii in dc mA; Co and Ci in F; Lo and
Li in mH.
Maximum current, Ii, determined by external power source and external series resistance.
Requires redundant adapter (P0916NN) mounted on baseplate to support redundancy.
Requires redundant adapter (P0916QD) mounted on baseplate to support redundancy.
Requires redundant adapter (P0917VU) mounted on baseplate to support redundancy.
NOTE
1. Notes 5, 6, and 7 apply to both inputs and outputs.

2. Notes 5 and 7 are always required.
3. Note 6 is required when FBM237 is used in a redundant configuration.
102
(S) Lo
(R) Li
B0400FA Rev D
Termination Assembly Properties

This subsection describes the types of signal inputs and outputs, and associated FBMs for the termination assemblies. Refer to Table 5-3 if you have a termination assembly part number and wish
to learn more about it.
Table 5-3 uses the following terms:
Channel isolation indicates that an I/O channel is galvanically isolated from all other
channels and earth (ground). When used with a termination assembly with channel
isolation, a Fieldbus Module withstands, without damage, a potential of 600 V ac
applied for one minute between any channel and ground, or between a given isolated
channel and any other isolated channel.
Group isolation indicates that all of the input and/or output channels in a termination assembly are isolated as a group from earth (ground). When used with a
termination assembly with group isolation, a Fieldbus Module withstands, without
damage, a potential of 600 V ac applied for one minute between the group isolated
channels and earth (ground). No input or output channels of group-isolated FBMs
should be grounded or ground referenced, as this can cause improper operation due to
ground loop errors.
Differential isolation indicates that each channel has a differential input to allow up
to approximately 1 volt voltage difference between channels without introducing
errors. Channels are not galvanically isolated from each other, but are isolated from
ground and the associated FBM. Differential group isolated inputs use the FBM subsystem power supply for field power. The module withstands, without damage, a
potential of 600 V ac applied for one minute between the differential isolated channels and earth (ground). The specific advantage of the differential isolation over group
isolation is that inputs or outputs can be grounded or ground-referenced as long as the
reference of any one channel with respect to any other channel reference is approximately 1 volt or less.
External Source indicates that power is supplied to the loop from a source other than
via the Fieldbus Module.
Redundant indicates that the module must be used in a redundant configuration (two
modules) with the appropriate redundant adapter and TA.
Redundant Ready indicates that the module may be used in a non-redundant configuration or with the appropriate redundant adapter in a redundant configuration.
Voltage source supplied in loop indicates that power is supplied to the loop from a
source located between the termination assembly and the I/O device in the loop.
Voltage source supplied outside loop indicates that power is supplied to the loop
from a source which connects to the power distribution terminals of the termination
assembly.
Refer to Enclosure Installation on page 29 for information on the heat dissipation and power
consumption of the TAs.
103
B0400FA Rev D
Table 5-3. Termination Assemblies Basic Properties

TA Part
Number1
Used
with
Signal Inputs
Signal Outputs
Type
Type
Isolation
Provided*
General
Info.
P0916AA/
P0916AB
FBM201
0 to 20 mA
N/A
Channel
page 109
P0916AC/
P0916AD
FBM202
Thermocouple/mV
N/A
Channel
page 112
P0916AE/
P0916AF
FBM203
RTD (Platinum
and Nickel)
N/A
Channel
page 114
P0916AG/
P0916AH
FBM204
0 to 20 mA
0 to 20 mA
Channel
page 116
P0916AJ/
P0916AK
FBM205
0 to 20 mA
Redundant
0 to 20 mA
Channel
page 120
P0916JQ/
P0916PG
FBM206
Pulse
(15 to 60 V dc)
N/A
Channel
page 124
P0916AL/
P0916AN
FBM207
16
15 to 60 V dc Switch
N/A
Channel
page 127
P0916AM/
P0916AP
FBM207
16
120 V ac/125 V dc
Switch
N/A
Channel
page 127
P0916PK/
P0916PL
FBM207
16
120 V ac/125 V dc
Switch (external
source)
N/A
Group
page 127
P0916PH/
P0916PJ
FBM207
16
240 V ac Switch
N/A
Channel
page 127
P0916PM/
P0916PN
FBM207
16
240 V ac Switch
(external source)
N/A
Group
page 127
P0916JS/
P0916PP
FBM207b
16
24 V dc Contact
N/A
Channel
page 127
P0917MF/
P0917MH
FBM207c
16
48 V dc Contact
N/A
Channel
page 127
P0916JT/
P0916PQ
FBM211
16
0 to 20 mA,
External Power
N/A
Differential
page 133
P0916BT/
P0916BU
FBM211
16
0 to 20 mA,
FBM Power
N/A
Differential
page 133
P0916BV/
P0916BW
FBM212
14
Thermocouple/mV
N/A
Differential
page 136
P0916JR/
P0916PR
FBM213
RTD (Platinum
and Nickel)
N/A
Differential
page 139
P0916BX/
P0926EA
FBM214
HART
N/A
Channel
page 141
P0917XV/
P0926EK
FBM215
N/A
HART
Channel
page 142
P0916BX/
P0926EA
FBM216
HART
Redundant Ready
N/A
Channel
page 143
P0916CA/
P0916CB
FBM217
32
N/A
Group
page 143
P0916PW/
P0916PX
FBM217
32
24 V dc Contact
N/A
Group
page 143
P0916PS/
P0916PT
FBM217
32
120 V ac/125 V dc
Switch
N/A
Channel
page 143
104
B0400FA Rev D
Table 5-3. Termination Assemblies Basic Properties (Continued)

TA Part
Number1
Used
with
Signal Inputs
Signal Outputs
Type
Type
Isolation
Provided*
General
Info.
P0916PY/
P0916PZ
FBM217
32
120 V ac/125 V dc
Switch (external
source)
N/A
Group
page 143
P0916PU/
P0916PV
FBM217
32
240 V ac Switch
N/A
Channel
page 143
P0916QA/
P0916QB
FBM217
32
240 V ac Switch
(external source)
N/A
Group
page 143
P0917XV/
P0926EK
FBM218
N/A
HART
Redundant Ready
Channel
page 150
P0917LE
FBM219
24
15 to 30 V dc
Switch
15 to 60 V dc at
0.25 A Switch
(external source)
Group
page 150
P0917LH
FBM219
24
24 V dc Contact,
Current Limited
15 to 60 Vdc at 0.25 A
Switch (external source)
Group
page 150
P0917LL
FBM219
24
120 V ac/125 V dc
Switch
125 V dc at 600 mA
w/resistive load, or
125 V dc at 250 mA
w/inductive load, or
120 V ac at 5 A
(external source)
Channel/
Channel
(page 151)
page 150
P0917LP
FBM219
24
120 V ac/125 V dc
Switch
125 V dc at 600 mA
125 V dc at 250 mA
w/inductive load
(external source)
with excitation or
power distribution
voltage source
supplied outside
loop (through TA)
Channel/
Group
(page 151)
page 150
P0917LS
FBM219
24
120 V ac/125 V dc
Switch (external
source)
125 V dc at 600 mA
125 V dc at 250 mA
120 V ac at 5 A
(external source)
Group/Channel
(page 151)
page 150
P0917LV
FBM219
24
120 V ac/125 V dc
Switch (external
source)
125 V dc at 600 mA
125 V dc at 250 mA
w/inductive load
(external source) with
excitation or power
distribution voltage
source supplied outside
loop (through TA)
Group/Group
(page 151)
page 150
P0917RF/
P0917RG
FBM220/
FBM221
1-channel (FBM220) or 4-channel (FBM221) FOUNDATION fieldbus H1 communication.

Refer to FOUNDATION fieldbus H1 Communication Interface Modules
P0917SY
FBM223
2-channel (FBM223) fieldbus Profibus-DP.

Refer to Profibus Communication Interface Module (FBM223) Users Guide (B0400FE).
P0926GH
FBM224
RS-232, RS-422, and/or RS-485 4-port (FBM224) Modbus fieldbus.

Refer to Modbus Communication Interface Module (FBM224) Users Guide (B0400FK).
105
B0400FA Rev D

TA Part
Number1
Used
with
Signal Inputs
Signal Outputs
Type
Type
P0916CC/
P0916QC
FBM237
N/A
P0916UY/
P0916UZ
FBM241
P0916AQ/
P0916AR
FBM241
P0916QE/
P0916QF
FBM241
P0916AS/
P0916AT
Isolation
Provided*
General
Info.
0 to 20 mA
Redundant Ready
Channel
page 161
15 to 60 V dc at 2 A
Switch, unprotected
(external source)
Channel
page 164
Switch, protected
(external source)
Channel
page 164
30 V dc at 5 A, or
125 V dc at 600 mA
125 V dc at 250 mA
120 V ac at 5 A, or
240 V ac at 5 A
Switch (external
source) with voltage
source supplied in loop2
Channel
page 164
FBM241
120 V ac/125 V dc
Switch
30 V dc at 5 A, or
125 V dc at 600 mA
125 V dc at 250 mA
120 V ac at 5 A
Switch, or 240 V ac
at 5 A Switch
(external source)
with voltage source
supplied in loop2
Channel
page 164
P0916QG/
P0916QH
FBM241
120 V ac/125 V dc
Switch
30 V dc at 5 A, or
125 V dc at 600 mA
125 V dc at 250 mA
120 V ac at 5 A, or
240 V ac at 5 A
Switch (external
source) with power
loop (through TA)2
Channel
page 164
P0917MX
FBM241
120 V ac/125 V dc
Switch
120 V ac/125 V dc at 2
A, solid-state switch
(external source)
Channel
page 164
P0916QT/
P0916QU
FBM241
120 V ac/125 V dc
Switch (external
source)
30 V dc at 5 A,
125 V dc at 600 mA
125 V dc at 250 mA
120 V ac at 5 A
with voltage source
supplied in loop2
Group/Channel
(page 165)
page 164
106
B0400FA Rev D

TA Part
Number1
Used
with
Signal Inputs
Signal Outputs
Type
Type
P0916QV/
P0916QW
FBM241
120 V ac/125 V dc
Switch (external
source)
P0916QJ/
P0916QK
FBM241
240 V ac Switch
P0916QL/
P0916QM
FBM241
P0916QX/
P0916QY
FBM241
P0916QZ/
P0916NZ
Isolation
Provided*
General
Info.
30 V dc at 5 A, or
125 V dc at 600 mA
125 V dc at 250 mA
120 V ac at 5 A, or
240 V ac at 5 A
with power distribution
voltage source supplied
outside loop
(through TA)2
Group/Channel
(page 165)
page 164
240 V ac at 5 A
with voltage source supplied in loop2
Channel
(page 165)
page 164
240 V ac Switch
240 V ac at 5 A
outside loop
(through TA)2
Channel
(page 165)
page 164
240 V ac Switch
(external source)
240 V ac at 5 A
Group/Channel
(page 165)
page 164
FBM241
240 V ac Switch
(external source)
240 V ac at 5 A
outside loop
(through TA)2
Group/Channel
(page 165)
page 164
P0916JV/
P0916QN
FBM241b
15 to 60 V dc
Switch
12 V dc at 15 mA
Switch (internal source)
Channel
page 164
P0916UD/
P0916SS
FBM241c
24 V dc Contact
Switch, unprotected
(external source)
Channel
page 164
P0916JW/
P0916QP
FBM241c
24 V dc Contact
Switch, protected
(external source)
Channel
page 164
P0916AW/
P0916AX
FBM241c
24 V dc Contact
30 V dc at 5 A, or
125 V dc at 600 mA
125 V dc at 250 mA
120 V ac at 5 A, or
240 V ac at 5 A Switch
in loop2
Channel
page 164
107
B0400FA Rev D

TA Part
Number1
Used
with
Signal Inputs
Signal Outputs
Type
Type
P0916QQ/
P0916QR
FBM241c
24 V dc Contact
P0916JX/
P0916QS
FBM241d
24 V dc Contact
P0916JY/
P0916RJ
FBM242
P0916NG/
P0916RK
FBM242
P0916JZ/
P0916RL
Isolation
Provided*
General
Info.
30 V dc at 5 A, or
125 V dc at 600 mA
125 V dc at 250 mA
120 V ac at 5 A, or
240 V ac at 5 A
with excitation or power
loop (through TA)2
Channel
page 164
12 V dc at 15 mA
Switch (internal source)
Channel
page 164
N/A
16
Channel
page 185
N/A
16
30 V dc at 5 A, or
125 V dc at 600 mA
125 V dc at 250 mA
120 V ac at 5 A, or
240 V ac at 5 A
Channel
page 185
FBM242
N/A
16
30 V dc at 5 A, or
125 V dc at 600 mA
125 V dc at 250 mA
120 V ac at 5 A, or
240 V ac at 5 A
loop (through TA)2
Group
page 185
P0926BE
FBM242
N/A
16
120 V ac/125 V dc at 2
A, solid-state switch
(external source)
Channel
page 185
P0916BA
P0917XW
FBM243
Bidirectional digital
communication
Bidirectional
digital communication
Channel
page 192
P0916BA
P0917XW
FBM246
Redundant
bidirectional digital
communication
Bidirectional
digital communication
Channel
page 194
1.
Refer to Termination Assembly Relays on page 200 for detailed information on the relay outputs.
* Refer to Termination Assembly Properties on page 103 for definitions.
2.
108
B0400FA Rev D
Ethernet, Fiber Optic, and Module Bus Cable Runs in

Hazardous Areas
The Ethernet trunk Fieldbus, in coaxial or fiber optic form, can be run in Division 2/Zone 2 hazardous areas. However, associated active devices (media converters, and hubs) cannot be used in
these areas.
The module bus, in shielded twisted-pair or fiber optic form, can be run in Division 2/Zone 2
hazardous areas.
FBM201 Field Connections

FBM201 (Foxboro Part Number P0914SQ) is a Channel Isolated, 0 to 20 mA Input Interface
Module. Make the I/O connections for this FBM and its associated termination assembly (TA) as
shown in Figure 5-5. Application of the in-line resistor assembly (used only if an I/A Series Intelligent Transmitter with a Hand-Held Transmitter is used with FBM201) is shown in Figure 5-6.
Table 5-4 lists the input signals supported by the termination assembly used with FBM201, and
Table 5-5 provides the part numbers for the termination cables used with FBM201 and its associated TA.
For reference purposes, the following additional information is provided:
TA labeling is shown in Figure 5-7.
A schematic diagram of the FBM201 input circuitry is shown in Figure 5-8.
Table 5-4. FBM201 Termination Assembly
Signal Inputs
TA Part Number1
P0916AA/AB
1.
#
8
Type
0 to 20 mA
Signal Outputs
#
0
Type
N/A
Isolation
Channel
Table 5-5. FBM201 Termination Cabling Part Numbers
P0916AA/AB
Associated Cabling
0.5 m P0916DA
1.0 m P0916DB
3.0 m P0916DC
5.0 m P0916DD
10.0 m P0916DE
15.0 m P0916DF
20.0 m P0916DG
25.0 m P0916DH
30.0 m P0916DJ
109
B0400FA Rev D
Safety (This Side):

Class I; Div. 2; Groups A-D;
Zone 2, IIC; Hazardous Locations
Safety (This Side):

Class I, II, III; Div. 2;
Groups A-D, F and G;
Zone 2, IIC
Hazardous Locations
+
FBM Powered Transmitter

Cx*
iP
Transmitter
Baseplate
(to FBM201)
Bx*
i+
Ax*
See Note
Termination Assembly (P0916AA/AB)

Termination Cable
(field connections)
(25 pin to 37 pin)
Externally Powered Transmitter
See Note
Cx*
Bx*
i+
Transmitter
+
Baseplate
(to FBM201)
i- Ax*
+
Optional
Fuse** External
Power
Supply
Termination Assembly (P0916AA/AB)

Termination Cable
(field connections)
(25 pin to 37 pin)
NOTES:
1. Field circuitry must have entity parameters compatible with those of FBM201
(TA Part No. P0916AA/AB) as listed in Table 5-2 for hazardous location applications.
2. If an I/A Series Intelligent Transmitter with a Hand-Held Transmitter is used with FBM201, a 200 ohm
in-line resistor (assembly part number P0902VY) must be added as shown (see next figure).
*x indicates FBM channel number.
**Fuse is recommended if power supply amperage rating is sufficient to damage wiring in the event of a
short circuit. The fuse is not allowable in hazardous location applications.
Figure 5-5. FBM201 Input Connections
110
B0400FA Rev D
Cut here, and

strip wire ends
10 mm (0.375 in)
Insulated
Splice
Insulated
Splice (spare)
From Plus (+)

Terminal on
Intelligent
Transmitter
(if module
powered)
Termination
Assembly
iP
Splice
In-Line Resistor
Assembly (P0902VY)
i+
200 Ohm
Resistor
Label
200 Ohm
Resistor
(covered)
Label
From Minus (-)

Terminal on
Intelligent
Transmitter
i-
From Minus (-)

Terminal on External
Power Supply (if
externally powered)
If a HART or I/A Series Intelligent Transmitter is used with FBM201, FBM204,

FBM205, or FBM211, an in-line resistor assembly (P0902VY) must be added in series with the
transmitter. To install the in-line resistor assembly, refer to the above drawing and perform the
following steps:
1. Refer to the left half of the above illustration and cut the in-line resistor assembly (P0902VY) at
a point directly opposite the 200 ohm covered resistor.
2. Strip 10 mm (0.375 in) of insulation from the wire ends.
3. Refer to the right half of the above illustration and connect the wire end that is nearest the resistor
assembly label to the plus (+) terminal on the termination block.
4. Insert the other wire end into the insulated splice provided, together with the filed wire from the
minus terminal on the Intelligent Transmitter, and crimp the wires together using an electricians
pliers or crimping tool.
Note: The 200 ohm resistors are used for inputs only.
Figure 5-6. Use of In-Line Resistor Assembly with FBM201, FBM204, FBM205, or FBM211
FBM201, 0 - 20 mA
8
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
I
N
P
U
T
Customer
Labeling
Area
Printed I/O
Designators
I/O
Connection
Points
iP iP iP iP iP iP iP iP
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+
i- i- i- i- i- i- i- i-
C
B
A
Figure 5-7. FBM201 Termination Assembly (TA) Labeling
111
B0400FA Rev D
iP
68.1
Voltage
Regulator
and Current
Limiter (30 mA)
+24 V
+5 V
6.2 K
i+
61.5
5.5 VZ
To A/D
Converter
+5 V
0.22
uF
Isolated
Loop
Power
Supply
i6.2 K
10 K
+ 2.5 V
Figure 5-8. FBM201 0 to 20 mA Input Circuit

FBM202 (Foxboro Part Number P0914ST) is a Channel Isolated, Thermocouple/mV, Input
Interface Module. Make the I/O connections for this FBM and its associated termination assembly (TA) as shown in Figure 5-9.
Signal Inputs
TA Part Number1
P0916AC/AD
1.
112
Signal Outputs
Type
Thermocouple/mV
Type
N/A
Isolation
Channel
B0400FA Rev D
Associated Cabling
P0916AC/AD
Safety (This Side):

Zone 2, IIC
Hazardous Locations
0.5 m P0916DU
1.0 m P0916DV
3.0 m P0916DW
5.0 m P0916DX
10.0 m P0916DY
Safety (This Side):

Junction Compensation Internal to
Termination Assembly (Foxboro Supplied)
+
Thermocouple/mV
Source
15.0 m P0916DZ
20.0 m P0916EA
25.0 m P0916EB
30.0 m P0916EC
i+
Baseplate
(to FBM202)
Bx*
i- Ax*
Termination Assembly (P0916AC/AD)
(field connections)
Termination Cable
(25 pin to 37 pin)
NOTES:
1. Field circuitry must have entity parameters compatible with those of FBM202 (TA Part No.
P0916AC/AD) as listed in Table 5-2 for hazardous location applications.
2. 100 ohm Platinum RTD (IEC 7510, Class B) integral to the termination assembly provides
temperature compensation.
Figure 5-9. FBM202 Input Connections (when used with Compression
Termination Assembly Block)
Customer
Labeling
Area
Printed I/O
Designators
FBM202, Thermocouple/mV 8
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
I
N
P
U
T
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+
i- i- i- i- i- i- i- i-
I/O Connection B
Points
A
113
B0400FA Rev D
+5 V
10 M
3.32 K
i+
5.5 VZ
0.22
uF
+5 V
i-
To A/D
Converter
AIN1
3.32 K
10 K
Typical for Channels 1 through 8.
+ 2.5 V
RTD PWR
0.19 mA
+5 V
3.3 K
0.22
uF
100
pF
+5 V
To A/D
Converter
AIN2
3.3 K
RTD RET
1K
12.7 K
+ 2.5 V Ref
Ref Select (Program Control)
Ref to A/D
Channel 9, cold junction compensation. Associated RTD is in

the termination assembly (not customer accessible).
Figure 5-11. FBM202 Thermocouple/Millivolt Input Circuit

FBM203 (Foxboro Part Number P0914SV) is a Channel Isolated, Platinum and Nickel RTD,
Input Interface Module. Make the I/O connections for this FBM and its associated termination
assembly (TA) as shown in Figure 5-12.
114
B0400FA Rev D
Signal Inputs
Signal Outputs
TA Part
Number1
Type
P0916AE/AF
RTD (Platinum and Nickel)
1.
Type
N/A
Isolation
Channel
P0916AE/AF
Safety (This Side):

Zone 2, IIC
Hazardous Locations
0.5 m P0916DA
1.0 m P0916DB
3.0 m P0916DC
5.0 m P0916DD
10.0 m P0916DE
15.0 m P0916DF
20.0 m P0916DG
25.0 m P0916DH
30.0 m P0916DJ
Safety (This Side):

Two-Wire RTD
iC
Cx*
Baseplate
(to FBM203)
Bx*
i+
i- Ax*
RTD
Associated Cabling
Termination Assembly (P0916AE/AF)

(field connections)
Termination Cable
(25 pin to 37 pin)
Three-Wire RTD
C
iC
i+
RTD
Cx*
Baseplate
(to FBM203)
Bx*
i- Ax*
Termination Assembly (P0916AE/AF)
(field connections)
Termination Cable
(25 pin to 37 pin)

NOTE: Field circuitry must have entity parameters compatible with those of FBM203 (TA Part No.
P0916AE/AF) as listed in Table 5-2 for hazardous location applications.
115
B0400FA Rev D
FBM203/213, RTD (Pt/Ni/Cu) 8

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
I
N
P
U
T
Customer
Labeling
Area
Printed I/O
Designators
I/O
Connection
Points
iC iC iC iC iC iC iC iC
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+
i- i- i- i- i- i- i- i-
C
B
A
Wire Select (Program Control)

0.24 mA +5 V
3.3 K
i+
100
pF
0.22
uF
+5 V
To A/D
Converter
i3.3 K
+5 V
iC
1K
V Ref to A/D
10 K
Figure 5-14. FBM203 RTD Input/Output Circuit

FBM204 (Foxboro Part Number P0914SY) is a Channel Isolated, 0 to 20 mA, Input/Output
Interface Module. Make the I/O connections for this FBM and its associated termination assembly (TA) as shown in Figure 5-15 and Figure 5-16. Application of the in-line resistor assembly
(used only if an I/A Series Intelligent Transmitter with a Hand-Held Transmitter is used with
FBM204) is shown in Figure 5-6.
Table 5-10 lists the input and output signals supported by the termination assembly used with
FBM204, and Table 5-11 provides the part numbers for the termination cables used with
FBM204 and its associated TA.
A schematic diagram of the FBM204 input/output circuitry is shown in Figure 5-18.
116
B0400FA Rev D
Signal Inputs
TA Part Number1
P0916AG/AH
1.
Signal Outputs
Type
0 to 20 mA
Type
0 to 20 mA
Isolation
Channel
P0916AG/AH
Associated Cabling
0.5 m P0916DA
1.0 m P0916DB
3.0 m P0916DC
5.0 m P0916DD
10.0 m P0916DE
15.0 m P0916DF
20.0 m P0916DG
25.0 m P0916DH
30.0 m P0916DJ
117
B0400FA Rev D
Safety (This Side):

Safety (This Side):

Zone 2, IIC
Hazardous Locations
Cx*
iP
Transmitter
i+
Baseplate
(to FBM204)
Bx*
Ax*
See Note
Termination Assembly (P0916AG/AH) Termination Cable

(field connections)
(25 pin to 37 pin)
Cx*
See Note
i+
Transmitter
+
Bx*
Baseplate
(to FBM204)
i- Ax*
+
Optional External
(field connections)
(25 pin to 37 pin)
Power Supply
Fuse**
NOTES:
P0916AG/AH) as listed in Table 5-2 for hazardous location applications.
2. If an I/A Series Intelligent Transmitter with a Hand-Held Transmitter is used with FBM204, an in-line
resistor assembly (200 ohms), part number P0902VY, must be added as shown. For details, refer
to the description of the FBM201 input connections in this chapter.
**Fuse is recommended if power supply amperage rating is sufficient to damage wiring in the event of a
a short circuit. The fuse is not allowable for hazardous location applications.
118
Safety (This Side):

Zone 2, IIC
Hazardous Locations
B0400FA Rev D
Safety (This Side):

Cx*
Actuator
+
-
Baseplate
(to FBM204)
Bx*
o+
o- Ax*

(field connections)
(25 pin to 37 pin)
NOTE: Field circuitry must have entity parameters compatible with those of FBM204 (P0916AG/AH) as
listed in Table 5-2 for hazardous location applications.
Figure 5-16. FBM204 Output Connections
Customer
Labeling
Area
Printed I/O
Designators
I/O
Connection
Points
FBM204, 0 to 20 mA
4
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 O
U
T
P
U
T
4
I
N
iP iP iP iP oC oC oC oC P
i+ i+ i+ i+ o+ o+ o+ o+ U
i- i- i- i- o- o- o- o- T
C
B
A
119
B0400FA Rev D
68.1
+24 V
iP
Voltage
Regulator
and Current
Limiter (30 mA)
+5 V
6.2 K
i+
0.22
uF
61.5
5.5 VZ
i-
+5 V
To A/D
Converter
Isolated
Loop
Power
Supply
6.2 K
10 K
+ 2.5 V
0 to 20 mA Input Circuit
oC
+ 24 V
o+
33 VZ
o-
Current
Source
+5V
D/A
Conv.
33 VZ
Isolated
Loop
Power
Supply
123
0 to 20 mA Output Circuit
Figure 5-18. FBM204 Input/Output Circuit

NOTE
Refer to FBM205 Redundant Power Supply Test (Internally Powered Transmitter) on page 232 for special considerations required when installing and maintaining redundant FBMs. Also, refer to FBM205/FBM237 Fail-Safe Parameter
Configuration on page 220 for special considerations regarding setting of fail-safe
parameters.
FBM205 (Foxboro Part Number P0914XG) is a Channel Isolated, Redundant, 0 to 20 mA I/O
Interface Module. Make the I/O connections for this FBM and its associated termination assembly (TA) as shown in Figure 5-19 and Figure 5-20. Application of the in-line resistor assembly
(used only if an I/A Series Intelligent Transmitter with a Hand-Held Transmitter is used with
120
B0400FA Rev D
Table 5-12 lists the input and output signals supported by the termination assembly used with
FBM205, and Table 5-13 provides the part numbers for the termination cables used with
FBM205 and its associated TA.
A schematic diagram of the FBM205 input/output circuitry is shown in Figure 5-22.
Signal Inputs
TA Part Number1
P0916AJ/AK
1.
Type
0 to 20 mA
Signal Outputs
#
4
Type
0 to 20 mA
Isolation
Redundant Channel
P0916AJ/AK
Associated Cabling
0.5 m P0916DA
1.0 m P0916DB
3.0 m P0916DC
5.0 m P0916DD
10.0 m P0916DE
15.0 m P0916DF
20.0 m P0916DG
25.0 m P0916DH
30.0 m P0916DJ
Where the FBM205 is used (redundant pair or single module), the redundant adapter
(P0916NN) must be installed on the FBMs two adjacent field connectors on the baseplate, as
described in Redundant Adapter Installation on page 73.
121
B0400FA Rev D
Safety (This Side):

Safety (This Side):
Zone 2, IIC
Hazardous Locations FBM Powered Transmitter
Termination Cable
(See Note 1)
(25 pin to 37 pin)
+
i+
iP
Cx*
iP
Transmitter
To
FBM205
(primary
module)
Test
Point
Bx*
i-
Ax*
See Note 2
iP
(P0916AJ/AK)
(field connections)
61.5 W
Externally Powered
Transmitter
Test
Point
Test
Point To
FBM205
(redundant
module)
To
FBM205
(primary
module)
Termination Cable
(25 pin to 37 pin)
Cx*
(See Note 2)
i+
i+
i-
Redundant Adapter
(P0916NN)
(mounted on baseplate)
(See Note 4)
Transmitter
+
i+
iP
Test
Point
Bx*
i- Ax*
i+
i-
+
Optional External
Fuse** Power
Supply
NOTES:
(P0916AJ/AK)
(field connections)
iP
61.5 W
Redundant Adapter
(P0916NN)
(See Note 4)
Test
Point
i+
i-
Test
Point To
FBM205
(redundant
module)
1. The FBM powered transmitter configuration is recommended

because it provides redundant power to the FBM pair.
resistor assembly (200 ohms), part number P0902VY, must be added as shown. For details, refer to
the description of the FBM201 input connections in this chapter.
P0916AJ/AK) as listed in Table 5-2 for hazardous location applications.
4. Redundant Adapter (P0916NN) must be used with the FBM205.
**Fuse is recommended if external power supply amperage rating is sufficient to damage wiring in the
event of a short circuit. The fuse is not allowable for hazardous location applications.
Figure 5-19. FBM205 with Redundant Adapter Input Connections
122
B0400FA Rev D
Safety (This Side):

Safety (This Side):

Zone 2, IIC
Hazardous Locations
Redundant Adapter (P0916NN)

Cx*
Bx*
o+
o- Ax*
Actuator
o+
o-
FBM205
(primary
module)
Termination Cable
(P0916AJ/AK)
(25 pin to 37 pin)
(field connections)
o+
o-
FBM205
(redundant
module)
P0916AJ/AK) as listed in Table 5-2 for hazardous location applications.
Figure 5-20. FBM205 with Redundant Adapter Output Connections
FBM205, 0-20 mA, Redund.

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
Customer
Labeling
Area
Printed I/O
Designators
I/O
Connection
Points
iP iP iP iP oC oC oC oC
i+ i+ i+ i+ o+ o+ o+ o+
i- i- i- i- o- o- o- o-
4
O
U
T
P
U
T
4
I
N
P
U
T
C
B
A
123
B0400FA Rev D
68.1
+24 V
iP
To/From
Redundant
Adapter
Voltage
Regulator
and Current
Limiter (30 mA)
+5 V
6.2 K
i+
0.22
uF
5.5 VZ
i-
To A/D
Converter
+5 V
Isolated
Loop
Power
Supply
6.2 K
10 K
+ 2.5 V
0 to 20 mA Input Circuit
oC
+ 24 V
o+
33 VZ
To/From
Redundant
Adapter
o-
Current
Source
+5V
D/A
Conv.
33 VZ
Isolated
Loop
Power
Supply
123
0 to 20 mA Output Circuit
Figure 5-22. FBM205 0 to 20 mA Input/Output Circuits

FBM206 (Foxboro Part Number P0916CQ) is a Channel Isolated, Pulse Input Interface Module. Make the I/O connections for this FBM and its associated termination assembly (TA) as
124
B0400FA Rev D
Signal Inputs
TA Part Number1
P0916JQ/PG
1.
Signal Outputs
Type
Pulse (15 to 60 V dc)
Type
N/A
Isolation
Channel
P0916JQ/PG
Safety (This Side):

Zone 2, IIC
Hazardous Locations
+
0.5 m P0916DA
1.0 m P0916DB
3.0 m P0916DC
5.0 m P0916DD
10.0 m P0916DE
15.0 m P0916DF
20.0 m P0916DG
25.0 m P0916DH
30.0 m P0916DJ
Safety (This Side):

Cx*
iP
Baseplate
(to FBM206)
Bx*
i+
Transmitter**
Associated Cabling
i- Ax*
Termination Assembly (P0916JQ/PG)
Termination Cable
(25 pin to 37 pin)

Cx*
Transmitter**
+
Baseplate
(to FBM206)
Bx*
i+
i- Ax*
+
External
Power Supply
Termination Assembly (P0916JQ/PG)
Termination Cable
(25 pin to 37 pin)

**Externally powered transmitter such as Vortex Meter, Magnetic Flowmeter, or Turbine Meter.
P0916JQ/PG) as listed in Table 5-2 for hazardous location applications.
125
B0400FA Rev D
FBM206, Pulse
8
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
I
N
P
U
T
Customer
Labeling
Area
Printed I/O
Designators
I/O
Connection
Points
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+
i- i- i- i- i- i- i- i-
C
B
A
40 S
Min
16 S
Min
(Max) 27.0 V
(Min) 7.0 V
(Max) 1.5 V
0V
16 S
Min
Input Pulse Characteristics
50
Voltage
Regulator
and Current
Limiter (35 mA)
+24 V
iP
+7.5 V
i+
2K
4K
1000
pF
i-
1K
2K
To Level
Detector
and
OptoCoupler
Input Circuitry, Simplified Schematic

Figure 5-25. FBM206 Pulse Input Circuit
126
Isolated
Loop
Power
Supply
B0400FA Rev D

FBM207/FBM207b/FBM207c (Foxboro Part Numbers P0914TD/P0914WH/P0917GY) are
Channel Isolated, Voltage Monitor/Contact Sense Input Interface Modules. Make the I/O connections for these FBMs and their associated termination assemblies (TA) as shown in
Figure 5-26, Figure 5-27, Figure 5-28, and Figure 5-29.
Table 5-16 lists the input signals supported by the termination assemblies used with FBM207;
Table 5-17 lists the input signals supported by the termination assembly used with FBM207b and
Table 5-18 lists the input signals supported by the termination assembly used with FBM207c.
Table 5-19 provides the part numbers for the termination cables used with FBM207/
FBM207b/FBM207c and their associated TAs.
! CAUTION
High voltage and low voltage signal cabling (see Table 5-1 for definition) must not
be mixed. The minimum allowable distance between these two groups of wires is
TA labeling is shown in Figure 5-30 (for voltage monitoring) and Figure 5-31 (for
contact sensing).

Table 5-16. FBM207 Termination Assemblies
Signal Inputs
TA Part Number1
Signal Outputs
Type
P0916AL/AN
P0916AM/AP
P0916PK/PL
16
16
16
0
0
0
N/A
N/A
N/A
Channel
Channel
Group
P0916PH/PJ
P0916PM/PN
16
16
120 V ac/125 V dc Switch
(external source)
240 V ac Switch
240 V ac Switch
(external source)
0
0
N/A
N/A
Channel
Group
1.
Type
Isolation
Table 5-17. FBM207b Termination Assembly
Signal Inputs
TA Part Number1
P0916JS/ PP
16
1.
Type
24 V dc Contact
Signal Outputs
#
0
Type
N/A
Isolation
Channel
127
B0400FA Rev D
Table 5-18. FBM207c Termination Assembly
Signal Inputs
TA Part Number1
P0917MF/MH
1.
Signal Outputs
Type
16
48 V dc Contact
Type
N/A
Isolation
Channel
NOTE
For more information on the relays used in these termination assemblies, refer to
Termination Assembly Relays on page 200.
Table 5-19. FBM207, FBM207b, and FBM207c Termination Cabling Part Numbers
P0916AL/AN,
P0916AM/AP,
P0916PK/PL,
P0916PH/PJ,
P0916PM/PN
P0916JS/PP, or
P0917MF/MH
Safety (This Side):
Zone 2, IIC
Hazardous Locations
V dc
0.5 m P0916FG
1.0 m P0916FH
3.0 m P0916FJ
5.0 m P0916FK
10.0 m P0916FL
RL
15.0 m P0916FM
20.0 m P0916FN
25.0 m P0916FP
30.0 m P0916FQ
Safety (This Side):

For 60 V dc Voltage Source (FBM207)
Bx*
i+
Associated Cabling
i-
Baseplate
(to FBM207)
Ax*
Voltage Source
60 V dc
(P0916AL/AN)
(field connections)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)
*x indicates FBM channel number

P0916AL/AN) as listed in Table 5-2 for hazardous location applications.
Figure 5-26. FBM207 Input Connections (Part 1)
128
B0400FA Rev D

+24 V dc
i+
+
V dc
RL
Bx*
0.01
uF
Baseplate
(to FBM207)
5.5 V 1 K
i- Ax*
Voltage Source
125 V dc
Termination Assembly (P0916AM/AP**)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)
For 120 V ac Voltage Source (FBM207)

+24 V dc
i+
L
V ac
Bx*
RL
i- Ax*
N
Voltage Source
120 V ac
0.01
uF
Baseplate
(to FBM207)
5.5 V 1 K
Termination Assembly (P0916AM/AP**)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)

+24 V dc
i+
L
V ac
RL
Bx*
0.01
uF
Baseplate
(to FBM207)
5.5 V 1 K
i- Ax*
N
Voltage Source
240 V ac
Termination Assembly (P0916PH/PJ**)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)

**P0916AM/AP and P0916PH/PJ provide signal conditioning and isolation.
Figure 5-27. FBM207 Input Connections (Continued, Part 2)
129
B0400FA Rev D
For 125 V dc Voltage Source with Input Excitation Terminals (FBM207)
Internal Connection
i+
i-
Bx*
L+
+
V dc
+24 V dc
Ax*
0.01
uF
Baseplate
(to FBM207)
5.5 V 1 K
N-
Termination Assembly (P0916PK/PL**)

(field connections)
Excitation Voltage
Source
125 V dc
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)
For 120 V ac Voltage Source with Input Excitation Terminals (FBM207)
Internal Connection
i+
i-
Bx*
L+
L
V ac
+24 V dc
Ax*
0.01
uF
Baseplate
(to FBM207)
5.5 V 1 K
N-
Excitation Voltage
Source
120 V ac
Termination Assembly (P0916PK/PL**)

(field connections)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)
Internal Connection
i+
i-
Bx*
L+
L
V ac
+24 V dc
Ax*
0.01
uF
5.5 V 1 K
N-
Excitation Voltage
Source
240 V ac
Baseplate
(to FBM207)
Termination Assembly (P0916PM/PN**)

(field connections)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)

**P0916PK/PL and P0916PM/PN provide signal conditioning and isolation.
130
B0400FA Rev D
Safety (This Side):

Zone 2, IIC
Hazardous Locations
Safety (This Side):

Contact Sensor (FBM207b/FBM207c)
iS
i+
Contact or Solid
State Switch (24 V dc
for FBM207b; 48 V dc
for FBM207c)
Baseplate
(to FBM207b
or FBM207c)
Bx*
Ax*
Termination Assembly, P0916JS/PP

or P0917MF/MH (field connections)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)

NOTE: Field circuitry must have entity parameters compatible with those of FBM207b/c
(TA Part No. P0916JS/PP and P0917MF/MH) as listed in Table 5-2 for hazardous location
applications.
Figure 5-29. FBM207b, FBM207c Input Connections
Customer
Labeling
Area
Printed I/O
Designators
FBM207, Voltage Monitor 16

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
I
N
P
U
T

09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
I
N
P For External
U Voltage
T Source for
P0916PK/PL and
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+
P0916PM/PN
i- i- i- i- i- i- i- i-
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+
i- i- i- i- i- i- i- i-
I/O Connection B
Points
A
L+
N-
B
A
NOTE: External voltage source hot wiring can connect to either L+ screw terminal and ground (return)
wiring can connect to either N- screw terminal.
Figure 5-30. FBM207 Termination Assembly Labeling for Voltage Monitoring
FBM207b, 24 V Contact Sense
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
Customer
Labeling
Area
Printed I/O
Designators
I/O Connection B
Points
A
FBM207b, 24 V Contact Sense
16
I
N
P
U
T
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
16
I
N
P
U
T
iS iS iS iS iS iiS iS iS
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+
i- i+ i+
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+
i- i+ i+
B
A
Figure 5-31. FBM207b Termination Assembly Labeling for Contact Sensing
131
B0400FA Rev D
FBM207c, 48 V Contact Sense
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
Customer
Labeling
Area
FBM207c, 48 V Contact Sense
16
I
N
P
U
T
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+
i- i+ i+
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+
i- i+ i+
Printed I/O
Designators
I/O Connection B
Points
A
16
I
N
P
U
T
B
A
Figure 5-32. FBM207c Termination Assembly Labeling for Contact Sensing
2K
i+
0.01
uF
0.01
uF
Current
Limiter
2.5 mA
1.78 K
60 VZ
i2K
Voltage Monitor (FBM207)
Current
Limiter
2.5 mA
2K
iS
0.01
uF
1.78 K
60 VZ
i+
33.2 K
+
2.4 K
24 Volt
Power
Supply*
Contact Sense (FBM207b)
Current
Limiter
2.5 mA
4K
iS
0.01
uF
60 VZ
1.78 K
i+
66.5 K
+
4.5 K
48 Volt
Power
Supply*
Contact Sense (FBM207c)
*The 24 V and 48 V power supplies are located within the F207b

and F207c module channels.
Figure 5-33. FBM207/b/c Voltage Monitor or Contact Sense Input Circuit
132
B0400FA Rev D

FBM211 (Foxboro Part Number P0914TN) is a Differential, 0 to 20 mA Input Interface Module. Make the I/O connections for this FBM and its associated termination assembly (TA) as
shown in Figure 5-34 or Figure 5-35. Powering of multiple FBM211 input channels from a single
external power supply is shown in Figure 5-36. Application of the in-line resistor assembly (used
only if an I/A Series Intelligent Transmitter with a Hand-Held Transmitter is used with the
Table 5-20 lists the input signals supported by the termination assemblies used with FBM211,
and Table 5-21 provides the part numbers for the termination cables used with FBM211 and its
associated TAs.
TA labeling is shown in Figure 5-37 and Figure 5-38.
Signal Inputs
TA Part Number1
P0916JT/PQ
P0916BT/BU
1.
Signal Outputs
Type
16
16
0 to 20 mA, External Power

0 to 20 mA, FBM Power
0
0
Type
N/A
N/A
Isolation
Differential
Differential
Table 5-21 provides the part numbers for the termination cables used with the assemblies for
FBM211.
P0916JT/PQ,
P0916BT/BU
Associated Cabling
0.5 m P0916FG
1.0 m P0916FH
3.0 m P0916FJ
5.0 m P0916FK
10.0 m P0916FL
15.0 m P0916FM
20.0 m P0916FN
25.0 m P0916FP
30.0 m P0916FQ
133
B0400FA Rev D
Bx*
iP
Transmitter
i+ Ax*
Current
Limiting
Circuit
Baseplate
(to FBM211)
Termination Assembly (P0916BT/BU)
See Note
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)
NOTE: If an I/A Series Intelligent Transmitter with a Hand-Held Transmitter is used with FBM211, an
in-line resistor assembly (200 ohms), part number P0902VY, must be added as shown. For
details, refer to the description of the FBM201 input connections in this chapter.
Figure 5-34. FBM211 Input Connections (FBM Power)
Safety (This Side):

Zone 2, IIC
Hazardous Locations
Safety (This Side):

See Note
i+
Transmitter
+
Baseplate
(to FBM211)
Bx*
i- Ax*
+
Optional External Termination Assembly (P0916JT/PQ)
Fuse** Power Supply
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)
NOTES:
resistor assembly (200 ohms), part number P0902VY, must be added as shown. For details, refer to
the description of the FBM201 input connections in this chapter.
P0916JT/PQ) as listed in Table 5-2 for hazardous location applications.
*x indicates FBM channel.
**Fuse is recommended if power supply amperage rating is sufficient to damage wiring in the event of
a short circuit. The fuse is not allowable for hazardous location applications.
Figure 5-35. FBM211 Input Connections (External Power)
134
B0400FA Rev D
See Note
-
i+ Bx*
i-
(P0916JT/PQ)
Optional
Fuse**
External
Power
Supply
See Note
To
FBM211
Ax*
i+ Bx*
i-
To
FBM211
Ax*
(P0916JT/PQ)
Transmitter
See Note
i+ Bx*
i-
To
FBM211
Ax*
(P0916JT/PQ)
NOTE: If an I/A Series Intelligent Transmitter with a Hand-Held Transmitter is used with FBM211,
a 200 ohm in-line resistor (assembly part number P0902VY) must be added as shown.
**Fuse is recommended if power supply amperage rating is sufficient to damage wiring in the
event of a short circuit. If multiple channels are powered by a single external power supply,
fusing may be applicable for the same reason.
Figure 5-36. Multiple FBM211 Input Channels Are Powered By a Single External
Power Supply
Customer
Labeling
Area
Printed I/O
Designators
I/O
Connection
Points
FBM211, 0-20 mA Int. S.

16
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
I
N
P
U
T
FBM211, 0-20 mA Int. S.

16
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
I
N
P
U
T
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+
B
A
Figure 5-37. FBM211 Termination Assembly (TA) Labeling (Internal Source)
135
B0400FA Rev D
Customer
Labeling
Area
Printed I/O
Designators
I/O
Connection
Points
FBM211, 0-20 mA Ext. S. 16

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
I
N
P
U
T
FBM211, 0-20 mA Ext. S. 16

09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
I
N
P
U
T
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+
i- i- i- i- i- i- i- i-
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+
i- i- i- i- i- i- i- i-
B
A
Figure 5-38. FBM211 Termination Assembly (TA) Labeling (External Source)
+5 V
3.3 K
i+
5.5 VZ
61.9
0.22
uF
+5 V
To Analog
Multiplexer
i3.3 K
Figure 5-39. FBM211 Group Isolated Input Circuit

FBM212 (Foxboro Part Number P0914XL) is a Differential, Thermocouple/mV, Input Interface
Module. Make the I/O connections for this FBM and its associated termination assembly (TA) as
! CAUTION
When placing the thermocouples (associated with FBM212) in the field, ensure
that they do not become grounded (that is, by electrically contacting, directly or
indirectly, with building steel).
136
B0400FA Rev D
Signal Inputs
TA Part Number1
P0916BV/BW
1.
#
14
Signal Outputs
Type
Thermocouple/mV
Type
N/A
Isolation
Differential
P0916BV/BW
Safety (This Side):

Zone 2, IIC
Hazardous Locations
0.5 m P0916FG
1.0 m P0916FH
3.0 m P0916FJ
5.0 m P0916FK
10.0 m P0916FL
15.0 m P0916FM
20.0 m P0916FN
25.0 m P0916FP
30.0 m P0916FQ
Safety (This Side):

Junction compensation is internal to
termination assembly (Foxboro supplied).
+
Thermocouple/mV
Source
Associated Cabling
i+
Bx*
Baseplate
(to FBM212)
i- Ax*
Termination Assembly (P0916BV/BW)
(field connections)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)
NOTES:
P0916BV/BW) as listed in Table 5-2for hazardous location applications.
2. 100 ohm Platinum RTD (IEC 7510, Class B) integral to the termination assembly provides
temperature compensation.
137
B0400FA Rev D
Customer
Labeling
Area
Printed I/O
Designators
I/O
Connection
Points
FBM212,Thermocouple/mV 14
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
I
N
P
U
T
FBM212,Thermocouple/mV 14
09 10 11 12 13 14
I
N
P
U
T
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+
i- i- i- i- i- i- i- i-
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+
i- i- i- i- i- i-
B
A
+5 V
10 M
+5 V
3.3 K
i+
5 V dc
+5 V
0.22
uF
CHAN1
i10 M
Isolated
5 V dc
Power
Supply
24 V dc
3.3 K
VREF
+5 V
10 M
+5 V
3.3 K
i+
0.22
uF
CHAN14
+5 V
Analog
Multiplexer
i10 M
3.3 K
VREF
Channel and Wire Select
(program control)
SigmaDelta
Analog
to
Digital
Converter
with
Differential
Input
Isolation
Circuits
Logic
0.25 mA
RTD Ret.
1K
+5 V
10 K
+
CHAN15*
3.3 K
0.22
uF
3.3 K
+5 V
*Channel 15 is the cold

junction compensation
channel. The RTD is in
the TA and is not customer accessible.
Figure 5-42. FBM212 Thermocouple/Millivolt Input Circuit
138
B0400FA Rev D

FBM213 (Foxboro Part Number P0914XN) is a Differential Platinum and Nickel RTD Input
Interface Module. Make the I/O connections for this FBM and its associated termination assembly (TA) as shown in Figure 5-43.
Signal Inputs
TA Part Number1
P0916JR/PR
1.
#
8
Signal Outputs
Type
RTD (Platinum and Nickel)
Type
N/A
Isolation
Differential
P0916JR/PR
Associated Cabling
0.5 m P0916EN
1.0 m P0916EP
3.0 m P0916EQ
5.0 m P0916ER
10.0 m P0916ES
15.0 m P0916ET
20.0 m P0916EU
25.0 m P0916EV
30.0 m P0916EW
139
B0400FA Rev D
Safety (This Side):

Zone 2, IIC
Hazardous Locations
Safety (This Side):

Two-Wire RTD
iC
Cx*
i+
i- Ax*
RTD
Baseplate
(to FBM213)
Bx*
Termination Assembly (P0916JR/PR)
Termination Cable
(25 pin to 37 pin)
Three-Wire RTD
C
iC
i+
RTD
Cx*
Baseplate
(to FBM213)
Bx*
i- Ax*
Termination Assembly (P0916JR/PR)
Termination Cable
(25 pin to 37 pin)

P0916JR/PR) as listed inTable 5-2 for hazardous location applications.
FBM203/213, RTD (Pt/Ni/Cu) 8

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
I
N
P
U
T
Customer
Labeling
Area
Printed I/O
Designators
I/O
Connection
Points
iC iC iC iC iC iC iC iC
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+
i- i- i- i- i- i- i- i-
C
B
A
140
B0400FA Rev D
Channel and Wire Select (program control)
14 V dc
0.25 mA +5 V
-10 V dc
10 K
i+
0.22
uF
CHAN1
Isolated
Module
Power
Supply
24 V dc
+5 V
i10 K
+5 V
iC
1K
Channel Select
To Multiplexer
V Ref
8
Channel
Analog
Multiplexer
10 K
Channel and Wire Select

(Program Control)
SigmaDelta
Analog
to
Digital
Converter
with
Differential
Input
0.25 mA +5 V
i+
0.22
uF
CHAN8
Isolation
Circuits
10 K
+5 V
Logic
i10 K
+5 V
iC
1K
Channel Select
To Multiplexer
V Ref
10 K
Figure 5-45. FBM213 RTD Input/Output Circuit

For additional information, refer to HART Communication Interface Module
141
B0400FA Rev D
Signal Inputs
TA Part Number1
P0916BX/P0926EA
1.
Signal Outputs
Type
HART
Type
Isolation
N/A
Channel
P0916BX/P0926EA
Associated Cabling
0.5 m P0916DA
1.0 m P0916DB
3.0 m P0916DC
5.0 m P0916DD
10.0 m P0916DE
15.0 m P0916DF
20.0 m P0916DG
25.0 m P0916DH
30.0 m P0916DJ

Table 5-28 lists the output signals supported by the termination assembly used with FBM215,
associated TA.
TA Part Number1
P0917XV/P0926EK
1.
Signal Inputs
Signal Outputs
Type
N/A
Type
HART
Isolation
Channel
P0917XV/P0926EK
142
Associated Cabling
0.5 m P0916DA
1.0 m P0916DB
3.0 m P0916DC
5.0 m P0916DD
10.0 m P0916DE
15.0 m P0916DF
20.0 m P0916DG
25.0 m P0916DH
30.0 m P0916DJ
B0400FA Rev D

associated TA.
Signal Inputs
TA Part Number1
P0916BX/P0926EA
1.
#
8
Signal Outputs
Type
HART
Redundant Ready
Type
N/A
Isolation
Channel
P0916BX/P0926EA
Associated Cabling
0.5 m P0916DA
1.0 m P0916DB
3.0 m P0916DC
5.0 m P0916DD
10.0 m P0916DE
15.0 m P0916DF
20.0 m P0916DG
25.0 m P0916DH
30.0 m P0916DJ

FBM217 (Foxboro Part Number P0914TR) is a Differential Discrete Input Voltage Monitor
Interface Module. Make the I/O connections for this FBM and its associated termination assembly (TA) as shown in Figure 5-46, Figure 5-47, Figure 5-48, and Figure 5-49.
associated TAs.
! CAUTION
143
B0400FA Rev D
Signal Inputs
TA Part Number1
Signal Outputs
Type
P0916CA/CB
P0916PW/PX
P0916PS/PT
P0916PY/PZ
32
32
32
32
0
0
0
0
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Group
Group
Channel
Group
P0916PU/PV
P0916QA/QB
32
32
24 V dc Contact
(external source)
240 V ac Switch
240 V ac Switch
(external source)
0
0
N/A
N/A
Channel
Group
1.
Type
Isolation
NOTE
P0916CA/CB,
P0916PW/PX,
P0916PS/PT,
P0916PY/PZ,
P0916PU/PV, or
P0916QA/QB
144
Associated Cabling
0.5 m P0916FG
1.0 m P0916FH
3.0 m P0916FJ
5.0 m P0916FK
10.0 m P0916FL
15.0 m P0916FM
20.0 m P0916FN
25.0 m P0916FP
30.0 m P0916FQ
Safety (This Side):

Zone 2, IIC
Hazardous Locations
B0400FA Rev D
Safety (This Side):

i+
+
RL
V dc
Voltage Source
30 V dc
i-
Baseplate
(to FBM217)
Bx*
Ax*
(P0916CA/CB)
(field connections)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)
P0916CA/CB) as listed inTable 5-2 for hazardous location applications.
Figure 5-46. FBM217 Input Connections (Voltage Monitor) (Part 1)
145
B0400FA Rev D

+24 V dc
i+
+
V dc
RL
Bx*
0.01
uF
Baseplate
(to FBM217)
5.5 V 1 K
i- Ax*
Voltage Source
125 V dc
Termination Assembly (P0916PS/PT**)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)

+24 V dc
i+
L
V ac
RL
Bx*
0.01
uF
Baseplate
(to FBM217)
5.5 V 1 K
i- Ax*
N
Voltage Source
120 V ac
Termination Assembly (P0916PS/PT**)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)

+24 V dc
i+
L
V ac
RL
Bx*
0.01
uF
Baseplate
(to FBM217)
5.5 V 1 K
i- Ax*
N
Voltage Source
240 V ac
Termination Assembly (P0916PU/PV**)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)

**P0916PS/PT and P0916PU/PV provide signal conditioning and isolation for inputs.
Figure 5-47. FBM217 Input Connections (Voltage Monitor) (Continued, Part 2)
146
B0400FA Rev D
For 125 V dc Voltage Source with Input Excitation Terminals (FBM217)
Internal Connection
i+
i-
Bx*
L+
+
V dc
+24 V dc
Ax*
0.01
uF
Baseplate
(to FBM217)
5.5 V 1 K
N-
Excitation Voltage
Source
125 V dc
Termination Assembly (P0916PY/PZ**)

(field connections)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)
Internal Connection
i+
i-
Bx*
L+
L
V ac
+24 V dc
Ax*
0.01
uF
Baseplate
(to FBM217)
5.5 V 1 K
N-
Termination Assembly (P0916PY/PZ**)

(field connections)
Excitation Voltage
Source
120 V ac
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)
Internal Connection
i+
i-
Bx*
L+
L
V ac
+24 V dc
Ax*
0.01
uF
5.5 V 1 K
N-
Excitation Voltage
Source
240 V ac
Baseplate
(to FBM217)
Termination Assembly (P0916QA/QB**)

(field connections)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)

**P0916PY/PZ and P0916QA/QB provide signal conditioning and isolation for inputs.
147
B0400FA Rev D
Contact Sensor (FBM217)
iS
i+
Baseplate
(to FBM217)
Bx*
Ax*
3.3 K
Contact or
Solid State
Switch (24 V dc)
Termination Assembly (P0916PW/PX) Termination Cable

(37-pin to 37-pin)
NOTE: 24 V dc is supplied by the FBM and each channel is protected by a current limiting resistor (3.3k).
You can add optional fusing per channel (500 mA fuse, part number P0156KZ).
Figure 5-49. FBM217 Input Connections (Contact Sense)
Customer
Labeling
Area
Printed I/O
Designators
I/O
Connection
Points
Customer
Labeling
Area
Printed I/O
Designators
I/O
Connection
Points
B
A

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
I
N
P
U
T

09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
I
N
P
U
T
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+
i- i- i- i- i- i- i- i-
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+
i- i- i- i- i- i- i- i-
B
A

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
I
N
P
U
T

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
I
N
P
U
T
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+
i- i- i- i- i- i- i- i-
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+
i- i- i- i- i- i- i- i-
For External
Voltage Source
for P0916PY/PZ
and P0916QA/QB
L+
N-
NOTE: External Voltage Source hot wiring can connect to either L+ screw terminal, and ground (return)
Figure 5-50. FBM217 Termination Assembly (TA) Labeling (Voltage Monitor)
148
B0400FA Rev D
Customer
Labeling
Area
Printed I/O
Designators
I/O
Connection
Points
FBM217, Contact Sense

32
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
I
N
P
U
T
iS iS iS iS iS iS iS iS
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+

32
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
I
N
P
U
T

32
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
I
N
P
U
T
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+
B
A
Customer
Labeling
Area
Printed I/O
Designators
I/O
Connection
Points

32
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
I
N
P
U
T
B
A
Figure 5-51. FBM217 Termination Assembly (TA) Labeling (Contact Sense)
i+
10 K
3.3 K
5.1 K
1000 pF
CHAN1
i-
10 K
10 K
i+
5.1 K
1000 pF
CHAN2
ii+
CHAN32
10 K
1000 pF
10 K
5.1 K
iFigure 5-52. FBM217 Voltage Monitor Input Circuit
149
B0400FA Rev D

associated TA.
Signal Inputs
TA Part Number1
P0917XV/P0926EK
1.
#
0
Type
N/A
Signal Outputs
#
Type
HART,
Redundant Ready
Isolation
Channel
P0917XV/P0926EK
Associated Cabling
0.5 m P0916DA
1.0 m P0916DB
3.0 m P0916DC
5.0 m P0916DD
10.0 m P0916DE
15.0 m P0916DF
20.0 m P0916DG
25.0 m P0916DH
30.0 m P0916DJ

FBM219 (Foxboro Part Number P0916RH) is a Group Isolated, Discrete I/O Interface Module.
Make the I/O connections for this FBM and its associated termination assembly (TA) as shown in
Figure 5-53 through Figure 5-59.
associated TAs.
! CAUTION
A schematic diagram of the FBM219 input circuitry is shown in Figure 5-62 and
Figure 5-63.
150
B0400FA Rev D
Signal Inputs
TA Part
Number
P0917LE
24
P0917LH
24
P0917LL
24
P0917LP
Type
Isolation
24 V dc Contact,
Current Limited
120 V ac/125 V dc
Switch
Group
(Group)
Group
(Group)
Channel
(Channel)
24
120 V ac/125 V dc
Switch
P0917LS
24
120 V ac/125 V dc
Switch (external
source)
P0917LV
24
120 V ac/125 V dc
Switch (external
source) with excitation
outside loop (through
TA)
15 to 60 V dc at 0.25 A Switch
(external source)
15 to 60 V dc at 0.25 A Switch
(external source)
125 V dc at 600 mA w/resistive
load, or 125 V dc at 250 mA
w/inductive load, or 120 V ac at
5 A (external source)1
w/inductive load (external source)
distribution voltage source supplied
outside loop (through TA)1
w/inductive load, or 120 V ac at 5 A
(external source)1
w/inductive load (external source)
with power distribution voltage
source supplied outside loop
(through TA)1
1.
Type
Signal Outputs
Channel
(Group)
Group
(Channel)
Group
(Group)
NOTE
No ring lug-type screw terminals are available with the TAs for FBM219 at this
time.
NOTE
151
B0400FA Rev D
P0917LE or P0917LH
0.5 m P0916FG
1.0 m P0916FH
3.0 m P0916FJ
5.0 m P0916FK
10.0 m P0916GE
0.5 m P0916FG
1.0 m P0916FH
3.0 m P0916FJ
5.0 m P0916FK
10.0 m P0916FL
P0917LL,
P0917LP,
P0917LS, or
P0917LV
1.
Associated Cabling1
15.0 m P0916GF
20.0 m P0916GG
25.0 m P0916GH
30.0 m P0916GJ
15.0 m P0916FM
20.0 m P0916FN
25.0 m P0916FP
30.0 m P0916FQ
Revision B or higher (only) cabling may be used.
Safety (This Side):

Zone 2, IIC
Hazardous Locations
Safety (This Side):

i+
+
RL
V dc
Voltage Source
30 V dc
i-
Bx*
Baseplate
(to FBM219)
Ax*
(P0917LE)
(field connections)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)
P0917LE) as listed in Table 5-2 for hazardous location applications.
Figure 5-53. FBM219 Input Connections (Voltage Monitor) (Part1)
152
B0400FA Rev D
Contact Sensor (FBM219)
Bx*
iS
i+
Contact Or
Solid State
Switch (24 V dc)
Baseplate
(to FBM219)
3.3 K
Ax*
Termination Assembly (P0917LH)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)

Figure 5-54. FBM219 Input Connections (Contact Sense with Current Limiting)

+24 V dc
i+
+
V dc
RL
Bx*
0.01
uF
Baseplate
(to FBM219)
5.5 V 1 K
i- Ax*
Voltage Source
125 V dc
Termination Assembly (P0917LL/LP**)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)

+24 V dc
i+
L
V ac
RL
Bx*
0.01
uF
Baseplate
(to FBM219)
5.5 V 1 K
i- Ax*
N
Voltage Source
120 V ac
Termination Assembly (P0917LL/LP**)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)

153
B0400FA Rev D
For 125 V dc Voltage Source with Group Input Excitation Terminals (FBM219)
Internal Connection
i+
i-
Bx*
L+
+
V dc
+24 V dc
Ax*
0.01
uF
Baseplate
(to FBM219)
5.5 V 1 K
N-
Excitation Voltage
Source
125 V dc
Termination Assembly (P0917LS/LV)

(field connections)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)
For 120 V ac Voltage Source with Group Input Excitation Terminals (FBM219)
Internal Connection
i+
i-
Bx*
L+
L
V ac
+24 V dc
Ax*
0.01
uF
5.5 V 1 K
N-
Excitation Voltage
Source
120 V ac
Baseplate
(to FBM219)
Termination Assembly (P0917LS/LV)

(field connections)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)

154
Safety (This Side):

Zone 2, IIC
Hazardous Locations
B0400FA Rev D
Safety (This Side):

For Switch Output (External Source) (FBM219)
oK
Load
**
V dc
Voltage Source
(60 V dc)
Bx*
Baseplate
(to FBM219)
oC Ax*
Termination Assembly (P0917LE/LH) Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)
(field connections)

**Protective diode (user-supplied) is recommended for a dc inductive load only.
MOV (metal oxide varistor) is recommended for an ac inductive load only.
P0917LE/LH) as listed in Table 5-2 for hazardous location applications.
155
B0400FA Rev D

External Voltage Source***:
125 V dc at 600 mA resistive,
or 250 mA inductive
+ oC
V dc
Load
NC
**
or
Cx*
Bx*
+
NC
NO
24 V dc
Baseplate
(to FBM219)
NO Ax*
Termination Assembly (P0917LL/LS)
(field connections)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)

125 V dc at 600 mA resistive,
or 250 mA inductive
N
V ac
Load
L oC
Cx*
NC
**
or
Bx*
+
NC
24 V dc
Baseplate
(to FBM219)
NO -
NO Ax*
Termination Assembly (P0917LL/LS)
(field connections)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)

**Protective diode (user-supplied) is recommended for dc inductive load only.
***Relay contacts can support up to 250 V ac at 5 A maximum.
Refer to Termination Assembly Relays for relay contact specifications. Termination assembly
design limits current handling capability to 5 A ac per channel, 12 A per group of 8 outputs.
Figure 5-58. FBM219 Output Connections (Continued)
156
B0400FA Rev D
For Switch Output (External Source) with Power Distribution Terminals (FBM219)
oC
Load
NC
**
Internal
Connection
24 V dc
Cx*
Bx*
Baseplate
(to
FBM219)
NC
or
NO Ax*
NO
+
L+
+
V dc
****
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)
N-
Termination Assembly (P0917LP/LV)

(field connections)
Excitation Voltage Source
(125 V dc at 600 mA w/resistive load,
125 V dc at 250 mA w/inductive load,
or 120 V ac at 5 A)
oC
Load
NC
**
Internal
Connection
24 V dc
Cx*
Bx*
Baseplate
(to
FBM219)
NC
or
NO Ax*
NO
+
L
Power
V ac
Distribution
Voltage Source
(120 V ac at 5 A)
N N-
L+
****
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)
Termination Assembly (P0917LP/LV)

(field connections)

design limits current handling capability to 5 A per channel.
**** A single fuse provides short circuit protection per eight channels; two fuses are present for the 16
channels in these termination assemblies. Current is limited for all eight channels to 12 A total
(15 A fuse, Foxboro part number P0156EW).
Figure 5-59. FBM219 Output Connections with Power Distribution Terminals
157
B0400FA Rev D
Customer
Labeling
Area
Printed I/O
Designators
I/O
Connection
Points
Customer
Labeling
Area
Printed I/O
Designators
I/O
Connection
Points
B
A

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
I
N
P

09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
I
N
P
8
O
U
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ T
i- i- i- i- i- i- i- i- P
8
O
U
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ T
i- i- i- i- i- i- i- i- P
B
A

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
I
N
P
FBM219, Switch (External) 24

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
I
N
P
8
O
U
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ T
i- i- i- i- i- i- i- i- P
8
O
U
oK oK oK oK oK oK oK oK T
oC oC oC oC oC oC oC oC P
For External
Voltage Source
for P0917LS
and P0917LV
L+
N-
NOTE: External Voltage Source hot wiring can connect to either L+ screw terminal, and ground (return)
Figure 5-60. FBM219 Termination Assembly (TA) Labeling (Voltage Monitor)
158
B0400FA Rev D
Customer
Labeling
Area
Printed I/O
Designators
I/O
Connection
Points

24
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
I
N
P
8
O
U
iS iS iS iS iS iS iS iS T
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ P
8
O
U
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ P

24
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
I
N
P

25
26
27
28
I
N
P
8
O
U
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ P
8
O
U
T
P
B
A
Customer
Labeling
Area
Printed I/O
Designators
I/O
Connection
Points

24
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
I
N
P
oC
NC
NO
oC
NC
NO
oC
NC
NO
oC
NC
NO
B
A

29
30
31
32
I
N
P
oC
NC
NO
I/O
Connection
Points
oC
NC
NO
oC
NC
NO
oC
NC
NO
8
O
U
T
P
B
A
Figure 5-61. FBM219 Termination Assembly (TA) Labeling (Contact Sense)
159
B0400FA Rev D
i+
10 K
3.3 K
5.1 K
1000 pF
CHAN1
i-
10 K
10 K
i+
5.1 K
1000 pF
CHAN2
ii+
10 K
10 K
1000 pF
CHAN24
5.1 K
iFigure 5-62. FBM219 Voltage Monitor Input Circuit
oK
Solid State
Power Switch
+
12 Volt
Isolated Power
CHAN25
From Logic
Circuit
oC
oK
Solid State
Power Switch
+
12 Volt
Isolated Power
CHAN32
From Logic
Circuit
oC
Figure 5-63. FBM219 Output Switch (Externally Powered Load) Circuit
FBM220/221 Field Connections

Make the FOUNDATION fieldbus cable connections in accordance with the labels provided on the
TA (see Figure 5-64). As indicated on the labels for the two types of TAs, FBM220 has one communication channel, and FBM221 has four.
For additional information, refer to FOUNDATION fieldbus H1 Communication Interface Modules
160
B0400FA Rev D
End-Bus Connection
FBM221, Foundation Fieldbus
FBM221, Foundation Fieldbus
01
01
02
03
04
To H1
Field
Devices
02
03
04
C
O
M
M
U
N
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
Label
Signal
Connection
Points:
C = o+
B = oA = Shield
Mid-Bus Connection
o+
osh
o+
osh
o+
osh
C
O
M
M
U
N
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
o+
osh
o+
osh
o+
osh
o+
osh
o+
osh
NOTE:
FBM221 TA (shown)
has four channels;
FBM220 TA has one
channel.
B
A
To H1
Field
Devices
To H1
Field
Devices
Figure 5-64. FBM220/221 FOUNDATION Fieldbus Cable Connections

For additional information, refer to Profibus-DP Communication Interface Module (FBM223)
Users Guide (B0400FE).
P0917SY
Associated Cabling
0.5 m P0916DA
1.0 m P0916DB
3.0 m P0916DC
5.0 m P0916DD
10.0 m P0916DE
15.0 m P0916DF
20.0 m P0916DG
25.0 m P0916DH
30.0 m P0916DJ

For additional information, refer to Modbus Communication Interface Module (FBM224) Users
Guide (B0400FK).
161
B0400FA Rev D
The termination cable (connecting between the TA and the baseplate) is available in the following
lengths:
Table 5-39. Termination Assembly Cables
Length
P0926GH
Part Number
1.0 m (3 ft) P0926GJ

3.0 m (9 ft) P0926GQ
5.0 m (15 ft) P0926GR

NOTE
Refer to FBM205/FBM237 Fail-Safe Parameter Configuration on page 220 for

special considerations regarding setting of fail-safe parameters.
FBM237 (Foxboro Part Number P0914XS) is a Channel Isolated, Redundant-Ready 0 to 20 mA
Output Interface Module. Make the I/O connections for this FBM and its associated termination
assembly (TA) as shown in Figure 5-65.
associated TA.
A schematic diagram of the FBM237 output circuitry is shown in Figure 5-67.
TA Part Number1
P0916CC/QC
1.
Signal Inputs
Signal Outputs
Type
N/A
Type
Isolation
0 to 20 mA Redundant Channel
P0916CC/QC
162
Associated Cabling
0.5 m P0916DA
1.0 m P0916DB
3.0 m P0916DC
5.0 m P0916DD
10.0 m P0916DE
15.0 m P0916DF
20.0 m P0916DG
25.0 m P0916DH
30.0 m P0916DJ
B0400FA Rev D
If a redundant pair of FBM237s are used, the redundant adapter (P0916QD) must be installed
on the FBMs two adjacent field connectors on the baseplate, as described in Redundant Adapter
Installation on page 73.
Safety (This Side):
Zone 2, IIC
Hazardous Locations
Safety (This Side):

Non-Redundant FBM237
Cx*
Bx*
o+
o- Ax*
Baseplate
(to FBM237)
(P0916CC/QC)
(field connections)
Actuator
Termination Cable
(25 pin to 37 pin)
Redundant FBM237
Cx*
Bx*
o+
o- Ax*
Actuator
Redundant Adapter (P0916QD)

o+
o-
To
FBM237
(Primary
Module)
Termination Cable
(P0916CC/QC)
(25 pin to 37 pin)
(field connections)

NOTE: Field circuitry must have entity parameters compatible with
those of FBM237 (TA Part No. P0916CC/QC) as listed
in Table 5-2for hazardous location applications.
o+
o-
To
FBM237
(Redundant
Module)
163
B0400FA Rev D
Customer
Labeling
Area
Printed I/O
Designators
FBM237, 0-20 mA
8
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
O
U
T
P
U
T
oC oC oC oC iP iP iP iP
o+ o+ o+ o+ i+ i+ i+ i+
o- o- o- o- i- i- i- i-
I/O
C
Connection B
A
Points
oC
+ 24 V
o+
33 VZ
+5V
o-
Current
Source
D/A
Conv.
33 VZ
Isolated
Loop
Power
Supply
123
Figure 5-67. FBM237 Channel Isolated Output Circuit

FBM241/FBM241b/FBM241c/FBM241d (Foxboro Part Numbers P0914TG/WK/WM/ WP)
are Channel Isolated Voltage Monitor/Contact Sense I/O Interface Modules. Make the I/O connections for these FBMs and their associated termination assemblies (TA) as shown in the following figures.
Inputs:
for FBM241 Inputs, see Figure 5-68, Figure 5-69, and Figure 5-70
for FBM241b Inputs, see Figure 5-71
for FBM241c Inputs, see Figure 5-72 and Figure 5-73
for FBM241d Inputs, see Figure 5-74
Outputs:
for FBM241 Outputs, see Figure 5-75, Figure 5-76, and Figure 5-77
for FBM241b Outputs, see Figure 5-79

for FBM241c Outputs, see Figure 5-80 Figure 5-81, and Figure 5-82
for FBM241d Outputs, see Figure 5-83.
164
B0400FA Rev D
The input and output signals supported by the termination assemblies used with:
FBM241 are shown in Table 5-42
FBM241b are shown in Table 5-43
FBM241c are shown in Table 5-44
FBM241d are shown in Table 5-45.
The part numbers for the termination cables used with the termination assemblies are shown in
Table 5-46.
! CAUTION
Termination Assembly Relays on page 200 provides detailed information on the
relays used with the FBM241
TA labeling is shown in Figure 5-84 through Figure 5-88

A schematic diagram of the FBM241 input circuitry is shown in Figure 5-89, and
output circuitry is shown in Figure 5-90.
TA Part
Number1
Signal Inputs
#
Type
Signal Outputs
#
Type
15 to 60 V dc at 2 A Switch,
unprotected (external source)
fuse, protected (external source)
30 V dc at 5 A, or 125 V dc at
600 mA w/resistive load, or
125 V dc at 250 mA w/
inductive load, or 120 V ac at
5 A, or 240 V ac at 5 A Switch
(external source) with voltage
w/inductive load, or 120 V ac
at 5 A Switch with power
distribution terminals2
P0916UY/UZ
P0916AQ/AR
P0916QE/QF
P0916AS/AT
120 V ac/125 V dc
Switch
P0916QG/QH
120 V ac/125 V dc
Switch
Isolation
In/Out:
Channel
In/Out:
Channel
In/Out:
Channel
In/Out:
Channel
In:
Channel
Out:
Group
165
B0400FA Rev D
Table 5-42. FBM241 Termination Assemblies (Continued)
TA Part
Number1
Signal Inputs
#
Type
Signal Outputs
#
Type
Isolation

w/inductive load, or 120 V ac
at 5 A Switch (external source)
with voltage source supplied in
loop2
w/inductive load, or 120 V ac at
5 A with power distribution
terminals2
source supplied in loop
(external source) with power
distribution voltage source
supplied outside loop (through
TA) with power distribution
terminals2
In: Group
Out:
Channel
(external source) with power
distribution voltage source
supplied outside loop (through
TA) via power distribution
terminals2
120 V ac/125 V dc at 2 A, solidstate switch (external source)
In/Out:
Group
P0916QT/QU
120 V ac/125 V dc
with excitation voltage
terminals
P0916QV/Q
W
120 V ac/125 V dc
with excitation voltage
terminals
P0916QJ/QK
240 V ac Switch
P0916QL/QM
240 V ac Switch
P0916QX/QY
P0916QZ/NZ
240 V ac Switch
excitation voltage
terminals
240 V ac Switch
excitation voltage
terminals
P0917MX
120 V ac/125 V dc
switch
1.
2.
166
In/Out:
Group
In/Out:
Channel
In:
Channel
Out:
Group
In: Group
Out:
Channel
In/Out:
Channel
B0400FA Rev D
Table 5-43. FBM241b Termination Assembly
Signal Inputs
TA Part Number1
P0916JV/QN
1.
Signal Outputs
Type
15 to 60 V dc
Switch
Type
Isolation
12 V dc at 15 mA Switch
(internal source)
Channel
Table 5-44. FBM241c Termination Assemblies
TA Part
Number1
Signal Inputs
#
Signal Outputs
Type
Type
Isolation
In/Out:
Channel
In/Out:
Channel
In/Out:
Channel
In: Channel
Out: Group
P0916UD/SS
24 V dc Contact
P0916JW/QP
24 V dc Contact
P0916AW/AX
24 V dc Contact
unprotected (external source)
fuse protected (external source)
30 V dc at 5 A
P0916QQ/QR
24 V dc Contact
30 V dc at 5 A
1.
Table 5-45. FBM241d Termination Assembly
TA Part
Number1
P0916JX/QS
1.
Signal Inputs
#
8
Type
24 V dc Contact
Signal Outputs
#
Type
12 V dc at 15 mA Switch
(internal source)
Isolation
Channel
167
B0400FA Rev D
Table 5-46. FBM241, FBM241b/c/d Termination Cabling Part Numbers
Termination
Assembly
Associated Cabling
P0916AQ/AR (FBM241),
P0916JW/QP (FBM241c),
P0916UD/SS (FBM241c), or
P0916UY/UZ (FBM241)
P0916AS/AT (FBM241),
P0916AW/AX (FBM241c),
P0916JV/QN (FBM241b),
P0916JX/QS (FBM241d),
P0916QE/QF (FBM241),
P0916QG/QH (FBM241),
P0916QJ/QK (FBM241),
P0916QL/QM (FBM241),
P0916QQ/QR (FBM241c),
P0916QT/QU (FBM241),
P0916QV/QW (FBM241),
P0916QX/QY (FBM241),
P0916QZ/NZ (FBM241), or
P0917MX (FBM241)
Safety (This Side):
Zone 2, IIC
Hazardous Locations
V dc
Voltage
Source
(60 V dc)
RL
15.0 m P0916GF
20.0 m P0916GG
25.0 m P0916GH
30.0 m P0916GJ
0.5 m P0916FG
1.0 m P0916FH
3.0 m P0916FJ
5.0 m P0916FK
10.0 m P0916FL
15.0 m P0916FM
20.0 m P0916FN
25.0 m P0916FP
30.0 m P0916FQ
Safety (This Side):

For 60 V dc Voltage Monitor Input (FBM241)
i+
0.5 m P0916FG
1.0 m P0916FH
3.0 m P0916FJ
5.0 m P0916FK
10.0 m P0916GE
i-
Baseplate
(to FBM241)
Bx*
Ax*
(P0916UY/UZ or P0916AQ/AR)
(field connections)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)

P0916UY/UZ orP0916AQ/AR) as listed in Table 5-2for hazardous location applications.
Figure 5-68. FBM241 Input Connections (Part 1)
168
B0400FA Rev D
i+
+
RL
V dc
Voltage
Source
(60 V dc)
i-
Baseplate
(to FBM241)
Bx*
Ax*
Termination Assembly (P0916QE/QF) Termination Cable

(37 pin to 37 pin)
+24 V dc
i+
+
V dc
RL
Bx*
0.01
uF
Baseplate
(to FBM241)
5.5 V 1 K
i- Ax*
Voltage
Source
(125 V dc)
Termination Assembly (P0916AS/AT, P0916QG/QH,**

Termination Cable
or P0917MX)
(37 pin to 37 pin)
For 120 V ac Voltage Monitor Input (FBM241)
+24 V dc
i+
L
V ac
RL
Bx*
0.01
uF
Baseplate
(to FBM241)
5.5 V 1 K
i- Ax*
N
Voltage
Source
(120 V ac)
Termination Assembly (P0916AS/AT, P0916QG/QH,**

Termination Cable
or P0917MX)
(37 pin to 37 pin)
For 240 V ac Voltage Monitor Input (FBM241)
+24 V dc
i+
L
V ac
RL
Bx*
0.01
uF
Baseplate
(to FBM241)
5.5 V 1 K
i- Ax*
N
Voltage
Source
(240 V ac)
Termination Assembly (P0916QJ/QK or P0916QL/QM**)

Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)

**Termination assemblies P0916AS/AT, P0916QG/QH, P0916QJ/QK, P0916QL/QM, and P0917MX
provide signal conditioning and isolation for inputs.
169
B0400FA Rev D
For 125 V dc Voltage Monitor Input with Input Excitation Terminals (FBM241)
Internal Connection
i+
Bx*
L+
+
V dc
+24 V dc
Ax*
i-
0.01
uF
Baseplate
(to FBM241)
5.5 V 1 K
N-
Excitation Voltage
Source
125 V dc
(P0916QT/QU or P0916QV/QW**)
(field connections)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)
For 120 V ac Voltage Monitor Input with Input Excitation Terminals (FBM241)
Internal Connection
i+
Bx*
L+
L
V ac
+24 V dc
Ax*
i-
0.01
uF
Baseplate
(to FBM241)
5.5 V 1 K
N-
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)
Excitation Voltage
Source
120 V ac
(P0916QT/QU or P0916QV/QW**)
(field connections)
For 240 V ac Voltage Monitor Input with Input Excitation Terminals (FBM241)
Internal Connection
i+
i-
Bx*
L+
L
V ac
+24 V dc
Ax*
0.01
uF
5.5 V 1 K
N-
Excitation Voltage
Source
240 V ac
Baseplate
(to FBM241)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)
(P0916QX/QY or P0916QZ/NZ**)
(field connections)

**These termination assemblies provide signal conditioning and isolation for inputs.
170
Safety (This Side):

Zone 2, IIC
Hazardous Locations
Safety (This Side):

For 60 V dc Voltage Monitor Input (FBM241b)
i+
+
V dc
B0400FA Rev D
RL
i-
Baseplate
(to FBM241b)
Bx*
Ax*
Voltage
Source
(60 V dc)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)
(P0916JV/QN)
(field connections)
NOTE: Field circuitry must have entity parameters compatible with those of FBM241b (TA Part No.
P0916JV/QN) as listed in Table 5-2 for hazardous location applications.
Figure 5-71. FBM241b Input Connections
Safety (This Side):

Zone 2, IIC
Hazardous Locations
Safety (This Side):

For 24 V dc Contact Sense Input (FBM241c)
iS
i+
Contact or
Solid State
Switch (24 V dc)
Baseplate
(to FBM241c)
Bx*
Ax*
(P0916UD/SS or P0916JW/QP)
(field connections)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)

NOTE: Field circuitry must have entity parameters compatible with those of FBM241c (TA Part No.
P0916UD/SS or P0916JW/QP) as listed inTable 5-2 for hazardous location applications.
Figure 5-72. FBM241c Input Connections
171
B0400FA Rev D
Safety (This Side):

Zone 2, IIC
Hazardous Locations
Safety (This Side):

For 24 V dc Contact Sense Input (FBM241c)
Bx*
iS
i+
Baseplate
(to FBM241c)
Ax*
Contact or
Solid State
Switch (24 V dc)
Termination Cable
(P0916AW/AX or P0916QQ/QR) (37 pin to 37 pin)
(field connections)
NOTE: Field circuitry must have entity parameters compatible with those of FBM241c (P0916AW/AX
or P0916QQ/QR) as listed in Table 5-2 for hazardous location applications.
Figure 5-73. FBM241c Input Connections (Continued)
Safety (This Side):

Zone 2, IIC
Hazardous Locations
Safety (This Side):

For 24 V dc Contact Sense Input (FBM241d)
iS
i+
Bx*
Baseplate
(to FBM241d)
Ax*
Contact or
Solid State
Switch (24 V dc)
(P0916JX/QS)
(field connections)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)
NOTE: Field circuitry must have entity parameters compatible with those of FBM241d (TA Part No.
P0916JX/QS) as listed in Table 5-2 for hazardous location applications.
Figure 5-74. FBM241d Input Connections
172
B0400FA Rev D
Safety (This Side):

Zone 2, IIC
Hazardous Locations
Safety (This Side):

For 60 V dc Switch Output (FBM241)
oK
Load
**
V dc
Voltage Source
(60 V dc)
Termination Assembly (P0916AQ/AR)
**
V dc
Voltage Source
(60 V dc)
****
Baseplate
(to FBM241)
oC Ax*
oK
Load
Bx*
Bx*
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)
Baseplate
(to FBM241)
oC Ax*
Termination Assembly (P0916UY/UZ***)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)

***The P0916UY/UZ assembly provides no protection for the outputs of the FBM.
If the output exceeds 2 A or is shorted, damage to the module may occur.
****The termination assembly contains eight user-accessible fuses, one per output channel (3.15 A fuse,
Foxboro part number P0156KD).
P0916UY/UZ or P0916AQ/AR) as listed inTable 5-2 for hazardous location applications.
Figure 5-75. FBM241 Output Connections (Part 1)
173
B0400FA Rev D

For P0916QE only - 30 V dc at 5 A
For P0916QE, P0916AS, and P0916QT - 125 V dc at 600 mA with resistive load,
or 125 V dc at 250 mA with inductive load
-
+
V dc
Load
oC
NC
**
or
Cx*
Bx*
+
NC
NO
24 V dc
Baseplate
(to FBM241)
NO Ax*
(P0916QE/QF, P0916AS/AT, or P0916QT/QU***)
(field connections)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)
External Voltage Source:

For P0916QE, P0916AS, or P0916QT - 120 V ac at 5 A
For P0916QE, P0916QJ, or P0916QX - 240 V ac at 5 A
N
L
V ac
Load
oC
NC
**
or
Cx*
Bx*
+
NC
NO
24 V dc
Baseplate
(to FBM241)
NO Ax*
Termination Assembly (P0916QE, P0916AS,
P0916QJ/QK, P0916QT/QU, or P0916QX/QY***)
(field connections)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)

***Relay contacts can support up to 250 V ac at 5 A maximum. These assemblies are capable
of providing mixed signal types. (The design of the P0916QE/QF assembly is to provide adequate
signal segregation by locating the low voltage inputs on the same side as the termination cable
to the FBM.) It is recommended that one type of signal is used per assembly. You are responsible
for maintaining this segregation.
design limits current handling capability to 5 A per channel, 12 A per group of eight outputs.
Figure 5-76. FBM241 Output Connections (Continued, Part 2)
174
B0400FA Rev D
oC
Load
NC
**
Internal
Connection
24 V dc
Cx*
Bx*
Baseplate
(to FBM241)
NC
or
NO Ax*
NO
+
L+
+
Excitation
V dc
Voltage Source
125 V dc at 600 mA
with resistive load,
125 V dc at 250 mA
with inductive load
****
N-
NC
**
(P0916QG/QH or P0916QV/QW***)
(field connections)
oC
Load
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)
Internal
Connection
24 V dc
Cx*
Bx*
Baseplate
(to FBM241)
NC
or
NO Ax*
NO
+
L
Power
Distribution
V ac
Voltage Source:
N NFor P0916QG or
P0916QV - 120 V ac at 5 A
For P0916QL or
P0916QZ - 240 V ac at 5 A
L+
****
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)
(P0916QG/QH, P0916QL/QM,
P0916QV/QW, or P0916QZ/NZ***)
(field connections)

***Relay contacts can support up to 250 V ac at 5 A maximum. These assemblies are capable of
providing mixed signal types. It is recommended that one type of signal is used per assembly. You are
responsible for maintaining this segregation.
175
B0400FA Rev D
For Solid-State Switch Output with External dc Source (FBM241)
Load
V dc
NOx*
***
Blown
Fuse
Indicator
**
Disconnect
Solid
State
Switch
Baseplate
(to FBM241)
oCx*
Termination Assembly (P0917MX**)

(field connections)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)

**This termination assembly provides isolation, output disconnect, and output fuse (3.15 A,
Foxboro P. N. P0156KD) with blown fuse indication for each output.
***Diode protection required for inductive loads above 50 mH at 2 A. Inductive limit increases
by a factor of 4 for each factor of 2 reduction in current. Diode rating must be equal to
the maximum load current (Vdc/RL), and the voltage rating must be equal to 1.3 times the
maximum supply voltage.
For Solid-State Switch Output with External ac Source (FBM241)
N
Load
V ac
NOx*
***
Blown
Fuse
Indicator
**
Disconnect
Solid
State
Switch
Baseplate
(to FBM241)
oCx*
Termination Assembly (P0917MX**)

(field connections)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)

***MOV protection required for inductive loads above 20 mH at 2 A. Inductive limit increases
by a factor of 4 for each factor of 2 reduction in current. MOV must be rated for 120 V ac
use, and the current rating must be equal to the maximum load current (120Vac/RL).
176
Safety (This Side):

Zone 2, IIC
Hazardous Locations
B0400FA Rev D
Safety (This Side):

For Switch Output (Internal Source)
at 12 V dc at 15 mA Maximum (FBM241b)
oK
Load
Baseplate
(to FBM241b)
Bx*
oC Ax*
+
(P0916JV/QN**)
(field connections)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)

**This assembly provides no protection for the outputs of the FBM. If the output exceeds 2 A or is
shorted, damage to the module may occur.
NOTE: Field circuitry must have entity parameters compatible with those of FBM241b (TA Part No.
P0916JV/QN) as listed in Table 5-2for hazardous location applications.
Figure 5-79. FBM241b Output Connections
177
B0400FA Rev D
Safety (This Side):

Zone 2, IIC
Hazardous Locations
Safety (This Side):

For Switch Output (External Source) (FBM241c)
oK
Load
**
V dc
Voltage Source
(15 to 60 V dc)
Termination Assembly (P0916JW/QP)
**
V dc
Voltage Source
(15 to 60 V dc)
****
Baseplate
(to FBM241)
oC Ax*
oK
Load
Bx*
Bx*
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)
Baseplate
(to FBM241)
oC Ax*
Termination Assembly (P0916UD/SS***)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)

**Protective diode (customer-supplied) is recommended for a dc inductive load only.
***The P0916UD/SS assembly provides no protection for the outputs of the FBM. If the output exceeds
2 A or is shorted, damage to the module may occur.
****The termination assembly contains eight user-accessible fuses, one per output channel (3.15 A fuse,
NOTE: Field circuitry must have entity parameters compatible with those of FBM241c (TA Part No.
P0916UD/SS or P0916JW/QP) as listed inTable 5-2 for hazardous location applications.
Figure 5-80. FBM241c Output Connections (Part 1)
178
B0400FA Rev D
For Switch Output (External Source) (FBM241c) (Continued)

External Voltage Source***: 30 V dc at 5 A
V dc
Load
+ oC
Cx*
NC
**
or
Bx*
24 V dc
+
NC
NO
Baseplate
(to FBM241c)
NO Ax*
Termination Assembly (P0916AW/AX****) Termination Cable

(37 pin to 37 pin)
(field connections)
****These assemblies are capable of providing mixed signal types. It is recommended that one type
of signal is used per assembly. You are responsible for maintaining this segregation.
Figure 5-81. FBM241c Output Connections (Continued, Part 2)
For Switch Output (External Source) with Power Distribution Terminals (FBM241c)
oC
Load
NC
**
Internal
Connection
24 V dc
Cx*
Bx*
Baseplate
to
(FBM241c)
NC
or
NO Ax*
NO
+
Power
Distribution V dc
Voltage Source
(30 V dc at 5 A)
L+
+
-
****
N-
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)
Termination Assembly (P0916QQ/QR***)

(field connections)
*x indicates FBM channel
This assembly is capable of providing mixed signal types. It is recommended that one type of
signal is used per assembly. You are responsible for maintaining this segregation.
Figure 5-82. FBM241c Output Connections (Continued, Part 3)
179
B0400FA Rev D
Safety (This Side):

Zone 2, IIC
Hazardous Locations
Safety (This Side):

For Switch Output (Internal Source)
at 12 V dc at 15 mA Maximum (FBM241d)
oK
Load
Bx*
Baseplate
(to FBM241d)
oC Ax*
+
Termination Assembly (P0916JX/QS)
(field connections)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)

NOTE: Field circuitry must have entity parameters compatible with those of FBM241d (TA Part No.
P0916JX/QS) as listed in Table 5-2 for hazardous location applications.
Figure 5-83. FBM241d Output Connections
180
B0400FA Rev D
For all FBM241 FBM241, Voltage Monitor

8
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 I
TA Inputs
N
P
U
T
Customer
Labeling
8
Area
O
U
T
P
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ U
Printed I/O
Designators i- i- i- i- i- i- i- i- T
I/O
Connection
Points
For P0916UY/UZ FBM241, Switch (External) 8

and P0916AQ/AR 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 I
Outputs
N
P
U
T
8
O
U
T
P
oK oK oK oK oK oK oK oK U
oC oC oC oC oC oC oC oC T
B
A
B
A
For P0916QE/QF, P0916AS/AT, P0916QG/QH, P0916QT/QU, P0916QV/QW, P0916QJ/QK,

P0916QL/QM, P0916QX/QY, and P0916QZ/NZ Outputs
FBM241, Switch (External)
09
10
11
12
Customer
Labeling
Area
Printed I/O
Designators
I/O
Connection
Points
C
B
A
oC
oNC
oNO
oC
oNC
oNO
oC
oNC
oNO
8
I
N
P
U
T
8
O
U
T
oC P
oNC U
oNO T

13
14
15
16
For
External
Voltage
Source
L+
N-
oC
oNC
oNO
oC
oNC
oNO
oC
oNC
oNO
8
I
N
P
U
T
8
O
U
T
oC P
oNC U
oNO T
C
B
A
NOTE: External voltage source hot wiring can connect to either L+ screw terminal, and ground (return)
Figure 5-84. FBM241 Termination Assembly (TA) Labeling (Part 1)
181
B0400FA Rev D
For P0917MX Outputs

09
10
11
12
Customer
Labeling
Area
Printed I/O
Designators

13
14
15
16
8
I
N
P
U
T
8
O
U
T
P
U
T
NO oC NO oC NO oC NO oC
8
I
N
P
U
T
8
O
U
T
P
U
T
I/O
Connection
Points
Figure 5-85. FBM241 Termination Assembly (TA) Labeling (Continued, Part 2)
FBM241b, Voltage Monitor

8
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 I
N
P
U
T
Customer
Labeling
8
Area
O
U
T
P
i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ U
Printed I/O
Designators i- i- i- i- i- i- i- i- T
I/O
Connection
Points
B
A
FBM241b, Switch (Internal) 8

09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 I
N
P
U
T
8
O
U
T
P
B
A
Figure 5-86. FBM241b Termination Assembly (TA) Labeling
182
B0400FA Rev D
For all FBM241C FBM241c, Contact Sense

8
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 I
TA Inputs
N
P
U
T
Customer
Labeling
8
Area
O
U
T
P
iS iS iS iS iS iS iS iS U
Printed I/O
Designators i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ T
I/O
B
Connection
A
Points
FBM241c, Switch (External)

For
P0916UD/SS 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
and
P0916JW/QP
Outputs
8
I
N
P
U
T
8
O
U
T
P
B
A
For P0916AW/AX and

P0916QQ/QR Outputs
FBM241c, Switch (External) 8

09
10
11
12
I
N
P
U
Customer
T
Labeling
Area
8
O
U
T
oC
oC
oC
oC P
Printed I/O
oNC oNC oNC oNC U
Designators
oNO oNO oNO oNO T
I/O
Connection
Points
C
B
A
FBM241c, Switch (External) 8

13
14
15
16
I
N
P
U
T
8
O
U
T
oC
oC
oC
oC P
oNC oNC oNC oNC U
oNO oNO oNO oNO T
C
B
A
Figure 5-87. FBM241c Termination Assembly (TA) Labeling
183
B0400FA Rev D
FBM241d, Contact Sense

8
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 I
N
P
U
T
Customer
Labeling
8
Area
O
U
T
P
iS iS iS iS iS iS iS iS U
Printed I/O
Designators i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ i+ T
I/O
Connection
Points
FBM241d, Switch (Internal) 8

09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 I
N
P
U
T
8
O
U
T
P
B
A
B
A
Figure 5-88. FBM241d Termination Assembly (TA) Labeling
Current
Limiter
2.5 mA
2K
i+
0.01
uF
0.01
uF
60 VZ
1.78 K
i2K
FBM241 and FBM241b
Current
Limiter
2.5 mA
2K
iS
0.01
uF
60 VZ
1.78 K
i+
33.2 K
+
2.4 K
24 Volt
Power
Supply*
FBM241c and FBM241d
*The 24 V power supply is located within the module channels.

Figure 5-89. FBM241 Voltage Monitor or Contact Sense Input Circuits
184
Solid
State
Power
Switch
oK
B0400FA Rev D
oC
From
Logic oK
Circuit
+
12 Volt
Isolated
Power
oC
FBM241 and FBM241c (External Source)
Solid
State
Power
Switch
680
+
12 Volt
Isolated
Power
From
Logic
Circuit
FBM241b and FBM241d (Internal Source)
Figure 5-90. FBM241 Output Switch (for Internal or External Source) Circuits

FBM242 (Foxboro Part Number P0914TA) is a Channel Isolated Externally Sourced Discrete
Output Interface Module. Make the I/O connections for this FBM and its associated termination
assembly (TA) as shown in Figure 5-91, Figure 5-92, and Figure 5-93.
Table 5-47 lists the output signals supported by the termination assemblies used with FBM242,
associated TAs.
A schematic diagram of the FBM242 output circuitry is shown in Figure 5-97.
TA Part
Number1
Signal Inputs
#
Type
Signal Outputs
#
Type
Isolation
15 to 60 V dc at 2 A Switch (external source)

30 V dc at 5 A, 125 V dc at 600 mA
w/resistive load, or 125 V dc at 250 mA
w/inductive load, or 120 V ac at 5 A, or
240 V ac at 5 A Switch (external source)2
30 V dc at 5 A, 125 V dc at 600 mA w/
resistive load, or 125 V dc at 250 mA w/
inductive load, or, 120 V ac at 5 A, or
240 V ac at 5 A Switch (external source) with
excitation or power distribution voltage source
supplied outside loop (through TA)2
120 V ac/125 V dc at 2 A, solid-state switch
(external source)
Channel
Channel
P0916JY/RJ
P0916NG/RK
0
0
N/A
N/A
16
16
P0916JZ/RL
N/A
16
P0926BE
N/A
16
1.
2.
Group
Channel
185
B0400FA Rev D
P0916JY/RJ
0.5 m P0916FG
1.0 m P0916FH
3.0 m P0916FJ
5.0 m P0916FK
10.0 m P0916GE
0.5 m P0916FG
1.0 m P0916FH
3.0 m P0916FJ
5.0 m P0916FK
10.0 m P0916FL
P0916JZ/RL,
P0916NG/RK, or
P0926BE
Safety (This Side):

Zone 2, IIC
Hazardous Locations
**
V dc
Voltage Source
(60 V dc)
15.0 m P0916GF
20.0 m P0916GG
25.0 m P0916GH
30.0 m P0916GJ
15.0 m P0916FM
20.0 m P0916FN
25.0 m P0916FP
30.0 m P0916FQ
Safety (This Side):

oK
Load
Associated Cabling
Bx*
****
Baseplate
(to FBM242)
oC Ax*
Termination Assembly (P0916JY/RJ***)
(field connections)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)

***These assemblies are capable of providing mixed signal types. It is recommended that one type
****The termination assembly contains 16 user-accessible fuses, one per output channel (3.15 A fuse,
P0916JY/RJ) as listed in Table 5-2 for hazardous location applications.
Figure 5-91. FBM242 Output Connections (Part 1)
186
B0400FA Rev D

30 V dc at 5 A or 125 V dc at 5 A
+ oC
V dc
Load
NC
**
or
Cx*
Bx*
+
NC
NO
24 V dc
Baseplate
(to FBM242)
NO Ax*
Termination Assembly (P0916NG/RK****)
(field connections)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)

120 V ac at 5 A or 240 V ac at 5 A
N
V ac
Load
L oC
Cx*
NC
**
or
Bx*
+
NC
NO
24 V dc
Baseplate
(to FBM242)
NO Ax*
Termination Assembly (P0916NG/RK****)
(field connections)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)

**Protective diode (customer-supplied) is recommended for a dc inductive load only.
****These assemblies are capable of providing mixed signal types. It is recommended that one type
187
B0400FA Rev D
oC
Load
NC
**
Internal
Connection
24 V dc
Cx*
Bx*
NC
or
NO Ax*
NO
+
L+
+
Excitation
V dc
Voltage Source
(30 V dc at 5 A or
125 V dc at 5 A)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)
Termination Assembly (P0916JZ/RL***)

(field connections)
Internal
Connection
24 V dc
Cx*
NC
**
****
N-
oC
Load
Baseplate
(to
FBM242)
Bx*
Baseplate
(to
FBM242)
NC
or
NO Ax*
NO
+
L+
L
Power
V ac
Distribution
Voltage Source
(120 V ac at 5 A or
240 V ac at 5 A)
N N-
****
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)
Termination Assembly (P0916JZ/RL***)

(field connections)

This assembly is capable of providing mixed signal types. It is recommended that one type of
signal is used per assembly. You are responsible for maintaining this segregation.
channels in these termination assemblies (15 A fuse, Foxboro part number P0156EW).
Current is limited for all eight channels to 12 A total.
188
B0400FA Rev D
For Solid-State Switch Output with External dc Source (FBM242)
Load
V dc
NOx*
***
Blown
Fuse
Indicator
**
Disconnect
Solid
State
Switch
Baseplate
(to FBM242)
oCx*
Termination Assembly (P0926BE**)

(field connections)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)

***Diode protection required for inductive loads above 50 mH at 2 A. Inductive limit increases
by a factor of 4 for each factor of 2 reduction in current. Diode rating must be equal to
the maximum load current (Vdc/RL), and the voltage rating must be equal to 1.3 times the
maximum supply voltage.
For Solid-State Switch Output with External ac Source (FBM242)
N
Load
V ac
NOx*
***
Blown
Fuse
Indicator
**
Disconnect
Solid
State
Switch
Baseplate
(to FBM242)
oCx*
Termination Assembly (P0926BE**)

(field connections)
Termination Cable
(37 pin to 37 pin)

***MOV protection required for inductive loads above 20 mH at 2 A. Inductive limit increases
by a factor of 4 for each factor of 2 reduction in current. MOV must be rated for 120 V ac
use, and the current rating must be equal to the maximum load current (120Vac/RL).
189
B0400FA Rev D
For P0916JY/RJ
Outputs
Customer
Labeling
Area

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
O
U
T
P
U
T

09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
O
U
T
P
U
T
Printed I/O
Designators
oK oK oK oK oK oK oK oK
oC oC oC oC oC oC oC oC
oK oK oK oK oK oK oK oK
oC oC oC oC oC oC oC oC
I/O
Connection
Points
B
A
For P0916NG/RK
and P0916JZ/RL
Outputs
B
A

01
02
03
04
Customer
Labeling
Area
Printed I/O
Designators
I/O
Connection
Points
oC
oNC
oNO
oC
oNC
oNO
oC
oNC
oNO
oC
oNC
oNO
oC
oNC
oNO
Customer
Labeling
Area
C
B
A
oC
oNC
oNO
oC
oNC
oNO
oC
oNC
oNO
C
B
A
09
10
11
12
I/O
Connection
Points
O
U
T
P
U
T
C
B
A
Printed I/O
Designators

05
06
07
08
O
U
T
P
U
T
16
oC
oNC
oNO
oC
oNC
oNO
oC
oNC
oNO

13
14
15
16
O
U
T
P
U
T
16
O
U
T
P
U
T
oC
oNC
oNO
oC
oNC
oNO
oC
oNC
oNO
oC
oNC
oNO
oC
oNC
oNO
C
B
A
For External
Voltage
Source for
P0916JZ/RL
L+
N-
NOTE: External voltage source hot wiring can connect to either L+ screw terminal, and ground (return)
Figure 5-95. FBM242 Termination Assembly (TA) Labeling (Part 1)
190
B0400FA Rev D
For P0926BE Outputs

01
02
03
04
Customer
Labeling
Area
Printed I/O
Designators

05
06
08
08
16
16
O
U
T
P
U
T
O
U
T
P
U
T

09
10
11
12

13
14
15
16
I/O
Connection
Points
Customer
Labeling
Area
Printed I/O
Designators
16
16
O
U
T
P
U
T
O
U
T
P
U
T
I/O
Connection
Points
Figure 5-96. FBM242 Termination Assembly (TA) Labeling (Continued, Part 2)
191
B0400FA Rev D
Solid
State
Power
Switch
oK
From Logic
Circuit
+
12 Volt
Isolated
Power
oC
Figure 5-97. FBM242 Channel Isolated Output Switch (for External Source) Circuits

FBM243 (Foxboro Part Number P0914TK) is the Channel Isolated FoxCom Dual Baud Rate
Intelligent Device Interface Module. Make the I/O connections for this FBM and its associated
termination assembly (TA) as shown in Figure 5-98.
Table 5-49 lists the signals supported by the termination assemblies used with FBM243, and
Table 5-50 provides the part numbers for the termination cables used with FBM243 and its associated TAs.
A schematic diagram of the FBM243 circuitry is shown in Figure 5-100.
Signal
TA Part
Number1
P0916BA
P0917XW
1.
Type
Isolation
Bidirectional digital communications

(for use with non-intrinsic safety applications)
(for use with intrinsic safety applications)
Channel
Channel
P0916BA, P0917XW
192
Associated Cabling
0.5 m P0916DA
1.0 m P0916DB
3.0 m P0916DC
5.0 m P0916DD
10.0 m P0916DE
15.0 m P0916DF
20.0 m P0916DG
25.0 m P0916DH
30.0 m P0916DJ
B0400FA Rev D
Safety (This side)

Safety (This side)
Class I, II, III; Div.2 Class I; Div. 2; Groups A-D;
Groups A-D,
F and G;
Internally (FBM) Powered Transmitter
Zone 2, IIC
Hazardous locations
+
cP Cx*
Transmitter
c+
Bx*
Baseplate
(to FBM243)
c- Ax*
Termination Assembly (P0916BA,
P0917XW) (Field Connections)
Termination Cable
Internally (FBM) Powered Transmitter with Intrinsic Safety Barrier
+
Transmitter
Intrinsic
Safety
Barrier
cP
c+
Cx*
Bx*
Baseplate
(to FBM243)
c- Ax*
Termination Assembly (P0916BA,
P0917XW) (Field Connections)
Termination Cable
Externally Powered Transmitter with Intrinsic Safety Barrier
(P0916BA,P0917XW)
(field connections)
Cx*
cP
c+ Bx*
+
Transmitter
Intrinsic Safety +
Barrier
Field
System
Cable
1
1
2 Balun 2
3 Module 3
4
4
5
5
6 CBM-4 6
7
7
8 P0903SV 8
c-
Ax*
Baseplate
(to FBM243)
Refer to Note 3
External Power
Supply
Termination Cable
Cable Balun Module

NOTES:
1. Field Circuitry must have entity parameters compatible with those of
5-2 for hazardous
.
FBM243 (TA part No. P0916BA, P0917XW) as listed in Table
location applications.
2. The TAs for use in Non-Intrinsic Safety loops have a 51 ohm resistor and the TAs for use
with Intrinsic Safety loops have no resistor.
3. Each input requires separate connections to Power Supply.
Figure 5-98. FBM243 Input/Output Connections
193
B0400FA Rev D
P0916BA
P0917XW
8
C
O
M
M
U
N
I
C
A
T
cP cP cP cP cP cP cP cP I
c+ c+ c+ c+ c+ c+ c+ c+ O
c- c- c- c- c- c- c- c- N
8
FBM243/246, FoxCom
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 C
O
M
M
U
N
I
C
A
Use with Intrinsic Safety
barrier
T
c+ c+ c+ c+ c+ c+ c+ c+ O
c- c- c- c- c- c- c- c- N
FBM243/246, FoxCom
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
Customer
Labeling
Area
Printed I/O
Designators
I/O
Connection C
B
Points
A
C
B
A
FBM243 used with Intrinsic Safety Barrier
FBM243
23.1 to 25.3 V dc
cP
68.1
301 k
24 V dc
REGULATOR
TRANSMIT
ENABLE
16.2 k
c-
24 V dc
200 KHz
136
c+
4.7 F 51
TRANSMIT
DRIVER
RECEIVE
FILTER
TRANSMIT
SIGNAL
RECEIVE
SIGNAL

FBM246 (Foxboro Part Number P0917XN) is the Channel Isolated FoxCom Redundant Dual
Baud Rate Intelligent Device Interface to Intelligent Field Devices. Make the I/O connections for
this FBM and its associated termination assembly (TA) as shown in Figure 5-101.
Table 5-51 lists signals supported by the termination assemblies used with FBM246, and
Table 5-52 provides the part numbers for the termination cables used with FBM246 and its associated TAs.
A schematic diagram of the FBM246 circuitry is shown in Figure 5-103.
194
B0400FA Rev D
Signal
TA Part
Number
P0916BA
P0917XW
Type
Isolation

(for use with non-intrinsic safety applications)
(for use with intrinsic safety applications)
Redundant
Channel
Redundant
Channel
P0916BA, P0917XW
Associated Cabling
0.5 m P0916DA
1.0 m P0916DB
3.0 m P0916DC
5.0 m P0916DD
10.0 m P0916DE
15.0 m P0916DF
20.0 m P0916DG
25.0 m P0916DH
30.0 m P0916DJ
Where the FBM246 is used (redundant pair or single module), the redundant adapter
(P0917VU) must be installed on the FBMs two adjacent field connectors on the baseplate, as
described in Redundant Adapter Installation on page 73.
195
B0400FA Rev D
Safety (This side)

Safety (This side)
Zone 2, IIC; Hazardous locations
Groups A-D,
F and G;
Zone 2, IIC
Internally (FBM) Powered Transmitter
Hazardous
locations
To
FBM246
(primary
module)
TestcP
cP Cx*
+
Transmitter
c+
c+ Bx*
136W cTestcP
c- Ax*
(P0916BA, P0917XW)
(field connections)
c+
Test
c-
Termination
Cable
To
FBM246
Redundant Adapter (redundant
(P0917VU)
module)
To
FBM246
(primary
module)
Internally (FBM) Powered Transmitter with Intrinsic Safety Barrier
Test
+
Transmitter
Intrinsic
Safety
Barrier
cP Cx*
c+
136W cTest
cP
c+ Bx*
c- Ax*
c+
Test
(P0916BA, P0917XW)
(field connections)
cP
c-
Termination Cable
To
FBM246
Redundant Adapter (redundant
(P0917VU)
module)
(figure continued on next page)
196
B0400FA Rev D
Safety (this side)

Safety (this side)
Groups A-D,
Zone 2, IIC; Hazardous locations
F and G;
Zone 2, IIC
Externally Powered Transmitter with Intrinsic Safety Barrier
Hazardous locations
To
FBM246
(primary
module)
Test
(P0916BA,P0917XW)
(field connections) Cx*
c+
+
Transmitter
System
Field
Cable
1
1
2 Balun 2
3 Module 3
4
4
5
5
6 CBM-4 6
7
7
8 P0903SV 8
Intrinsic Safety +
Barrier
Cable Balun Module
cP
c+
136W cTest
cP
Bx*
c- Ax*
c+
Test
(P0916BA)
c-
Refer to Note 3
Termination Cable
External Power
Supply
To
FBM246
(redundant
module)
Redundant Adapter
(P0917VU)
NOTES:
P0916BA, P0917XW) as listed in Table 5-2 for hazardous location applications.
2. Redundant Adapter (P0917VU) must be used with the FBM246.
3. Each input requires separate connections to Power Supply.
Figure 5-101. FBM246 with Redundant Adapter Connections
P0916BA
8
C
O
M
M
U
N
I
C
A
T
c+ c+ c+ c+ c+ c+ c+ c+ O
c- c- c- c- c- c- c- c- N
FBM243/246, FoxCom
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
Customer
Labeling
Area
Printed
I/O
Designators
I/O
Connection
Points
P0917XW
8
FBM243/246, FoxCom
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 C
O
M
M
U
N
I
C
Use with Intrinsic safety
A
barrier
T
c+ c+ c+ c+ c+ c+ c+ c+ O
c- c- c- c- c- c- c- c- N
C
B
A
C
B
A
197
B0400FA Rev D
23.5 to 25.7 V dc
cP
68.1
301 k
24 V dc
REGULATOR
24 V dc
200 KHz
TRANSMIT
ENABLE
16.2 k
cc+
4.7 F 51
TRANSMIT
DRIVER
RECEIVE
FILTER
TRANSMIT
SIGNAL
RECEIVE
SIGNAL
Using the Cable Balun Module with Intelligent

Transmitters
The Cable Balun (P0903SV) Module maintains digital communication line balance between up
to four Intelligent Transmitters (ITs) and FBM channels when there are FBM loops that are powered by a common external power supply. Figure 5-104 illustrates the electrical connections to the
cable balun module from Intelligent Field Devices, an external power supply, and FBMs for Intelligent Transmitters such as FBM243 or FBM246. The cable balun module contains four baluns
and can accept connections from four FBM channels, four transmitters, and an external power
supply.
198
FBM243 +
or
FBM246 -
B0400FA Rev D
Cable Balun Module P0903SV

Field
System 1
1
2
2 + Field device
FBM243 +
or
FBM246 -
Separate
Returns
Field device
To Negative Terminal of
External Power Supply
+ Bus
- Bus
+
-
External
24 V dc
Power
Supply
Figure 5-104. Cable Balun Module with Intelligent Field device powered by a
Common Power Supply
Installing the Cable Balun Module

The Cable Balun Module (P0903SV) is normally mounted on a DIN rail in the enclosure, nearest the FBM(s) associated with it. The back of the module fits to the DIN rail. Two strain relief
brackets secure the module to the rail and also provide tie points for the cable wiring. To install
the module, refer to Figure 5-104 and Figure 5-105 and perform the following steps:
1. Orient the module as shown in the front view and slip the module against the DIN
rail (1).
2. Locate the two DIN rail mounting and the two cable strain relief brackets, and install
them on the DIN rail on the top and bottom of the module. The end of each bracket
(with the holes for the wire tie) should face toward the middle of the enclosure.
3. With the module in one hand, slide the strain relief brackets vertically with your other
hand, to the location on the rail where you want to mount and secure the module.
4. Press the other side of the module item 3 in against the DIN rail until it snaps in
place. Slide the brackets securely against the module.
5. Insert the positive wires to an FBM and the associated IT in the holes associated with
item 4 and item 5 respectively, and secure each of these wires by tightening the associated screw against the wire with a small flat-bladed screw driver. The positive module
terminals are: 1, 3, 5, and 7. Choose one of these terminals on each side of the Balun
Module.
199
B0400FA Rev D
6. The negative wires from the FBMs are dressed and secured to the common negative
node of the external power supply (see Figure 5-104). Wire the terminals 2, 4, 6, or 8
of the Balun Module on the FBM (system) side to the external power supply as
shown.
7. Connect the negative polarity wire of the external power supply to one of the terminals (6) shown in Figure 5-105.
8. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for each FBM and IT associated with this module.
DIN Rail
1
DIN Rail Mounting and Cable

Strain Relief Bracket (Qty. 2)
Top View
4
To Intelligent
Transmitter
FIELD
CABLE
SIDE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SYSTEM
SIDE
CABLE
BALUN
MODULE
CBM - 4
P0903SV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
To FBM
TO NEGATIVE TERMINAL
OF EXT. POWER SUPPLY
Front View
Figure 5-105. Installing the Cable Balun Module
Termination Assembly Relays

The following functional specifications apply to the relays used in the termination assemblies,
where indicated above.
Contact Data
The contact data in Table 5-53 applies to the relays used in the termination assemblies.
200
B0400FA Rev D
Table 5-53. Termination Assembly Relays Contact Data
1-Pole Type
Load
Rated load
Contact material
Carry current
Maximum operating voltage
Maximum operating current
Maximum switching capacity
Minimum permissible load
Resistive Load (p.f. = 1)

10 A at 250 V ac
10 A at 30 V dc
AgCdO
10 A
380 V ac, 125 V ac
10 A
2500 VA, 300 W
100 mA, 5 V dc
Inductive Load (p.f. = 0.4)

(L/R = 7 ms)
7.5 A at 250 V ac
5 A at 30 V dc
1875 VA, 150 W
Characteristic Data
The following sections provide the characteristic data for the relays used in the termination
assemblies.
Maximum Switching Capacity

Figure 5-106 provides a graph illustrating the maximum switching capacity of the relays used in
the termination assemblies.
Figure 5-106. Maximum Switching Capacity for Relays Used in Termination Assemblies
201
B0400FA Rev D
Electrical Service Life

Figure 5-107 provides a graph illustrating the limits of the electrical service life of the relays used
in the termination assemblies.
Figure 5-107. Electrical Service Life for Relays Used in Termination Assemblies
The termination assembly design limits of 5 A per channel results in an electrical service life for
the relay of:
200,000 operations at 250 V ac at 5 A (inductive loading)
250,000 operations at 30 V dc at 5 A (resistive loading)
250,000 operations at 250 V ac at 5 A (resistive loading).
202
6. Configuration Information
This chapter provides system configuration information (System Definition) and control
configuring information (Integrated Control Configuration).
In general, configuration means specifying, to the I/A Series system software, the types of hardware and software modules that comprise the system, and the control blocks that will be used in
the control scheme. Prior to performing configuration procedures, you are encouraged to develop
I/O signal lists. Then, using FoxCAE, you should develop loop control schemes and loop drawings to document the control scheme. From the signal lists and loop drawings, you can determine
the type and quantity of DIN rail mounted FBMs required for your control scheme.
System Definition
NOTE
1. To minimize interruption of the process, it is advisable to perform System Definition prior to installing the DIN-rail mounted FBM subsystem equipment.
2. If the host I/A Series system is on-line (currently controlling the process), it may
be desirable to perform Integrated Control Configuration on-line, prior to performing System Definition. Using this method, process control using the DIN rail
mounted FBM subsystem equipment can commence immediately (following equipment installation), with the System Definition update being deferred until a more
convenient time.
To perform Integrated Control Configuration on-line, refer to On-Line Control
Configuration using the ICC on page 218.
System Definition identifies the I/A Series system components, system software required by each
component, the system component letterbugs, and other system characteristics for correctly loading system software and identifying the system software objects. System Definition produces a
Commit disk, which is required for software installation and, therefore, must be completed before
software installation. It is initially performed prior to installation of the system equipment, and it
is updated with any hardware/software system changes. Reports produced by System Definition
define the network of the system and provide information that can be used in conjunction with
equipment installation. In the future, if changes are made to the initial hardware layout, the System Definition database must be updated to reflect these changes.
Using System Definition, you define the type and quantity of modules, the letterbugs of the
FCM(s) and FBMs, and the software (for example, digital input, ladder logic, and so forth) for
the FBMs.
203
B0400FA Rev D
Letterbug (Module Identifier) Assignments

The baseplate-mounted modules (FBMs and FCMs) are identified to system software by means
of unique, 6-character strings called letterbugs. The letterbug strings are physically established
on a baseplate (or group of baseplates) as part of the equipment installation (see Letterbug Set
Installation on page 71). They are also entered by you as part of the System Definition procedure, in the following subsection.
System Definition Procedure

To perform System Definition, refer to System Definition: A Step-By-Step Procedure (B0193WQ)
and configure the I/A Series system as described therein. The following describes the selection and
assignment of FBM and FCM letterbugs using the System Definition software.
From the Hardware Definition screen, perform the following:
1. Select Create from the top menu bar.
2. Select Field Modules from the drop-down menu.
3. From the Create Field Modules dialog box, select the type and quantity of FBMs and
FCMs required in the entire system. [Note that for each redundant FBM to be
included, two FBMs of that same type must be specified (for example, two FBM205s
must be specified for a redundant pair).]
4. After you have completed selecting the FBMs and FCMs, select OK. System Definition returns to the Hardware Definition screen, and the MODULES portion of the
Hardware Definition screen lists the selected FBMs and FCMs.
5. Change the default letterbug (first four characters), if desired, of each FCM or redundant FCM. (Note that the last two letterbug characters for the FCM must be 00.)
6. Select each FBM and FCM by clicking to the left of each of them. (Note that here,
and in later steps, blue highlighting of the item signifies selected.)
7. Select Attach from the top menu bar, and select To Fieldbus from the drop-down
menu.
8. From the Attach Modules to Fieldbus dialog box:
a. Select the station (for example, CP60) to which you want to assign the FBMs and
FCMs.
b. Select the FBMs and FCMs that you want to assign to the station. (To select a
group of FBMs, hold the Ctrl key and click on the desired FBMs.)
c. Select Attach.
d. Repeat a through c (above) for each station.
e. Select Close.
9. Select Assign from the top menu bar.
10. Select FCM Module from the drop-down menu.
204
B0400FA Rev D
11. From the FCM Module dialog box:

a. Select the FCM to which you want attach FBMs.
b. Select an FBM or group of FBMs that you want to attach to the selected FCM.
(To select a group of FBMs, hold the Ctrl key and click on the desired FBMs.) As
you assign (Step 11c) an FBM or group of FBMs to an FCM, they are assigned
the first four characters of the FCM letterbug, and the last two characters of the
letterbug corresponding to the FBMs position on baseplate. The assigned position in the baseplate is based on the sequence in which you select and Assign the
modules. If you assign a single FBM to an FCM, the FBM is assigned the next
sequential position on the baseplate. If you select a group of FBMs, the sequential
assigned position is the same sequence as the modules appear (top to bottom) in
the dialog box.
c. Select Assign.
d. Repeat for each FCM and/or FBM (a through c above).
e. Select Close.
NOTE
A printout of the FCM information, and the assigned letterbugs positions for each
FBM, may be obtained at this time by selecting File, then Print Preview. This
printed out information may be used as a check, to ensure that the associated FBMs
are installed in baseplate positions that were configured by System Definition.
If the complement of FBMs includes discrete (digital) FBMs (which require userselection of an optional software package), perform Steps 12, 13, and 14. Otherwise,
go to Step 15.
12. Select Assign from the top menu bar.
13. Select Software from the drop-down menu. (Note that if discrete FBMs are not
included in the configuration, Software will not be pickable.)
14. From the Software Assign dialog box:
a. Select an FBM or group of FBMs for which you want to select optional software.
b. Select the Optional Software Package for each FBM or group of FBMs.
c. Repeat Steps a and b for each FBM or group of FBMs.
d. Select Assign.
e. Select Close.
15. Continue to define the system as described in System Definition, Step-By-Step
Procedure (B0193WQ).
When System Definition is completed, perform one of the following operations:
If this is a new (as opposed to existing) I/A Series system, install the system software.
[Refer to Software Installation (Solaris Platform) (B0193JG).]
If this is an existing (previously configured) I/A Series system, specify to the currently
installed system software that hardware items have been added to the system. [Refer to
Software Installation (Solaris Platform) (B0193JG).]
205
B0400FA Rev D
Integrated Control Configuration

I/A Series provides two utilities for configuring control data bases:
FoxCAE (Computer Aided Engineering for I/A Series Control Processor Databases)
Integrated Control Configurator (ICC).
These utilities allow you to modify existing I/A Series control schemes or create entirely new
applications. FoxCAE has the advantage that it can be used to configure control schemes prior to
installation of the actual equipment. It can be run on virtually any PC having Windows 95 software, and its generated database is easily loaded into the systems control processor 60 (CP60)
once the I/A Series system is installed.
The software interface between the control logic and the process is provided by Equipment Control Blocks (ECBs) specific to the Fieldbus Modules (FBMs), and control blocks used throughout
the I/A Series system. Actual control of the process is performed by compounds, consisting of
control blocks, which you configure. (Figure 6-1 shows a typical application of control blocks.)
The I/A Series system offers a wide range of control blocks, providing solutions for a broad spectrum of process control applications. For details on the selection and usage of control blocks, refer
to Integrated Control Block Descriptions (B0193AX), and to DIN Rail Mounted FBM Control
Schemes on page 247.
4-20 MA
Remote Setpoint
4-20 MA
Meas.
FBM204
To/From
Process
ECB
02
Output
4-20 MA
Alarm
Status High
Contact
Out
Contact
Out
FBM241
DIN Rail Mounted

FBM Enclosure
ECB
05
Alarm
Status Low
AIN
A
I
N
PID
AOUT
COUT
ALM
COUT
Control Compound
(I/A Series Software)
Figure 6-1. Typical Control Scheme using DIN Rail Mounted FBM Subsystem
NOTE
For more comprehensive information regarding integrated control configuration,

refer to Integrated Control Configurator (B0193AV).
FoxCAE and the ICC, which are accessed through the process engineers environment at an
I/A Series workstation, allow you to configure control blocks relating, in this case, to the DIN rail
mounted FBMs. The general procedure is to create a compound name under which the blocks
will be created and run, and then create and integrate the desired control blocks.
206
B0400FA Rev D
Using the FoxCAE or ICC, you create an Equipment Control Block (ECB) for each FBM in the
DIN rail mounted FBM subsystem. (The ECB serves as a holding place for the devices software data.) You then go on to configure the necessary control blocks and compounds for the
desired control scheme.
The FoxCAE or ICC lets you modify configuration data for on-line stations (for example, a Control Processor 60) or off-line library volumes. (A library volume is a dummy configuration
which may be loaded into the Control Processor (CP) when creation and/or editing are completed.) As a compound/block editor, the FoxCAE or ICC provides compound or block building
templates along with a full range of editing functions.
Control configuration for the DIN rail mounted FBM subsystem is divided into the following
procedures:
Off-Line Control Configuration using FoxCAE on page 209 or Off-Line Control
Configuration using the ICC on page 213 is intended for use when a new system is
being configured typically, when the DIN rail mounted FBM subsystem is being
included in new (overall) system configuration.
On-Line Control Configuration using the ICC on page 218 is intended for use for
when a previous I/A Series configuration is being updated to include the DIN rail
mounted FBM subsystem.
NOTE
As indicated in a note on page 203, if the host I/A Series system is on-line (currently
controlling the process), it may be desirable to perform Control Configuration online, prior to updating the System Definition. If this is the case, perform the procedure under On-Line Control Configuration using the ICC on page 218.
For reference purposes, Table 6-1 lists the DIN rail mounted FBMs, along with associated ECBs
and the number of available I/O points.
Table 6-1. DIN Rail Mounted FBMs and Related ECBs
FBM
FBM201
FBM202
FBM203
FBM204
Functional Description
ECB
01
01
01
02
FBM205
8 Analog In, 0 to 20 mA
8 Thermocouple/mV In
8 RTD In
4 Analog In, 4 Analog Out,
0 to 20 mA
As FBM204, Redundant
FBM206
FBM207
8 Pulse Input
16 Voltage Monitor/Contact Sense
FBM211
FBM212
FBM213
16 Analog Input, 0 to 20 mA
14 Thermocouple/mV Input
8 RTD Input
04
05, 06,
07, 08,
01
01
01
02
ECB Type
Valid Points
Analog Input
Analog Input
Analog Input
Analog Input/
Analog Output
Analog Input/
Analog Output
Pulse Rate In
Discrete Input
1 to 8
1 to 8
1 to 8
1 to 4 AI,
5 to 8 AO
1 to 4 AI,
5 to 8 AO
1 to 8
1 to 16
Analog Input
Analog Input
Analog Input
1 to 16
1 to 14
1 to 8
207
B0400FA Rev D
Table 6-1. DIN Rail Mounted FBMs and Related ECBs (Continued)
FBM
FBM214
FBM215
FBM216
FBM217
FBM218
FBM219
Functional Description
ECB
ECB Type
200
201
HART (Note 1)
200
201
HART, Redundant Ready (Note 1) 200
201
32 Discrete Input
05, 06,
07, 08
HART, Redundant Ready (Note 1) 200
201
32 Voltage Monitor/Contact Sense 08
05
FBM
Device
FBM
Device
FBM
Device
Discrete Input
HART (Note 1)
FBM220/
FBM221
FOUNDATION fieldbus H1
Interface (Note 2)
FBM223
Profibus-DP (Note 3)
FBM224
Modbus Interface (Note 4)
FBM237
FBM241
8 Analog Output, 0 to 20 mA
16 Voltage Monitor/Contact Sense
FBM242
FBM243
16 Discrete Outputs
8 Bidirectional Channels
FBM246
8 Bidirectional Channels
200
201
200
201
200
201
53
08
05
05, 08
73
18, 74
38R
18, 74
FBM
Device
Ladder Logic
Discrete Input/
Output
FBM
Device
FBM
Device
FBM
Device
Analog Output
Ladder Logic
Discrete Input/
Output
Discrete Output
FoxCom
Interface
FoxCom
Interface
Valid Points
1 to 8
1 to 8
1 to 8
1 to 32
1 to 8
1 to 24 CIN,
25 to 32 COUT
See Note 2 below.
1 to 8
1 to 8 CIN,
9 to 16 COUT
1 to 16
Up to 8 total
Up to 8 total
NOTES:
1. Refer to HART Communication Interface Module (FBM214/215/216/218) Users Guide (B0400FF) for
details.
2. Refer to FOUNDATION fieldbus H1 Communication Interface Modules (FBM220/FBM221) Users
Guide (B0400FD) for details.
For FBM220, the maximum number of point connects is 24, on a maximum of 16 devices; for FBM221, it is
64 point connects (or 16 per port on a maximum of 8 devices per port). Note also that each analog or discrete
output requires two point connects: one for the output and one for the read-back.
3. Refer to Profibus-DP Communication Interface Module (FBM223) Users Guide (B0400FE) for details.
4. Refer to Modbus Communication Interface Module (FBM224) Users Guide (B0400FK) for details.
208
B0400FA Rev D
The following control blocks may be used in conjunction with the Control Processor 60:
ACCUM
AIN
AINR
ALMPRI
AOUT
AOUTR
BIAS
BIN
BINR
BLNALM
BOOL
BOUT
CALC
CALCA
CHARC
CIN
CMPND
COUT
DEP
DGAP
DTIME
ECBP
EVENT
EXC
FBTUNE
FFTUNE
GDEV
IND
LIM
LLAG
LOGIC
LONG
MAIN
MATH
MCIN
MCOUT
MEALM
MON
MOVLV
MSG
MTR
MVC
MVL
PACK
PATALM
PATT
PID
PIDA
PIDE
PIDX
PIDXE
PLB
PTC
RAMP
RATIO
REAL
REALM
RIN
RINR
ROUT
SIGSEL
STALM
STATE
STRIN
STRING
SWITCH
TIM
VLV
SIGSEL
Off-Line Control Configuration using FoxCAE

FoxCAE is an off-line control configuration utility that runs on a stand-alone Windows NT
platform or on the same I/A Series server on which the ICC is loaded. Control schemes developed
using FoxCAE are transferred to ICC for downloading to the CP. You can transfer complete control schemes or newly added control compounds from FoxCAE to the CP using ICC. After the
control scheme or control compound(s) are transferred, they are downloaded to the CP using
ICC. The following is a listing of major steps that are performed to accomplish off-line integrated
control configuration using FoxCAE.
NOTE
1. The FBM ECBs, as created in the following procedure, can be placed in the stations <CPLBUG>_ECB compound, or they can be dispersed throughout the various control compounds. Placing them in the <CPLBUG>_ECB compound is
generally more convenient, and provides for convenient switching of the ECBs
on/line and off/line. However, placing the FBM ECBs in the control compounds
(that is, in the same compounds as the I/O blocks which use that ECB to access the
FBM) can sometimes provide improved system performance.
2. If the FBM ECBs are placed in the <CPLBUG>_ECB compound, they should be
arranged as the first blocks in the listing.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Create a project directory on the PC.

Open a project directory in FoxCAE.
Add a control processor to the database.
Add compounds to the control station (CP60) database.
5. Add a STATION block to CP6001_STA compound.

6. Add ECB blocks to the CP6001_ECB compound.
209
B0400FA Rev D
7. Save the FoxCAE database compounds to diskette.

8. Transfer the FoxCAE database to the CP60.
Following is a detailed example of the operation. For more information on developing control
schemes and the transfer databases to the control processor using FoxCAE, refer to
FoxCAE Version 3.0 (B0193MR).
Example of Off-Line Configuration using FoxCAE

The following is an example of off-line integrated control configuration using FoxCAE. The following hardware items and associated letterbug numbers are used in this example:
Control Processor 60
FCM
FBM202
FBM204
FBM241
FBM241
CP6001
SLOT00
SLOT03
SLOT04
SLOT05
SLOT06
This procedure places the newly created FBM and FCM ECBs in the stations
<CPLBUG>_ECB compound.
1. Create a project directory on the PC:
a. Click Start on PC Windows 95.
b. Choose Programs > Windows Explorer.
c. Click C:.
d. Click File.
e. Move cursor to New and choose Folder.
f. Enter cp60dbase (this is user-defined).
g. Click on File.
h. Click on Close.
2. Open a project directory in FoxCAE:
a. Click Start on PC Windows 95.
b. Choose Programs > FoxCAE.
c. Click FoxCAE 3.0.2. (or higher version)
d. A dialog box appears with Select a Database. Click Enter.
e. Click Select.
f. A dialog box appear with Select Directory. Double click C:\.
g. Choose a path (cp60dbase).
h. Click Select, then click Install.
i. A dialog box appears with Install a new database No Yes. Click Yes.
j. A dialog box appears with Select Library Path. Click Drive.
k. Double click C:\.
l. Double click foxcae30.
210
B0400FA Rev D
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
Click example.
Click Select.
Click OK.
Press Enter.
A dialog box appears with Release.
Click on Software Version (6.2), then click OK.
A dialog box appears with Table(s) has been updated. Click OK and then click
OK again.
3. Add a control processor to the database:
a. Click CP Database in the Working Areas, System Database window.
b. Click CP.
c. Click Add CP.
d. Enter CP6001. Click OK.
e. Choose CP60 in the List of CP Types window. Click on OK.
4. Add compounds to the CP60 database:
a. Click Compound.
b. Click Append Compound.
c. Enter CP6001_STA beside the Compound dialog box. Click on OK.
d. Click Compound.
e. Click Append Compound.
f. Type in CP6001_ECB beside the Compound dialog box. Click OK.
5. Add a STATION block to the CP6001_STA compound:
a. Click CP6001_STA in the Compound # Default window so that it becomes highlighted.
b. Click END CON1 in the Block # Type Default window so that it becomes highlighted.
c. Click Block.
d. Click Append Block.
e. Enter STATION.
f. Use the arrows to cursor through the Type window, and click STA. Click on OK.
6. Add ECB blocks to the CP6001_ECB compound:
a. Click CP6001_ECB in the Compound # Default window so that it becomes highlighted.
b. Click Block.
c. Click Append Block.
d. Enter ECB_SLOT00.
e. Use the arrows to cursor through the Type window and click ECB110. Click OK.
f. Click Block.
g. Click Append Block.
211
B0400FA Rev D
h. Enter ECB1_SLOT03.
i. Use arrows to cursor through the Type window and click ECB1. Click OK.
j. Continue adding blocks in this manner for the items in the table below:
Block Name
ECB2_SLOT04
ECB5_SLOT05
ECB5_SLOT06
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
y.
Type
ECB2
ECB5
ECB5
Click ECB_SLOT00 in Block # Type Default window.

Click Block.
Click Block Parameters.
Enter FCM ECB for SLOT00 in the Descrp text box.
Enter SLOT00 in the Dev_id text box.
Enter 200 in the Hwtype text box.
Enter 110 in the Swtype text box. Click OK.
Click ECB1_SLOT03 in the Block # Type Default window.
Click Block.
Click Block Parameters.
Enter ECB1 for SLOT03 TC INPUT in the Descrp text box.
Enter SLOT03 in the Dev_id text box.
Enter 202 in the Hwtype text box.
Enter 1 in the Swtype text box. Click OK.
Continue configuring blocks in this manner for the items in the table below:
Description
ECB2 for SLOT04
FBM204
ECB5 for SLOT05
FBM241
ECB5 for SLOT06
FBM241
Dev_id
Hwtype
Swtype
SLOT04
204
SLOT05
241
SLOT06
241
7. Save the FoxCAE database compounds to diskette:

a. Click CP6001_STA in the Compound # Default window so that it becomes highlighted.
b. Press the keyboard Ctrl key and T key, causing a diamond to appear to the left of
the compound indicating selection.
c. Click CP6001_ECB in the Compound # Default window so that it becomes highlighted.
d. Press the keyboard Ctrl key and T key, causing a diamond to appear to the left of
the compound indicating selection.
212
B0400FA Rev D
e. Insert a formatted diskette into the PCs floppy drive.

f. Click the icon with the arrow pointing into the disk.
g. A dialog box appears with Insert diskette in drive: A:\. Click OK.
h. Remove diskette, and label it FoxCAE CP60 Control Database and date.
8. Transfer the FoxCAE database to the CP60. [Refer to FoxCAE Version 3.0
(B0193MR).]
Off-Line Control Configuration using the ICC

To perform off-line integrated control configuration using the ICC, refer to Integrated Control
Configurator (B0193AV) for details and proceed as follows.
NOTE
The following procedure assumes that System Definition has been performed. See
System Definition on page 203.
1. Using the System Management displays (accessible at an I/A Series workstation), boot
up the Control Processor (CP) to which the DIN rail mounted FBM subsystem
equipment will be attached. This creates two compounds:
Station compound (CPLBUG_STA)1 containing the station block
(CPLBUG_STA:STATION)1
ECB compound (Cplbug_ECB)1 containing the primary ECB
(CPLBUG_ECB:PRIMARY_ECB)1.
2. Open the Control Configurator and access the control station (CP60) in question.
3. Use the Control Configurators Fix All function to create ECB(s) for the FCMs and
FBMs added previously to the system configuration via System Definition.
4. If required, edit the FCM/FBM ECB(s) if the default parameters provided are not satisfactory. (See Note immediately following this step.) Figure 6-2 shows a typical editing display for the FCM ECB (110), and Figure 6-3 provides definitions of the
configurable ECB110 parameters. Figure 6-4 through Figure 6-7 show typical editing
displays for the FBM201, FBM204, FBM217, and FBM241 ECBs. [For definitions
of the FBM ECB parameters, refer to Integrated Control Block Descriptions
(B0193AX)]. Values for the HWTYPE and SWTYPE ECB parameters for the various
types of DIN rail mounted FBMs are provided in Appendix C DIN Rail Mounted
FBM Control Schemes.
NOTE
For ready reference, ECB parameter information appears in a show window along
the right side of the ECB editing displays (see Figure 6-4 through Figure 6-7). The
show window is accessed by selecting Show in the menu bar, and then selecting
Legal FBM then ECB Combos.
1.
The CP letterbug (CPLBUG) is filled in by the station being configured.

213
B0400FA Rev D
For this ECB (ECB110):

HWTYPE = 200
SWTYPE = 200
FIBER = Not used
Figure 6-2. Typical Editing Display for FCM ECB110
214
Name
B0400FA Rev D
Description
Type
Accessibility
Default
Units/Range
NAME
block name
string
no-con/no-set
blank
1 to 12 chars
TYPE
block type
integer
no-con/no-set
blank
ECB110
DESCRP
descriptor
string
no-con/no-set
blank
1 to 32 chars
DEV_ID
FCM letterbug
char[6]
no-con/no-set
blank
6 chars
HWTYPE
hardware type
short
no-con/no-set
[0..]
SWTYPE
software type
short
no-con/no-set
[0..]
FIBER
-----NOT USED-----
NAME
Name is a user-defined string of up to 12 characters used to access the block

and its parameters.
TYPE
When you enter ECB110 or select it from a configurator list, an identifying integer is created specifying this block type.
DESCRP
Description is a user-defined string of up to 32 characters that describe the

blocks function.
DEV_ID
Device Identifier is a character array that specifies the 6-character letterbug

identifier of the FCM.
HWTYPE
Hardware Type is configured (by the user) as 200. Once HWTYPE is configured, it appears in a darker color, indicating that this parameter cannot be
edited using the FCM Configure function.
SWTYPE
Software Type is configured (by the user) as 200. Once SWTYPE is configured,
it appears in a darker color, indicating that this parameter cannot be edited
using the FCM Configure function.
Figure 6-3. ECB110 Configurable Parameters
215
B0400FA Rev D
Figure 6-4. Typical Editing Display for FBM201 (Analog Input, ECB1)
Figure 6-5. Typical Editing Display for FBM204 (Analog Output, ECB2)
216
B0400FA Rev D
Figure 6-6. Typical Editing Display for FBM207 (Digital Input, ECB5)
Figure 6-7. Typical Editing Display for FBM241 (Digital Output, ECB5)
217
B0400FA Rev D
5. Referring to the documents Integrated Control Software Concepts (B0193AW) and

Integrated Control Block Descriptions (B0193AX), configure the necessary compounds
and blocks for the desired control scheme. Typical control schemes using the various
types of DIN rail mounted FBMs are shown in Appendix C, DIN Rail Mounted
FBM Control Schemes on page 247. Also shown in Appendix C are typical block
parameter settings that are used with the various types of DIN rail mounted FBMs.
On-Line Control Configuration using the ICC

To perform on-line integrated control configuration using the ICC, refer to Integrated Control
Configurator (B0193AV) for details and proceed as follows:
1. Using the System Management displays (accessible at an I/A Series workstation), boot
up the Control Processor (CP) to which the DIN rail mounted FBM subsystem
equipment will be attached. This creates two compounds:
Station compound (CPLBUG_STA)2 containing the station block
(CPLBUG_STA:STATION)2
ECB compound (CPLBUG_ECB)2 containing the primary ECB
(CPLBUG_ECB:PRIMARY_ECB)2.
2. Open the Control Configurator and access the control station in question.
3. Using the Control Configurators Insert New Block/ECB function, create an ECB for
each DIN rail mounted FCM and FBM in the subsystem.
4. If required, edit the FCM/FBM ECB(s) if the default parameters provided are not satisfactory (see Figure 6-4 through Figure 6-7 for examples, and also refer to the NOTE
below). The HWTYPE and SWTYPE ECB parameters for the various types of DIN
rail mounted FBMs are shown in Appendix C DIN Rail Mounted FBM Control
Schemes. For information on other ECB parameters, refer to Integrated Control Block
Descriptions (B0193AX).
NOTE
For ready reference, ECB parameter information appears in a show window along
the right side of the ECB editing displays (see Figure 6-4 through Figure 6-7). The
show window is accessed by selecting Show in the menu bar, and then selecting
Legal FBM/ECB Combos.
5. Referring to the documents Integrated Control Software Concepts (B0193AW) and
Integrated Control Block Descriptions (B0193AX), configure the necessary compounds
and blocks for the desired control scheme. Typical control schemes using the various
types of DIN rail mounted FBMs are shown in Appendix C DIN Rail Mounted
FBM Control Schemes. Also shown in Appendix C are typical block parameter settings that are used with the various types of DIN rail mounted FBMs.
2.
218
The CP letterbug (CPLBUG) is filled in by the station being configured.
B0400FA Rev D
Fail-Safe Operation
Fail-safe parameters in the controlling ECBs specify the outputs of the associated FBM in the
event of a break in communication with the CP. All fail-safe operations are initiated by the FBM,
and all fail-safe parameters are downloaded each time the system is initialized.
Each time the FBM receives a write request, it resets a fail-safe timer for its ECB. The FBM asserts
a fail-safe condition for the ECB if it does not receive another output command within a specified
time. The fail-safe condition can be either of the following:
Hold Current Value Hold the value sent in the most recent output command from
the CP.
Use Fallback Value Use a value specified for the output (specified in the ECB).
The ECBs for the FBMs include parameters for enabling and disabling fail-safe and for setting a
fail-safe delay for the outputs. These parameters are downloaded to the FBMs database from the
CP each time the subsystem is initialized or reconfigured, and each time you execute a download
command from the System Management display. If fail-safe is enabled for a specific output, the
FBM asserts fail-safe actions.
When normal operation resumes, the current output values are read by the CP and stored in the
ECBs. These values in turn are used by the I/O blocks as the starting point for new output
commands.
NOTE
Fail-safe operation for an FBM requires that a process block be connected to the
FBMs ECB.
Fail-Safe Functionality
FBM actions that occur during various failed conditions are dependant upon two things: the configuration of the FBM fail-safe parameters and the type of FBM failure. Two basic types of FBM
failures can occur: Type 1 failures, such as FBM OFF-LINE, FBM DOWNLOAD, or FBM
EEPROM UPDATE, involve an actual FBM failure; Type 2 failures (COMM FAIL), involve a
loss of communications.
Fail-Safe for Type 1 Failures - FBM FAIL

Two variables (parameters), fail-safe mask (FSMM1) and fail-safe data (FSD0n), determine the
action that the FBM takes when a Type 1 failure occurs. FSMM1, configured for a particular output, determines the state that is asserted at the output: Fallback Value, or Hold Current Value.
The default setting of the fail-safe mask parameter is zero, to assert the Fallback Values. The mask
can be set so that some outputs hold while others fall back. FSD0n, also configured for a particular output, determines the fallback value. The default value for analog outputs is zero, and the
default value for digital values is false.
219
B0400FA Rev D
Fail-Safe for Type 2 Failures - COMM FAIL

In addition to the fail-safe mask and fail-safe data parameters, there are two other parameters,
FSENAB and FSDLAY, that affect the FBMs response to communications failures. FSENAB
determines whether the output simply holds (FSENAB = 0) its output value during the
communications failure until the communications failure ceases, or if it delays fail-safe action
(FSENAB = 1) for the time specified by FSDLAY and then responds in the same way as Type 1
failures.
Fail-Safe Examples
The following examples are fail-safe operations for an analog type I/O ECB with two outputs.
The operation is performed for the first output point, which is point number 1. An AOUT block
is used, and the output is driven at a value of 75% of full scale. The Fallback Value is configured
to be 25% of full scale (FSD01 = 16000). FSDLAY is set to 1000, which is equal to a delay time
of 10 seconds.
Example 1: FSENAB = 0 and FSMM1 = 0X00
a. Cause: Type 1 failure.
Result: Output immediately goes to 25%.
b. Cause: Type 2 failure.
Result: Output holds at 75%.
Result: Output immediately goes to 25%.
Result: Output holds at 75% for 10 seconds, then goes to 25%.
b. Cause: Type 2 failure
Result: Output holds at 75% for 10 seconds, then continues to hold at 75%.
FBM205/FBM237 Fail-Safe Parameter Configuration

Proper operation of the redundant FBM205 or FBM237 modules requires that the fail-safe
parameters in the ECBs associated with both FBMs (main and backup) be correctly configured.
In general, the FBM outputs must be configured to fail to a zero value in order to allow the opposite (non-failed) FBM to assume (or continue) control without interference from the failed module. Table 6-2 outlines the fail-safe parameter requirements.
220
B0400FA Rev D
Table 6-2. Required Fail-Safe Parameter Settings for Redundant FBM ECBs
Parameter
FSENAB
FSDLAY
FSMMxx
FSDMxx
Description
Required Setting
Enables/disables fail-safe for all FBM channels.

Delay time for communications to have ceased
before the fail-safe values are asserted on the outputs.
Affects all FBM channels.
Specifies the fail-safe action to be taken on each of
the outputs: use fail-safe value, or hold at last value.
Fail-safe values (one per channel).
Enabled
Per process/system
security requirements
Fail-safe value
Zero
For information on how to set these parameters, refer Fail-Safe Operation on page 219, and also
refer to the following documents:
Integrated Control Software Concepts (B0193AW)
Integrated Control Configurator (B0193AV).
Troubleshooting
As stated above, fail-safe operation for an FBM requires that a process block be connected to the
FBMs ECB. If this requirement is not fulfilled, in some cases an FBMs fail-safe LED will not
return to a steady green when a communication break has been resolved. In this instance, either
the FBM OFF Line/ON Line button must be toggled or the FBM must be downloaded in order
to return the LED to its steady green status.
221
B0400FA Rev D
222
7. Process Operator Displays

This chapter provides references for information on the operator displays used with the
I/A Series system (and thus the DIN rail mounted FBM subsystem).
The I/A Series system provides the following types of displays for performance of process control
operations:
Select Screen Display (compound and block overview display)
Group Displays
User-Generated Displays
Block Detail Displays
Compound Detail Displays
Station Displays.
For information on how these displays are used, refer to Process Operations and Displays
(B0193MM).
223
B0400FA Rev D
224
7. Process Operator Displays
8. Maintenance
This chapter provides information on maintaining the DIN rail mounted FBM subsystem.
DIN rail mounted FBM subsystem maintenance includes periodic inspection and cleaning,
checking the status of LED indicators, and checking for loose cable connections.
! WARNING
System Management Displays

The I/A Series system management software System Management Display Handler (SMDH)
obtains current and historical information about the system and displays this information in System Management displays. These displays, which reflect the systems current operating status,
provide a valuable maintenance aid by allowing you to observe the current operating status of the
various system elements, intervene in system operations, and perform diagnostics. With regard to
the DIN rail mounted FBM subsystem, the SMDH provides the following displays:
A Fieldbus level display (PIO Network), which shows the control station (control processor), FCM(s), and any other Fieldbus devices
A module Fieldbus level display (PIO SUB NETWORK ), which shows the selected
FCM and associated FBMs
Detailed equipment change (EQUIP CHG) and equipment information (EQUIP INFO)
displays for each FBM.
For detailed information on the use of the System Management Displays, refer to System Management Displays (B0193JC).
NOTE
For information relating to the equipment information display fields for

Profibus-DP FBMs (FBM223) and slave devices refer to Profibus-DP Communication Interface Module (FBM223) Users Guide (B0400FE). For information relating to
the equipment information display fields for HART FBMs
(FBM214/215/216/218) and slave devices refer to HART Communication Interface
Module (FBM214/215/216/218) Users Guide (B0400FF). For information relating
to the equipment information display fields for Modbus Interface FBM224 and
slave devices refer to Modbus Communication Interface Module (FBM224) Users
Guide (B0400FK).
225
B0400FA Rev D
8. Maintenance
Fieldbus Level and Module Fieldbus Level Displays Examples

Figure 8-1 and Figure 8-2 are examples of a Fieldbus level display (PIO Network) and a
module Fieldbus level display (PIO SUB NETWORK).
Figure 8-1. PIO Bus Network Display (Typical)
226
8. Maintenance
B0400FA Rev D
Figure 8-2. PIO Bus Subnetwork Display (Typical)
FBM Equipment Information Display Example

Figure 8-3 is an example of an FBM Equipment Information display. Definitions of the text fields
(Name, Type, and so forth) are the same for other FBMs in the I/A Series system, with the exception of the POWER 1, POWER 2, PRIM CMD STAT and FBM STATUS fields. [Refer to System
Management Displays (B0193JC) for a description of these fields].
227
B0400FA Rev D
8. Maintenance
Figure 8-3. FBM203 Equipment Information Display
The POWER 1, POWER 2, PRIM CMD STAT and FBM STATUS field values are described below.
POWER 1 and POWER 2

The POWER 1 and POWER 2 fields in the Equipment Information display can have the following
values:
POWER 1
OK/FAILED = Primary power to FBM is OK/FAILED.
POWER 2
OK/FAILED = Secondary power to FBM is OK/FAILED.
PRIM CMD STAT Field

The PRIM CMD STAT field in the Equipment Information display can have the following values, as described in Table 8-1.
Table 8-1. PRIM CMD STAT Field Values
Value
=0
=1
=2
=3
>3
228
Description
Normal, no error
Success with retry (this condition is very rare)
FCM timed out FBM
CP timed out FCM
Link level protocol error (this condition is very rare, and transient)
8. Maintenance
B0400FA Rev D
FBM STATUS Field

The FBM STATUS field in the Equipment Information display can have the following values, as
described in Table 8-2.
Table 8-2. Explanations of the Bits (Set to 1) related to the FBM Status
Bit
Value
Bit 0
Bit 1
0x01
0x02
Bit 2
0x04
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
0x08
0x10
0x20
0x40
Bit 7
0x80
Description
Set if the FBM status changes - requests CP to poll for extended status.
Set if the Diagnostic Register is non-zero. This indicates a fatal error.
The FBM does not start if this bit is set.
Normally set for non-fail-safe condition - this is the typical status for
an FBM with a green status LED on (see page 233). Reset only if the
output mode of operation is fail-safe.
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
Set only if the FBM is off-line. In Off-line mode, the software control
is ROM-based; in On-line mode, the software is RAM-based.
Set if initialization is taking place. All channel and I/O data is initializing.
Also, set if the FBM has a delayed response message ready. This is
normally associated only with FBMs that support child devices (such as
the FoxCom transmitters).
FCM Equipment Information Display Example

Figure 8-4 and Figure 8-5 (two parts) are an example of an FCM Equipment Information display
(pertains to FCM10E or FCM10Ef ). The text fields (Name, Type, and so forth) are described in
Table 8-3.
NOTE
In the text fields in the FCM Equipment Information display, an A or B indicates

that the field pertains to Module A or Module B of the pair. Absence of an A or B
indicates that the field pertains to either module.
229
B0400FA Rev D
8. Maintenance
Figure 8-4. FCM10E/FCM10Ef Equipment Information Display (1 of 2)
Figure 8-5. FCM10E/FCM10Ef Equipment Information Display (2 of 2)
230
8. Maintenance
B0400FA Rev D
Table 8-3. FCM Equipment Information Display Fields
Field
Name
Type
Run Mode
Device State
Fail Ack. State
Alarming State
Fail Dev. Att.

Fail Dev. Ack.
Compound Name
Block Name
EEPROM State
DLOAD State
Ethernet Addr.
Power 1, 2
HDLC Mode
Form Fact.
Baud Rate
ENET Mode
Dbug Mode
Comm Lost
Manuf. Date
Hardwr. Part
Hardwr. Rev.
Softwr. Rev
Program
Softwr. Type
Hardwr. Type
Explanation
User-supplied ECB name.
User-supplied ECB type descriptor.
On-line or Off-line (as controlled by the operator using the Equipment
Change display).
Failed or not failed. This field is initially not failed. This field changes to failed
if hardware problem (including a possible communications cable brake) causes
the FCM to fail.
Acknowledged or not acknowledged. This field is initially set to
Acknowledged. If the DEVICE STATE changes from not failed to failed,
the FAIL ACK STATE field changes to Not Acknowledged to indicate this
transition, and remains until the FCM failure is acknowledged by the user.
Indicates whether alarming is enabled or inhibited for the device. When
alarming is inhibited, the System Monitor continues to indicate overall system
and network health (a green SYS BAR) while equipment is failed or off-line.
A device (FBM) connected to the FCM has failed.
Acknowledgement of Fail Dev. Att. (Acknowledgement of a failure in a device
attached to the FCM.)
Name of the compound that contains the FCM ECB.
The text string configured (using ICC) for the ECBs name.
FCM software updating/not updating.
FCM software downloading/not downloading.
Network address of the FCM on the Ethernet network.
Failed/OK state of associated primary (1) and backup (2) power supplies.
1 = loopback, 0 = normal
Form factor of FCM.
Baud rate of associate module Fieldbus.
0 = normal, 1 = monitor, 2 = answers anything, 3 = loopback
0 = off, 1 = on
0 = normal communication, 1 = communication lost
Date of FCM manufacture.
Part number of FCM.
Hardware revision of FCM.
Software revision of FCM.
Normal/Backup status of FCM. (If Backup, a problem is indicated.)
User-entered value, as configured with the ICC for the ECB.
User-entered value, as configured with the ICC for the ECB.
231
B0400FA Rev D
8. Maintenance
Table 8-3. FCM Equipment Information Display Fields (Continued)
Field
Explanation
FCM Cmd. Status
Hexadecimal value associated with the return status, included in the header of
every response from the FCM and the station:
Hex value = 1 (bit position set = 0): Command not understood.
Hex value = 2 (bit position set = 1): Command understood, but unable to
take action.
Hex value = 4 (bit position set = 2): Invalid argument.
Hexadecimal value relating to the current FCM status. Typically, the value is
4, indicating the instructions are valid (Bit 2 is set). Listed below are
explanations of the bits (set to 1) relating to the FCM status:
Bit 0: Set if the FCM status changes.
Bit 1: Set of the Diagnostic Register is non-zero. The FCM does not start
if this bit is set.
Bit 2: Not used.
Bit 3: Not used.
Bit 4: Not used.
Bit 5: Not used.
Bit 6: Set only if the FCM is off-line.
Bit 7: Set if initialization is taking place.
FCM Status
NOTE
PRIM CMD STATUS, FBM STATUS, and FCM CMD STATUS are not currently in
in the FCM Equipment Information display. ECB STATUS contains no unique
use
information; any information it carries is shown elsewhere on the display.
FBM205 Redundant Power Supply Test (Internally

Powered Transmitter)
NOTE
This status check pertains to redundant FBM205 inputs that are powered from the
FBM. It does not pertain to externally powered inputs.
The purpose of the following test is to validate operation of the per channel power supply for each
module in the FBM205 module pair. The test should be performed periodically. (The more often
the test is performed, the higher the reliability.)
The power supplies of each input channel of a redundant pair are diode ORd on the redundant
adapter associated with the input pair. Test points are provided on the redundant adapter to measure loop power for each channel.
The FBM205 redundant adapter is shown in Figure 8-6. Along the bottom of the redundant
adapter are test point commons [Input (-)] for each channel. Along the top and right side are positive test points [Input (P)] for each channel. [Two test points are provided for each channel, one
for the left FBM05 module (1), and one for the right FBM05 module (2)].
232
8. Maintenance
B0400FA Rev D
To perform the status check, refer to Figure 8-6 and proceed as follows:
1. Place the negative probe of a voltmeter at test point common 01 [Input (-)], and test
the loop power (voltage) for channel 01, modules 1 and 2 [at Input (P) 01]. Both
readings should be 24 V dc 5%. A reading significantly below spec indicates a defective module (defective loop power).
2. Repeat Step 1 for the remaining three channels (02, 03, and 04), using the respective
common points and loop power test points.
Test Points
102 2
Input (P)
Input (P)
2 03 1
1 01 2
2 04 1
FBM205
Redundant Adapter
Input (-)
P0916NN
01 02 03 04
Test Point Commons

Figure 8-6. FBM205 Redundant Adapter
LED Indicators
LED indicators at the front of the FBMs (Fieldbus Modules) and the FCMs (Fieldbus Communications Modules) indicate the operational status of these devices.
FBM LED Indicators

Two status LEDs (red and green) at the front of each DIN rail mounted FBM provide indications
of operational status, as described in Table 8-4.
NOTE
For details on LED indicators for FBM220/221, refer to FOUNDATION fieldbus H1

Communication Interface Modules (FBM220/FBM221) Users Guide (B0400FD).
233
B0400FA Rev D
8. Maintenance
Table 8-4. FBM Operational Status LEDs
Red LED
Green LED
Off*
On
Off*
Flashing
On
On
Off*
Off*
On
Flashing
Status
Power to card failed or switched off.
Failure detected during start-up diagnostics:
RAM test Green LED flashing once every five seconds indicates a
failure in the low byte RAM chip. Green LED flashing twice every five
seconds indicates a failure in the high byte RAM chip.
HDLC, DMA, Timer, and Interrupt Controller tests Green LED
flashing three times every five seconds indicates a failure (an ASIC
problem).
ROM test Green LED flashing four times every five seconds indicates
a ROM checksum error was detected in the primary or secondary
ROM, or in the ROM copy of the Product Data Block. (Associated
error message is printed on the system alarm printer.)
To clear the diagnostic error, reboot the module.
If the problem still exists, remove power from the module and reapply
(refer to the WARNING at the beginning of this chapter, on page 225).
If problem continues, replace the module (see Module
Removal/Replacement on page 237).
Start-up diagnostics passed and FBM is ready to be brought on-line by
the CP.
FBM on-line and functional. (This is the normal run state.)
During operation (on-line), the FBM experienced a break in
communications with the I/A Series control station and reverted to its
fail-safe mode. (Refer to Fail-Safe Operation on page 219 for details.)
*Either LED, when in the OFF condition, appears clear (colorless).
In addition to the status LEDs, discrete input/output FBMs (such as the FBM207) include amber
LEDs which indicate the status of the associated I/O signal to/from the field device (such as a
relay). For input signals, the LED is on when an input voltage is present or the contact is closed.
For output signals, the LED is on when the FBM is supplying on-state current to the field device.
FCM LED Indicators

FCMs include the FCM10E, the FCM10Ef, and the FCM2F2/ 4/10. The functions of the LEDs
(see Figure 8-7) are described in Table 8-5, along with recommended troubleshooting/repair
actions.
234
8. Maintenance
B0400FA Rev D
Table 8-5. FCM LEDs
FCM
Indicator
Meaning
FCM10E
Operational
Status, Run
When illuminated (green),

indicates that the FCM is
operational (running).
When illuminated (red), indicates
a problem with the input power,
or a fault within the FCM.
When illuminated (amber),
indicates communication activity
between the FCM10E and the
connected FBMs is taking place.
Operational
Status, Fail
Fieldbus
FCM10Ef
Ethernet

between the FCM10E and the
I/A Series control station is taking
place.
Operational
Status, Run

a problem with the input power,
or a fault within the FCM.
Operational
Status, Fail
Fieldbus

between the FCM10Ef and the
connected FBMs is taking place.
Fiber

between the FCM10Ef and the
I/A Series control processor [via
the multi-port fiber optic
converter (hub) and the Ethernet
trunk Fieldbus] is taking place.
Troubleshooting/
Repair Action
None required.
Check the power supply output

and associated cabling. If power is
OK, replace the FCM10E.
If the LED fails to illuminate,
check the module Fieldbus,
particularly the connection at the
FCM10E. If the module Fieldbus
is OK, replace the FCM10E.
check the Ethernet cabling,
including the media converters
and the connection at the
FCM10E. If these prove OK,
replace the FCM10E.
None required
Check the power supply output

and associated cabling. If the
power is OK, replace the
FCM10Ef.
check the module Fieldbus,
particularly the connection at the
FCM10Ef. If the module
Fieldbus is OK, replace the
FCM10Ef.
check the Ethernet fiber optic
cabling and the associated media
converters, particularly the
connections at the media
converters and the FCM10Ef. If
these prove OK, replace the
FCM10Ef.
235
B0400FA Rev D
8. Maintenance
Table 8-5. FCM LEDs (Continued)
FCM
FCM2F/
2/4/10
Indicator
Meaning
Operational
Status, Run

problem with the input power, a
fault within the FCM, or a
reversed, severed, or
disconnected fiber link.
Operational
Status, Fail
236
Fieldbus

on the twinaxial module Fieldbus
(inherent in the baseplate on
which the FCM2F is mounted) is
taking place.
Fiber

over the fiber link between the
FCM2F and the corresponding
FCM2F in the next baseplate is
taking place.
Troubleshooting/
Repair Action
None required
Ensure that the fiber connections

(TX/RX) are correct. Check the
integrity of the fiber link. Check
the power supply output and the
associated cabling. If the power is
OK, replace the FCM2F.
check all the module Fieldbus
equipment and cabling,
(including connections)
associated with the FCM2F. If
these prove OK, replace the
FCM2F.
check the fiber optic cabling, and
associated connections between
this FCM2F and the
corresponding FCM2F. If these
prove OK, replace the
malfunctioning FCM2F.
8. Maintenance
B0400FA Rev D
FCM10E
FCM10Ef
Run
Fail
Module Fieldbus (To FBMs)
Ethernet Trunk
Fieldbus, Coaxial
(to I/A Series Station)
Run
Fail
Module Fieldbus
(to FBMs)
Fiber Ethernet Trunk
Fieldbus (to I/A Series
Station)
FCM2F2/4/10
Run
Fail
Module Fieldbus (to FBMs)
Fiber Module Fieldbus
(FCM2F to FCM2F)
Figure 8-7. FCM LED Indicators
Module Removal/Replacement
Subsystem modules can be removed or replaced under the following considerations:
Any module (FBM or FCM) can be removed or replaced with the power on without
causing damage to the module. See WARNING on page 238. (Care must be exercised, however, to ensure that process operations are not disrupted.)
For a redundant FBM205 or FBM237 pair, either module in the pair can be removed
at any time without disrupting process operations. See WARNING on page 238.
(The opposite module takes over control immediately.)
237
B0400FA Rev D
8. Maintenance
! WARNING
Technical Support
If technical support is needed, call the Customer Satisfaction Center (CSC) at 1-866-PHON-IPS
(1-866-746-6477) or online at http://ips.csc.invensys.com.
Module Return Procedure

Contact the Customer Satisfaction Center (see above) for a Return Authorization Number and
shipping address.
238
Appendix A. Module Specifications

Modules comprising the DIN rail mounted FBM subsystem consist of the following:
DIN rail mounted Fieldbus modules (FBMs)
Fieldbus communications modules (FCMs):
FCM10E
FCM10Ef
FCM2F2/FCM2F4/FCM2F10.
Module Physical Characteristics

Each DIN rail mounted Fieldbus module (FBM) and Fieldbus communications module has a
mass of 0.56 kg (1.25 lb). The dimensions of each device are (H/W/D) 98 mm (3.84 in), 51 mm
(2.0 in), 105 mm (4.13 in).
Module Temperature, Relative Humidity, and

Contamination
Temperature, relative humidity, and contamination specifications for the DIN rail mounted
FBM subsystem modules are as follows:
Temperature
Operating: -20 to +70C (-4 to +158F)
Storage: -40 to +70C (-40 to +158F).
Relative Humidity
5 to 95%, noncondensing (applies for both operating and storage environments)
Contamination Level
Class G3 (Harsh, as defined in ISA Standard, S71.04). The modules are intended
for Installation Category II, Pollution Degree 2.
! CAUTION
While the FBMs have a high operating temperature limit of 70 C, some termination assemblies have a high operating temperature limit of only 50 C. If in doubt
regarding the application/installation of certain termination assemblies for use with
associated FBMs, refer to the appropriate TA PSSs for the temperature specifications.
239
B0400FA Rev D
Module Electromagnetic Interference

Electromagnetic interference specifications for the DIN rail mounted FBM subsystem modules
(FBMs and FCMs) are listed in Table A-1 and Table A-2.
Table A-1. RFI, ESD, and HFT Specifications
Modules
FBMs and FCMs
1.
2.
3.
HFT3(kV)
RFI1 Sustained
(V/m)
ESD2 (kV)
10
Power
2.0
Signal
2.0
RFI = radio frequency interference susceptibility for the frequency range of 80 to

1000 MHz (reference IEC 61000-4-3).
ESD = electrostatic discharge (reference IEC 61000-4-2).
HFT = high frequency transients (reference IEC 61000-4-4); Power = main
power lines; Signal = I/O, control, signal, data/communication lines.
Table A-2. S/IL Transient Specifications
S/IL1 Transients (kV)

Modules
FBMs and FCMs
1.
Power
4
Signal
2
S/IL = switching/indirect lightning (reference IEC 61000-4-5

and ANSI/IEEE C62.41 - 1980); Power = main power lines,
Signal = I/O, control, signal, data, and communication lines.
Module Vibration
The vibration specification for the DIN rail mounted FBM subsystem modules (FBMs and
FCMs) is 0.75 g (at 5 to 200 Hz).
Module Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption

Refer to Chapter 2 Enclosure Installation for the heat dissipation and power consumption figures for the FBM and FCM modules in the DIN rail mounted FBM Subsystem. Also refer to that
section for thermal loading for the enclosures housing these modules.
240
B0400FA Rev D
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

European EMC Directive 89/336/EEC
EN 50081-2 Emission standard

EN 50082-2 Immunity standard.
IEC 61000-4-2 ESD Immunity
Contact 4 kV, air 8 kV.
IEC 61000-4-3 Radiated Field Immunity
10 V/m at 80 to 1000 MHz.
IEC 61000-4-4 Electrical Fast Transient/Burst Immunity
2 kV.
IEC 61000-4-5 Surge Immunity
2 kV.
IEC 61000-4-6 Immunity to Conducted Disturbances
10 V at 150 kHz to 80 MHz.
IEC 61000-4-8 Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity
30 A/m.
IEC 61000-4-11 Voltage Dips, Short Interruptions and Voltage

Variations Immunity
Refer to EN 50082-2 Immunity standard.
241
B0400FA Rev D
242
Appendix B. Ethernet/Fiber Optic

Equipment Specifications
Multiport Fiber Optic Converter (Hub) (P0916JM)
General Functional Specifications
Complies with IEEE 802.3, Ethernet, Version 1.0 and 2.0

Provides six 10Base-FL ports with ST, SC, or SMA connectors
Modular backbone port with optional Twisted Pair (10Base-T), Thinnet
(10Base-2), AUI (10Base-5), or Fiber Optic (10Base-FL) transceiver appliques
Standalone, 19-inch rack or chassis mounted
Three types of network management: SMNP, ASYNC, ASCII terminal port (Omega
Local) and Telnet (Omega Remote)
SNMP redundancy
Software upgrade capability through firmware cassette or in-band downloading.
Packet Transmission Characteristics

Delay Times
(Any segment in, to all other segments out)
Backbone port to fiber:
Start of Packet
Collision to Jam
Fiber to fiber:
Start of Packet
Collision to Jam
900ns Maximum
900ns Maximum
1400ns Maximum
1400ns Maximum
Preamble
Input
Output
32 bits Minimum including SFD

64 bit including SFD (last 2 bits are 1,1)
Jam Output
A pattern of 1,0 is sent to all segments (except receive port) when a collision is detected.
243
B0400FA Rev D
Appendix B. Ethernet/Fiber Optic Equipment Specifications
Auto Partitioning/Reconnection
Port partitioning occurs after 32 consecutive collisions or if collision has a duration of more than
one ms. Reconnection occurs after 512 bits are received or transmitted on the partitioned port
without collision (IEEE standard algorithm) or after the data is transmitted without collision for
512 bits (alternate algorithm).
Jabber Lock-Up Protection

For packets that exceed 64k bit, packet output is interrupted for 96 bit times.
Standard Software
SNMP Agent
Compliant with MIB II and SMNP Repeater MIB (hub MIB).
Local ASCII Terminal Agent (Omega Local)

Allied Telesyn ASCII terminal-based management agent via RS-232 ASYNC port with DB-9
connector.
Telnet (Omega Remote)

Telnet terminal emulation over Ethernet.
Inter-Repeater Bus
Allies Telesyn LAN and management bus used in conjunction with the 3600 Series chassis (passive backplane system.) Units connect over the bus at one repeater.
Software Downloading
1. Through insertion of a firmware module located on the back panel of the AT-3606F.
2. Downloading from other AT-3600 units on the same LAN (within the same IP
domain) initiated from terminal menus.
Fiber Optic Interface

Table B-1. Fiber Optic Interface Specifications
Optical
Wavelength
Sensitivity
Saturation
244
Typical
830 nm
-30 dBm
170 W (-7.6 dBm)
Worst
20 nm
150 W
B0400FA Rev D
Transmitter
Output Power:
62.5/125 M
100/140 M
50/125 M
-12.0 dBm
-6.5 dBm
-16.5 dBm
-15.0 dBm
-9.5 dBm
-19.5 dBm
Temperature
Operating
Storage
0 to 50C
-20 to 60C
Relative Humidity
5% to 80% noncondensing.
Electrical/Mechanical Approvals
EMI
Safety
CE Approved
FCC Class A
UL, TUV-GS, CSA, IEC 825-1 Class A
10Base2 Coaxial Transceiver Module (P0916JN)

The 10B2 coaxial transceiver module used is Allied Telesyn Model AT-8A 10Base-FL transceiver
applique for AT-3606F (ST).
BNC to Fiber-ST Media Converter

The BNC to Fiber-ST Media Converter (P0916JP) includes a 95-125 V ac 60 Hz power supply.
(For 220-240 operation, add 220-240 Vac power supply, P0916TZ.) supports the following network standards: Ethernet V1.0/2.0 IEEE 802.3: 10Base2, 10Base-T, FOIRL, and 10Base-FL.
Theses are physical layer standard Ethernet devices which operate independently of the I/A Series
control station software.
Performance
Data Rate: 10 Mbps (IEEE 802.3)
Network Standards
Ethernet V1.0/2.0 IEEE 802.3: 10BASE2. 10BASE-T. FOIRL. 10BASE-FL
(Black Box Media Converters are physical layer standard Ethernet products and operate independently of all software.)
245
B0400FA Rev D
Maximum Standard Ethernet Segment Lengths

10BASE-T (unshielded twisted pair):
10BASE2 ThinNet (BNC):
FOIRL Fiber optic:
10BASE-FL Fiber optic:
100 m (328 ft)

185 m (607 ft)
1.0 km (3,281 ft)
2.0 km (6,562 ft)
Operating Environment
Ambient Temperature:
Storage Temperature:
Ambient Relative Humidity:
32F to 122F (0C to 50C)

-20C to 60C
10% to 95% (non-condensing)
Power Supply (External)

Power Input: 95 - 125 V ac at 60 Hz for U.S. and Canadian models.
200 - 250 V ac at 50 Hz for international models which have IEC power cable connector.
Power Consumption: 6 watts maximum for the Media converter.
Connectors
RJ-45 Port:
BNC Port:
Fiber Port
Modular 8-Pin female, with MDI-X up-link switch

Standard BNC connector. RG-58 ThinNet
Fiber optic (standard ST type). 10BASE-FL
Agency Approvals
115 V 60 Hz Power Supply is UL Listed (UL 1310), CSA Certified.
230 V 50 Hz Power Supply is same, also TUV and GS approved.
246
Appendix C. DIN Rail Mounted

FBM Control Schemes
The following figures show typical control schemes configured for the various types of DIN rail
mounted FBMs. For information on control schemes for FBM 220/221, refer to the
FOUNDATION fieldbus H1 Communication Interface Modules (FBM220/FBM221) Users Guide
(B0400FD). For information on control schemes for FBM 214/215/216/218, refer to the HART
Communication Interface Modules (FBM214/215/216/218) Users Guide (B0400FF). For information on control schemes for FBM 223, refer to the Profibus-DP Communication Interface Modules
(FBM223) Users Guide (B0400FE). For information on control schemes for FBM224, refer to
the Modbus Communication Interface Module (FBM224) Users Guide (B0400FK).
AIN
AIN
AIN
4 - 20 mA
Analog Inputs
From Process
FBM201
ECB
1
AIN
AIN
See
Note
AIN
AIN
AIN
Note:
A MAIN control block can
be used in place of the
multiple AIN blocks.
DIN Rail Mounted

FBM Enclosure
Control Compound
ECB Parameters*
HWTYPE = 201, SWTYPE = 1
SCI (Signal Conditioning Index)
SCI for AIN block = 3
PNT_NO (Point Numbers) for AIN blocks
PNT_NO BLOCK
PNT_NO BLOCK
AI1
5
1
AI5
AI2
6
2
AI6
7
3
AI7
AI3
AI4
4
8
AI8
*For additional ECB parameters, refer to Integrated Control Block Descriptions (B0193AX).
FBM201 Channel Isolated 0 to 20 mA Input Interface Module

Figure C-1. FBM201, Typical Control Scheme
247
B0400FA Rev D
Appendix C. DIN Rail Mounted FBM Control Schemes
AIN
AIN
AIN
Thermocouple/mV
Analog Inputs
From Process
FBM202
ECB
1
AIN
AIN
AIN
See
Note
AIN
AIN
Note:
A MAIN control block can DIN Rail Mounted
FBM Enclosure
AIN (RTD Channel)

Control Compound
ECB Parameters*
SCI (Signal Conditioning Index) for AIN block
THERMOCOUPLE TYPE
B
E
J
K
N
R
S
T
SCI
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28

PNT_NO BLOCK
PNT_NO BLOCK
1
AI1
5
AI5
2
AI2
6
AI6
3
7
AI3
AI7
4
AI4
8
AI8
FBM202 Channel Isolated Thermocouple/mV Input Interface Module
248
B0400FA Rev D
AIN
AIN
AIN
RTD
Analog Inputs
From Process
FBM203
ECB
1
AIN
AIN
See
Note
AIN
AIN
AIN
Note:
DIN Rail Mounted

FBM Enclosure
Control Compound
ECB Parameters*
RTD TYPE
SCI
40
Copper (SAMA)
Nickel (SAMA)
41
42
Platinum (100 ohm DIN 43760-1968)
Platinum (100 ohm IEC, DIN 43760-1980) 43
44
Platinum (100 ohm SAMA)
PNT_NO (Point Number) for AIN blocks

PNT_NO BLOCK
1
AI1
2
AI2
3
AI3
4
AI4
AI5
5
AI6
6
7
AI7
8
AI8
FBM203 Channel Isolated Platinum, Nickel, and Copper RTD Input Interface Module
249
B0400FA Rev D
AIN
4 to 20 mA
Analog Inputs
From Process
AIN
AIN
AIN
ECB
2
FBM204
See
Note
AOUT
4 to 20 mA
Analog Outputs
To Process
AOUT
AOUT
AOUT
Note:
DIN Rail Mounted

FBM Enclosure
ECB Parameters*
Control Compound
PNT_NO (Point Number) for AIN/AOUT blocks
SCI/SCO (Signal Conditioning Index/Output)

SCO for AOUT block = 3
PNT NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BLOCK
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AO5
AO6
AO7
AO8
FBM204 Channel Isolated 0 to 20 mA I/O Interface Module

250
B0400FA Rev D
AINR
AINR
AINR
FBM205
ECB
2
FBM205
ECB
2
AINR
4 to 20 mA
Analog Inputs
From Process
Redundant
Adapter
4 to 20 mA
Analog Outputs
To Process
DIN Rail Mounted

FBM Enclosure
ECB Parameters*
SCI/SCO (Signal Conditioning Index/Output)
SCI for AINR block = 3
SCO for AOUTR block = 3
AOUTR
AOUTR
AOUTR
AOUTR
Control Compound
PNT_NO (Point Number) for AINR and AOUTR blocks

PNT NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BLOCK
AI1
AI2
AI3
AI4
AO5
AO6
AO7
AO8
FBM205 Redundant, Channel Isolated 0 to 20 mA I/O Interface Module

251
B0400FA Rev D
AIN
AIN
AIN
Pulse Rate Inputs
From Process
FBM206
AIN
ECB
4
AIN
See
Note
AIN
AIN
AIN
Note:
DIN Rail Mounted

FBM Enclosure
Control Compound
ECB Parameters*
SCI for AIN block = 8 (Pulse Rate)
PNT_NO BLOCK
PNT_NO
AI1
1
5
2
AI2
6
3
7
AI3
4
AI4
8
BLOCK
AI5
AI6
AI7
AI8
FBM206 Channel Isolated Pulse Input Interface Module

252
B0400FA Rev D
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
Voltage or
Contact Inputs
From Process
FBM207,
FBM207b,
or
FBM207c
CIN
ECB
5
CIN
See
Note
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
Control Compound
DIN Rail Mounted
Note:
FBM Enclosure
(I/A
Series Software)
MCIN control blocks can
multiple CIN blocks.
ECB Parameters*
HWTYPE = 207, SWTYPE = 5, 6, for DI, SWTYPE = 7 for Pulse Count
SWTYPE = 8 for Ladder Logic
PNT_NO (Point Number) for CIN Block:*
PNT NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BLOCK
CI1
CI2
CI3
CI4
CI5
CI6
CI7
CI8
PNT NO
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
BLOCK
CI9
CI10
CI11
CI12
CI13
CI14
CI15
CI16
*For additional ECB parameters, refer to (B0193AX).

FBM207/FBM207b Channel Isolated Voltage Monitor/Contact Sense Input Interface Module
Figure C-7. FBM207/FBM207b, Typical Control Scheme
253
B0400FA Rev D
AIN
AIN
AIN
AIN
AIN
AIN
AIN
4 - 20 mA
Analog Inputs
From Process
FBM211
ECB
1
AIN
AIN
See
Note
AIN
AIN
AIN
AIN
AIN
AIN
AIN
DIN Rail Mounted
FBM Enclosure
Control Compound
Note:
MAIN control blocks can
ECB Parameters*
PNT_NO BLOCK
PNT_NO
1
9
AI1
2
10
AI2
3
11
AI3
4
12
AI4
5
13
AI5
6
14
AI6
7
15
AI7
8
16
AI8
BLOCK
AI9
AI10
AI11
AI12
AI13
AI14
AI15
AI16
FBM211 Differential Analog Input Interface Module, 0 to 20 mA
254
B0400FA Rev D
AIN
AIN
AIN
AIN
AIN
AIN
MV or TC
Analog Inputs
From Process
FBM212
ECB
1
AIN
AIN
AIN
See
Note
AIN
AIN
AIN
AIN
AIN
AIN (RTD Channel)
DIN Rail Mounted
FBM Enclosure
Note:
A MAIN control block
can be used in place
of the multiple AIN blocks.

Control Compound
ECB Parameters*
SCI (Signal Conditioning Index) for AIN block*
THERMOCOUPLE TYPE
B
E
J
K
N
R
S
T
SCI
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28

PNT_NO BLOCK
PNT_NO BLOCK
1
AI1
9
AI9
2
AI2
10
AI10
3
AI3
11
AI11
4
AI4
12
AI12
5
13
AI5
AI13
6
AI6
14
AI14
7
AI7
8
AI8
FBM212 Differential Analog Input Interface Module, Thermocouple/mV
255
B0400FA Rev D
AIN
AIN
AIN
RTD
Analog Inputs
From Process
FBM213
ECB
1
AIN
AIN
See
Note
AIN
AIN
AIN
Note:
DIN Rail Mounted

FBM Enclosure
Control Compound
ECB Parameters*
RTD TYPE
SCI
Copper (SAMA)
40
Nickel (SAMA)
41
Platinum (100 ohm DIN 43760-1968)
42
Platinum (100 ohm IEC, DIN 43760-1980) 43
44
Platinum (100 ohm SAMA)
PNT_NO (Point Number) for AIN blocks

PNT_NO BLOCK
1
AI1
2
AI2
3
AI3
4
AI4
5
AI5
6
AI6
7
AI7
8
AI8
FBM213 Differential Platinum, and Nickel RTD Input Interface Module
256
B0400FA Rev D
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
Voltage Inputs
From Process
FBM217
CIN
ECB
5
CIN
See
Note
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
Note:
MCIN control blocks
can be used in place of
the multiple CIN blocks.
CIN
CIN
CIN
DIN Rail Mounted
FBM Enclosure
ECB Parameters*
HWTYPE = 217, SWTYPE = 5, 6, 7
PNT_NO (Point Number) for CIN Blocks
PNT NO BLOCK
CI1
1
CI2
2
3
CI3
4
CI4
5
CI5
6
CI6
7
CI7
8
CI8
PNT NO BLOCK
9
CI9
10
CI10
11
CI11
12
CI12
13
CI13
14
CI14
15
CI15
16
CI16
Control Compound
PNT NO BLOCK
CI17
17
CI18
18
19
CI19
20
CI20
21
CI21
22
CI22
23
CI23
24
CI24
PNT NO BLOCK
25
CI25
26
CI26
27
CI27
28
CI28
29
CI29
30
CI30
31
CI31
32
CI32
FBM217 Differential Voltage Monitor Input Interface Module
257
B0400FA Rev D
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
Voltage or
Contact Inputs
From Process
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
ECB
5
FBM219
CIN
CIN
See
Note
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
CIN
COUT
COUT
COUT
DC
Switching Outputs
To Process
COUT
COUT
COUT
COUT
COUT
DIN Rail Mounted
FBM Enclosure
ECB Parameters*
PNT_NO (Point Number) for CIN Blocks
PNT NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BLOCK
CI1
CI2
CI3
CI4
CI5
CI6
CI7
CI8
PNT NO
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
BLOCK
CI9
CI10
CI11
CI12
CI13
CI14
CI15
CI16
Control Compound
Note: MCIN and MCOUT control blocks can be used

in place of the multiple CIN and COUT blocks.
PNT NO
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
BLOCK
CI17
CI18
CI19
CI20
CI21
CI22
CI23
CI24
PNT NO
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
ECB5
ECB8
BLOCK BLOCK
CO9
CO1
C10
CO2
C11
CO3
C12
CO4
C13
CO5
C14
CO6
C15
CO7
C16
CO8
FBM219 Group Isolated Discrete I/O Interface Module
258
B0400FA Rev D
AOUTR
AOUTR
AOUTR
FBM237
4 to 20 mA
Analog Outputs
To Process
ECB
53
AOUTR
AOUTR
AOUTR
AOUTR
AOUTR
Redundant
Adapter
FBM237
DIN Rail Mounted

FBM Enclosure
ECB Parameters*
SCO (Signal Conditioning, Output)
SCO for AOUTR block = 3
ECB
53
Control Compound
PNT_NO (Point Number) for AOUTR blocks

PNT NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BLOCK
AO1
AO2
AO3
AO4
AO5
AO6
AO7
AO8
FBM237 Channel Isolated, Redundant Ready 0 to 20 mA Output Interface Module
259
B0400FA Rev D
CIN
CIN
CIN
Voltage or
Contact Inputs
From Process
CIN
CIN
CIN
FBM241,
FBM241b,
FBM241c
or
FBM241d
CIN
CIN
ECB
5
COUT
See
Note
COUT
COUT
COUT
DC
Switching Outputs
To Process
COUT
COUT
COUT
Note:
MCIN and MCOUT
control blocks can
multiple CIN and
COUT blocks.
COUT
DIN Rail Mounted
FBM Enclosure
Control Compound
ECB Parameters*
HWTYPE = 241, SWTYPE = 5 for DI/DO
PNT_NO (Point Number) for CIN Blocks*
PNT NO BLOCK
1
CI1
2
CI2
3
CI3
4
CI4
5
CI5
6
CI6
7
CI7
8
CI8
PNT NO BLOCK
9
CO9
10
CO10
11
CO11
12
CO12
13
CO13
14
CO14
15
COI15
16
CO16
FBM241/FBM241b/FBM241c/FBM241d Channel Isolated Voltage Monitor/Contact Sense
I/O Interface Module
Figure C-14. FBM241/FBM241b/FBM241c/FBM241d, Typical Control Scheme
260
B0400FA Rev D
COUT
COUT
COUT
COUT
COUT
COUT
COUT
Contact Outputs
To Process
FBM242
COUT
ECB
5
COUT
See
Note
COUT
COUT
COUT
COUT
COUT
COUT
COUT
DIN Rail Mounted
Note:
FBM Enclosure
MCOUT control blocks
can be used in place of
the multiple COUT blocks.
ECB Parameters*
HWTYPE = 242, SWTYPE = 5, 8
Control Compound
PNT_NO (Point Number) for CIN Blocks*

PNT NO BLOCK
CO1
1
CO2
2
3
CO3
CO4
4
5
CO5
6
CO6
7
CO7
8
CO8
PNT NO BLOCK
9
CO9
10
CO10
11
CO11
12
CO12
13
CO13
14
CO14
15
CO15
16
CO16
FBM242 Channel Isolated Externally Sourced Digital Output Interface Module
261
B0400FA Rev D
ECB18
ECB18
ECB18
Bidirectional
Communication
To Process
ECB18
FBM243
ECB73
ECB74
ECB74
ECB74
ECB74
See Note
DIN Rail Mounted

FBM Enclosure
Control Compound
NOTE:
1. This is an 8 channel FBM. It may be configured with any combination of ECB18 or
ECB74. Communication with the transmitter or Positioner is bidirectional.
2. ECB18 supports transmitters and the measurement and diagnostic data flow is
unidirectional. ECB74 supports positioners and the control and diagnostic data flow is
bidirectional.
ECB Parameters*
FBM243 FoxCom Dual Baud Rate Intelligent Device Interface Module
262
B0400FA Rev D
ECB18
ECB18
ECB18
Bidirectional
Communication
To Process
ECB18
FBM246
ECB38R
ECB74
ECB74
ECB74
ECB74
See Note
DIN Rail Mounted

FBM Enclosure
Control Compound
NOTE:
1. This is an 8 channel FBM. It may be configured with any combination of ECB18 or
ECB74. Communication with the transmitter or positioner is bidirectional. ECB18
supports transmitters and the measurement and diagnostic data flow is unidirectional.
ECB74 supports positioners and the control and diagnostic data flow is bidirectional.
2. The FBM246, ECB38R combination is functionally a redundant ECB73. Used in this way,
an ECB38R does not support directly connected I/O blocks. Used with an FBM246, the
ECB38R supports only ECB18 and ECB74. Configure ECB18s or ECB74s as if they
were being attached to an ECB73.
3. This is not the same as the typical FBM46 configuration that uses AINR and AOUTR
blocks connected directly to the ECB38R. In the FBM46 configuration, the ECB38R
behaves as a redundant ECB23 that supports four FoxCom transmitters and four
4-20 mA analog outputs.
ECB Parameters*
FBM246 Redundant FoxCom Dual Baud Rate Intelligent Device Interface Module
263
B0400FA Rev D
264
Index
A
Active Star network configuration 7
Adjoining enclosures 38
ANSI guidelines 240
B
B03 Enclosure
description 22
B04 Enclosure
description 22
B05 Enclosure
description 23
Balun 19, 20, 198
installation 199
Baseplate
cabling 84
description 1, 3
installation 60
power cabling 64
Bidirectional digital communications 192, 195
Bill of lading 30
Block (See also Control block) 206
C
Cable Balun 19, 20, 198
installation 199
Cable balun module with Intelligent Transmitters 198
Cable runs in hazardous areas 109
Cabling
baseplate level 84
Ethernet trunk Fieldbus 78
fiber optic 78, 86
field signal connections 91
Cabling network configurations
baseplate 2, 4, 87
Ethernet 2, 6
CENELEC 98
Channel isolation
definition 103
Classification
signal wire 95
COMM Fail 220
Control block 206
Control Configuration 209, 218
265
B0400FA Rev D
Control schemes
FBM 247
typical 206
Control station 1, 7
CSA requirements 98
D
Diagnostics 234
Differential isolation
definition 103
Digital communications 192, 195
digital communications 192, 195
Direct network configuration 6
E
B03/B04 enclosure 39
B05 enclosure 47
Earth (ground) networks 34
ECB 207
Electromagnetic interference 96, 240
Enclosure cable entry
B05 enclosure 44
Enclosure clearance
B03 enclosure 35
B04 enclosure 35
B05 enclosure 43
Enclosure configuration
B05 enclosure 45
Enclosure dimensions
B03 enclosure 35
B04 enclosure 35
Enclosure floor cut-out
B03 enclosure 35
B04 enclosure 35
Enclosure footprint
B03 enclosure 35
B04 enclosure 35
Enclosure installation
B03 enclosure 34
B04 enclosure 34
Enclosure mass
B05 enclosure 45
Enclosure mounting
B05 enclosure 45
Enclosure over-temperature sensing
B03 enclosure 38
B04 enclosure 38
B05 enclosure 46
266
Index
Index
B0400FA Rev D
Enclosure power connections

B03 enclosure 40
B04 enclosure 40
B05 enclosure 49
Enclosure thermal loading 31
Enclosures 21
adjoining 38
Entity parameters 99, 100, 101
Equipment Control Block (ECB)
creation 218
description 206, 207
Equipment installation 51
Equipment signal cabling 77
Ethernet trunk Fieldbus 1, 6
European Directives xviii
External source
definition 103
F
Fail-safe
examples 220
functionality 219
operation 219
FBM loops with external power 198
FBM STATUS field
FBM Equipment Information Displays 229
FCM Equipment Information Displays 232
FBM220/221 field connections 160
FCM Identification Assembly 4, 71
FCM10E Fieldbus Communications Module
description 7
installation 70
maintenance 234
FCM10Ef Fieldbus Communications Module
description 8
installation 70
maintenance 234
FCM2F2/4/10 Fieldbus Communications Module
description 9
installation 71
maintenance 234
Fiber optic cable 89
physical specifications 88, 90
Fiber optic cabling 78
Field input/output wiring
field connections 91, 109
maximum number of wires 97
number of wires 97
shield terminations 98
267
B0400FA Rev D
termination assembly connections 91

termination block sites 98
wire size 98
Fieldbus communications module
description 1, 7
installation 70
maintenance 233
Fieldbus module
description 1, 9
installation 69
maintenance 233
Fix All function 213
FoxCAE 207
FoxCom 19, 192, 194
G
Ground fault detection 57
Group isolation 103
H
Heat dissipation
FCMs and FBMs 31
power supplies 34
termination assemblies 33
Heat dissipation, module 240
Hub 1
I
I/A Series control station 1, 7
Indicators
LED 233
Indicators, LED 233
In-line resistor assembly 111, 118, 134
Installation
B05 enclosure 43
baseplate 60
cable balun 199
FCM10E and FCM10Ef 70
Fieldbus modules 69
power supply 51
redundant adapter 73
Integrated Control Configuration 209, 218
general 206
Intelligent Transmitter 198
with Hand-Held Transmitter 109, 116, 120, 133
IT 198
268
Index
Index
B0400FA Rev D
K
Kit
fiber optic installation 88
L
LED indicators 10, 233
Letterbug 71
determination 71, 204
installation 71
Library volume 207
M
Maintenance 225
Module
balun 198
Cable Balun 19, 20
Module Addressing 71
Module Fieldbus 1
Module identifier
see letterbug
Module return procedure 238
Multiport fiber optic converter 1
N
National Electrical Code 99
Network configurations
baseplate 2, 4, 87
Ethernet 2, 6
NFPA codes 99
P
Parameters
setting 213, 218
Physical specifications
fiber optic cable 90
POWER 1 and POWER 2 field
Power cabling
baseplate 64
Power checks
system 30
Power distribution network 34
Preinstallation procedures 29
PRIM CMD STAT field
FCM Equipment Information Displays 232
Process operator displays 223
269
B0400FA Rev D
Product sizing constraints 26

Product Specification Sheets xix
PSSs xix
R
Redundant adapter 12, 17, 20, 73
Referenced documents xix
Removal/replacement
FBMs and FCMs 237
Requirements
CSA 98
Resistors
in-line with FBM201/204/205/211 111
Return authorization 238
Revision information xvii
RTD 11, 14
S
Safety considerations xviii
Separation barrier 97
Shield terminations 98
Shielded twisted-pair cables 84, 86
Show window 213, 218
Signal cabling, equipment 77
Signal conditioning 25
Signal wire classification 95
Sizing constraints, product 26
SMDH 225
Software installation 205
ST-type connectors 89
Subsystem power checks 30
System Definition 203, 204
System Management Display Handler 225
System Management displays 213, 218
T
Technical support 238
Termination assemblies
description 1, 25
field wiring connections 91
installation 74
properties 103
TA cables 93
terms 103
Termination block sites 98
Termination cables 93
Terminations
shield 98
Thermal loading
270
Index
Index
B0400FA Rev D
enclosure 31
Thermocouple 10, 14
ThinNet 77, 78
Transmitter
intelligent 198
Turbine meter 13
Twisted-pair cables 84, 86
U
Unloading 30
Unpacking 30
V
Vibration 240
Vortex meter 13
W
Wire separation 97
Wiring
field I/O 95
requirements 99
size 98
termination block sites 98
271
B0400FA Rev D
Index
33 Commercial Street
Foxboro, Massachusetts 02035-2099
United States of America
www.foxboro.com
Inside U.S.: 1-866-PHON-IPS (1-866-746-6477)
Outside U.S.: 1-508-549-2424 or contact your local Foxboro representative.
Facsimile: 1-508-549-4999
Printed in U.S.A.
1002

Din Rail Mounted FBM Subsystem Users Guide

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Din Rail Mounted FBM Subsystem Users Guide

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

B0400FA

Fieldbus Modules ...................................................................................................................... 9

2. Enclosure Installation ...................................................................................................... 29

Thermal Loading .................................................................................................................... 31

B05 Enclosure Installation ......................................................................................................

Foxboro Power Supply (FPS400-24) ..................................................................................

Baseplate Installation ...............................................................................................................

Module Installation .................................................................................................................

FCM Identification Assembly Installation ............................................................................... 71

Signal Cable Connections Baseplate Level ............................................................................

Fiber Optic Cable Specifications ............................................................................................. 88

Enclosure Termination Assembly Complement .................................................................. 98

Electrical Service Life ................................................................................................... 202

Fail-Safe Operation ...............................................................................................................

7. Process Operator Displays............................................................................................. 223

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) .................................................................................

Appendix B. Ethernet/Fiber Optic Equipment Specifications............................................ 243

10Base2 Coaxial Transceiver Module (P0916JN) .................................................................. 245

Appendix C. DIN Rail Mounted FBM Control Schemes .................................................. 247

DIN Rail Mounted FBM Subsystem Elements ............................................................. 2

Baseplate Module and Letterbug Installation ............................................................... 70

FBM207c Termination Assembly Labeling for Contact Sensing ...............................

FBM241b Output Connections ................................................................................

FBM205, Typical Control Scheme ...........................................................................

FCM and FBM Heat Dissipation and Power Consumption ....................................... 31

FBM217 Termination Assemblies .............................................................................

Updated WARNING about installing/removing components in hazardous locations.

Compliance with European Directives

FoxCAE Version 3.0 (B0193MR)

Product Specification Sheet (PSS) Title

10 MBps (10Base2) Ethernet Trunk

Communication (up to 2km)

Fiber Optic Cabling

* Foxboro recommends the use of surge protectors (Citel

** Combinations of shielded twisted-pair and fiber optic

*** Refer to Figures 1-4 through 1-6 for baseplate cabling

Figure 1-1. DIN Rail Mounted FBM Subsystem Elements

Also, as indicated in Figure 1-1, module Fieldbus distribution (baseplate-to-baseplate) can be

Figure 1-3. FCM Identification Assemblies

Figure 1-4. Baseplate Interconnection Using Shielded Twisted-Pair Cable

Twisted-Pair Module Fieldbus

From I/A Series Control Station

Twisted-Pair Module Fieldbus

From I/A Series Control Station or

FCM2F2, FCM2F4, or FCM2F10

Ethernet Trunk Fieldbus Implementation

10Base2 (10 Mbps)

Optional Fiber Optic

Optional Fiber Optic

10Base2 (10 Mbps)

Fiber Optic Cable Pairs

Fieldbus Communications Modules

FCM10E Fieldbus Communications Module

Figure 1-9. FCM10E Fieldbus Communications Module

FCM10Ef Fieldbus Communications Module

Figure 1-10. FCM10Ef Fieldbus Communications Module

FCM2F2/FCM2F4/FCM2F10 Fieldbus Communications Module

Figure 1-11. FCM2F Fieldbus Communications Module

rail mounted Fieldbus Modules (FBMs) are compact, high-performance distributed

Figure 1-12. DIN Rail Mounted Fieldbus Module (Typical)

FBM201 Channel Isolated, 0 to 20 mA Input Interface Module

FBM202 Channel Isolated, Thermocouple/mV Input Interface

FBM203 Channel Isolated, Platinum and Nickel RTD Input

FBM204 Channel Isolated, 0 to 20 mA I/O Interface Module